Transaxle & Transmission: Section

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SECTION TM B
TM
E
CONTENTS
6MT: RS6F94R PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................ 24 F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 13 GEAR OIL ......................................................... 24

Exploded View .........................................................24 G
M/T SYSTEM ......................................................13 Draining ...................................................................24
System Diagram ...................................................... 13 Refilling ....................................................................24
System Description ................................................. 14 Inspection ................................................................24
H
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 15 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 25
POSITION SWITCH ............................................15 M/T SHIFT SELECTOR ..................................... 25 I
Exploded View .........................................................25
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ........................................ 15
Removal and Installation .........................................25
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Parts Lo-
cation ....................................................................... 15 CONTROL LINKAGE ........................................ 28 J
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspec- Exploded View .........................................................28
tion .......................................................................... 15 Removal and Installation .........................................28
Inspection ................................................................32 K
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ........... 15
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : SIDE OIL SEAL ................................................. 33
Component Parts Location ...................................... 15 Exploded View .........................................................33
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Removal and Installation .........................................33 L
Component Inspection ............................................ 15
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 34
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 17 Exploded View .........................................................34 M
Removal and Installation .........................................34
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................17 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 35
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 17 N
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 35
PRECAUTION .............................................. 18 Exploded View .........................................................35
Removal and Installation .........................................35 O
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................18
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 18 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 38
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Tran-
saxle ........................................................................ 18 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 38 P
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 18 Exploded View .........................................................38
Disassembly ............................................................43
PREPARATION ........................................... 20 Assembly .................................................................49
PREPARATION ..................................................20 INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR ............................... 55
Special Service Tools ............................................ 20 Exploded View .........................................................55
Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 22 Disassembly ............................................................55
TM-1
Assembly ................................................................ 56 PRECAUTION ............................................ 78
Inspection ............................................................... 58
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 78
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR .................................. 60 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover... 78
Exploded View ........................................................ 60 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 78
Disassembly ........................................................... 60 Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Tran-
Assembly ................................................................ 61 saxle ........................................................................ 79
Inspection ............................................................... 63
PREPARATION .......................................... 80
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR ............. 65
Exploded View ........................................................ 65 PREPARATION ................................................. 80
Disassembly ........................................................... 65 Special Service Tools ............................................ 80
Assembly ................................................................ 66 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 80
FINAL DRIVE ..................................................... 67 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 81

Exploded View ........................................................ 67
Disassembly ........................................................... 67 GEAR OIL .......................................................... 81
Assembly ................................................................ 67 Exploded View ........................................................ 81
Inspection ............................................................... 68 Draining ................................................................... 81
Refilling ................................................................... 81
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD ......................... 70 Inspection ................................................................ 81
Exploded View ........................................................ 70
Disassembly ........................................................... 70 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 82
Assembly ................................................................ 70
Inspection ............................................................... 70 DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT SEAL ....................... 82
Exploded View ........................................................ 82
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Removal and Installation ......................................... 82
(SDS) ........................................................... 71 CONTROL LINKAGE ........................................ 83
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Exploded View ........................................................ 83
(SDS) .................................................................. 71 Removal and Installation ......................................... 83
Inspection ................................................................ 86
General Specification ............................................. 71
6MT: RS6F95R AIR BREATHER HOSE ..................................... 87
Exploded View ........................................................ 87
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 73 Removal and Installation ......................................... 87
M/T SYSTEM ..................................................... 73 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 88
System Diagram ..................................................... 73
System Description ................................................. 74 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 88
Exploded View ........................................................ 88
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 75 Removal and Installation ......................................... 88
POSITION SWITCH ........................................... 75 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 91
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ........................................ 75
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................................ 91
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Parts Lo-
Exploded View ........................................................ 91
cation ...................................................................... 75
Disassembly ............................................................ 96
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspec-
Assembly .............................................................. 103
tion .......................................................................... 75
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH .......... 75

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR .............................. 112
Exploded View ...................................................... 112
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH :
Component Parts Location ..................................... 75 Disassembly .......................................................... 112
Assembly .............................................................. 112
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH :
Component Inspection ............................................ 75 Adjustment ............................................................ 114
Inspection .............................................................. 115
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 77
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR ................................. 117
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Exploded View ...................................................... 117
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 77 Disassembly .......................................................... 117
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ................................... 77 Assembly .............................................................. 117
Inspection .............................................................. 119
TM-2
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR ............ 121 Special Service Tools .......................................... 135
Exploded View ...................................................... 121 Commercial Service Tools ................................... 138 A
Disassembly .......................................................... 121
Assembly ............................................................... 121 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 140
Adjustment ............................................................ 121 B
GEAR OIL ....................................................... 140
Inspection .............................................................. 122
4WD .......................................................................... 140
FINAL DRIVE ................................................... 123 4WD : Exploded View ............................................ 140
Exploded View ...................................................... 123 C
4WD : Draining ...................................................... 140
Disassembly .......................................................... 123
4WD : Refilling ....................................................... 140
Assembly ............................................................... 123
4WD : Inspection ................................................... 140
Adjustment ............................................................ 123 TM
Inspection .............................................................. 124 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 142
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD ....................... 125 SIDE OIL SEAL ............................................... 142
Exploded View ...................................................... 125 E
Exploded View ....................................................... 142
Disassembly .......................................................... 125 Removal and Installation ....................................... 142
Assembly ............................................................... 125
Inspection .............................................................. 125 CONTROL LINKAGE ...................................... 143 F
Exploded View ....................................................... 143
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Removal and Installation ....................................... 143
(SDS) .......................................................... 126 Inspection .............................................................. 146 G
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 147
(SDS) ................................................................ 126 Exploded View ....................................................... 147
General Specification ............................................ 126 Removal and Installation ....................................... 147 H
6MT: RS6F52A
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 148
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 128 I
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 148
M/T SYSTEM .................................................... 128 Exploded View ....................................................... 148
System Diagram .................................................... 128 Removal and Installation ....................................... 148
System Description ............................................... 129 J
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . 150
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 130
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 150
K
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ............................... 130 4WD .......................................................................... 150
Component Parts Location .................................... 130 4WD : Exploded View ............................................ 150
Component Inspection .......................................... 130 4WD : Disassembly ............................................... 154 L
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH.. 131 4WD : Assembly .................................................... 162
Component Parts Location .................................... 131 4WD : Adjustment .................................................. 173
Component Inspection .......................................... 131 INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR ............................. 180 M
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 132 Exploded View ....................................................... 180
Disassembly .......................................................... 180
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Assembly ............................................................... 181 N
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .......................... 132 Inspection .............................................................. 185
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................. 132
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR ............................... 187
Exploded View ....................................................... 187 O
PRECAUTION ............................................ 133
Disassembly .......................................................... 187
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 133 Assembly ............................................................... 188
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 133 Inspection .............................................................. 192 P
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Tran-
saxle ...................................................................... 133 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR ........... 196
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 133 Exploded View ....................................................... 196
Disassembly .......................................................... 196
PREPARATION ......................................... 135 Assembly ............................................................... 196
Inspection .............................................................. 196
PREPARATION ................................................ 135
FINAL DRIVE .................................................. 198
TM-3
4WD ..........................................................................198 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor. 220
4WD : Exploded View ............................................198 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor . 221
4WD : Disassembly ...............................................198 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Tempera-
4WD : Assembly ....................................................199 ture Sensor ........................................................... 221
4WD : Inspection ...................................................201 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure
Sensor ................................................................... 222
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD ....................... 203 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
Exploded View .......................................................203 Sensor ................................................................... 222
Disassembly ..........................................................203 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure So-
Assembly ...............................................................203 lenoid Valve .......................................................... 222
Inspection ..............................................................204 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
Solenoid Valve ...................................................... 223
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve
(SDS) .......................................................... 206 . 223
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Clutch Solenoid Valve ........................................... 223
(SDS) ................................................................ 206 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Sole-
General Specifications ..........................................206 noid Valve ............................................................. 224
End Play ...............................................................207
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch. 224
Baulk Ring Clearance ............................................207 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indica-
Dimension ..............................................................208 tor .......................................................................... 224
Differential Side Bearing Preload ..........................209
Differential Side Gear Clearance ...........................209 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 224
CVT: RE0F10D SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion ........................................................................ 225
PRECAUTION ............................................ 210 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Park Position Switch ..... 225
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Solenoid ....... 226
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 210 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch ......... 226
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ..................... 227
SIONER" ................................................................210
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- TRANSAXLE ........................................................... 227
tion After Battery Disconnect .................................210 TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View ................... 227
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..211 TRANSAXLE : Operation Status ........................... 228
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ..........211 TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism .................. 228
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Re- TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System ..................... 231
placement ..............................................................212 TRANSAXLE : Component Description ................ 232
General Precautions ..............................................212
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM ...... 232
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM :
Engine ...................................................................213
System Description ............................................... 233
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit
Connector ..............................................................213 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 233
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ....... 234
PREPARATION .......................................... 215
KEY LOCK SYSTEM ............................................... 235
PREPARATION ............................................... 215 KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description .......... 235
Special Service Tools ............................................215
Commercial Service Tools .....................................215 SYSTEM ........................................................... 236
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 217 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 236

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description . 236
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 217 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe .................... 237
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control ..... 240
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................217
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo- LINE PRESSURE CONTROL ................................. 241
cation .....................................................................217 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Descrip-
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM ..........................219 tion ........................................................................ 241
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range
Switch ....................................................................219 SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 241
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sen- SHIFT CONTROL : System Description ............... 242
sor ..........................................................................219
TM-4
SELECT CONTROL ................................................ 245 STALL TEST ................................................... 286
SELECT CONTROL : System Description ............ 245 Work Procedure ..................................................... 286 A
LOCK-UP CONTROL .............................................. 245 CVT POSITION ............................................... 287
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description .......... 246 Inspection .............................................................. 287
B
Adjustment ............................................................. 287
ECO MODE CONTROL ........................................... 246
ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description ...... 246 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 288
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 248 C
U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF ......... 288
Description ............................................................ 248 DTC Logic .............................................................. 288
GST (Generic Scan Tool) ...................................... 248 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 288
TM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ........................... 249 U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) .... 289
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION ................................... 249 DTC Logic .............................................................. 289
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Di- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 289 E
agnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagnosis ................ 249 U0102 LOST COMMUNICATION (TRANS-
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of
FER) ................................................................ 290
1st Trip .................................................................. 249 F
DTC Logic .............................................................. 290
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indica-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 290
tor Lamp (MIL) ....................................................... 249
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System .... 249 U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM) ........ 291 G
CONSULT Function .............................................. 251 DTC Logic .............................................................. 291
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 256
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A) .... 292 H
TCM .................................................................. 256 DTC Logic .............................................................. 292
Reference Value ................................................... 256 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 292
Fail-safe ................................................................ 263
I
Protection Control ................................................. 265 U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC) .......... 293
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 266 DTC Logic .............................................................. 293
DTC Index ............................................................. 267 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 293
J
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 269 U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA .......... 294
DTC Logic .............................................................. 294
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 269 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 294 K
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 269
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 295
CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................ 274 Description ............................................................. 295
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 274 DTC Logic .............................................................. 295 L
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 277
U110F LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM) ........ 296 M
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 277
DTC Logic .............................................................. 296
Work Flow ............................................................. 277
Diagnostic Work Sheet .......................................... 278
U1111 LOST COMMUNICATION (CHASSIS N
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL MODULE) ..................................... 297
TCM .................................................................. 280
DTC Logic .............................................................. 297
Description ............................................................ 280
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 297 O
Work Procedure .................................................... 280
U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS) ........ 298
DTC Logic .............................................................. 298
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............................... 282 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 298 P
Description ............................................................ 282
Work Procedure .................................................... 282 P062F EEPROM .............................................. 299
Description ............................................................. 299
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic .............................................................. 299
TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............. 284 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 299
Description ............................................................ 284
Work Procedure .................................................... 284 P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 300
TM-5
DTC Logic ..............................................................300 DTC Logic ............................................................. 334
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................300 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 334
Component Inspection ...........................................303
P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 305 SEN/SW B ........................................................ 335
P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- SEN/SW B ........................................................ 337
TURE SENSOR A ............................................ 308 DTC Logic ............................................................. 337
DTC Logic ..............................................................308 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 337
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................308
P084C TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- SEN/SW H ........................................................ 339
TURE SENSOR A ............................................ 310 DTC Logic ............................................................. 339
DTC Logic ..............................................................310 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 339
P084D TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................. 312 SEN/SW H ........................................................ 341
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................. 315 P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION ....................... 343
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ....................... 318 P0890 TCM ....................................................... 344
P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER ....................... 320 P0962 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 346
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A. 324 P0965 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 350
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 326 P0966 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 352
P0779 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 329 P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B ................... 356
P0826 UP AND DOWN SHIFT SW .................. 331 P2813 SELECT SOLENOID ............................. 360
P2814 SELECT SOLENOID ............................. 362
P0841 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE DTC Logic ............................................................. 362
SEN/SW A ........................................................ 334 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 362
TM-6
P2815 SELECT SOLENOID ............................. 364 Exploded View ....................................................... 394
DTC Logic ............................................................. 364 Removal and Installation ....................................... 394 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 364 Inspection .............................................................. 396
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- INPUT SPEED SENSOR ................................. 397
Exploded View ....................................................... 397 B
CUIT .................................................................. 366
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 366 Removal and Installation ....................................... 397
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 398
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ......... 368 C
Component Parts Function Inspection .................. 368 PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ........................... 399
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 368 Exploded View ....................................................... 399
Removal and Installation ....................................... 399
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 369 TM
Component Function Check .................................. 369
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 369 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ............................. 401
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 370 Exploded View ....................................................... 401 E
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) ...... 371 Removal and Installation ....................................... 401
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) ........ 371 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 402
Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Har- F
ness) ..................................................................... 371
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL .................... 403
Exploded View ....................................................... 403
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 373 Removal and Installation ....................................... 403
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 404 G
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 373
Symptom Table ..................................................... 373 WATER HOSE ................................................ 405
Exploded View ....................................................... 405
H
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 378 Removal and Installation ....................................... 405
Inspection .............................................................. 406
CVT FLUID ....................................................... 378
Inspection .............................................................. 378 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM .............................. 408 I
Replacement ......................................................... 378 Exploded View ....................................................... 408
Adjustment ............................................................ 380 Removal and Installation ....................................... 409
Inspection .............................................................. 411 J
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 382
CVT OIL WARMER ......................................... 412
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR ................................... 382 Exploded View ....................................................... 412
Exploded View ...................................................... 382 Removal and Installation ....................................... 412 K
Removal and Installation ....................................... 382 Inspection .............................................................. 413
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 384
Inspection .............................................................. 384 PLUG ............................................................... 414 L
Description ............................................................. 414
CONTROL CABLE ........................................... 385 Exploded View ....................................................... 414
Exploded View ...................................................... 385 Removal and Installation ....................................... 414
Removal and Installation ....................................... 385 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 414 M
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 415
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ............................... 389 N
Exploded View ...................................................... 389 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 415
Removal and Installation ....................................... 389 Exploded View ....................................................... 415
Inspection .............................................................. 390 Removal and Installation ....................................... 415
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 417 O
TCM .................................................................. 391
Exploded View ...................................................... 391 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . 418
Removal and Installation ....................................... 391 P
Adjustment ............................................................ 392 TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER
HOUSING OIL SEAL ...................................... 418
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 393 Exploded View ....................................................... 418
Exploded View ...................................................... 393 Disassembly .......................................................... 418
Removal and Installation ....................................... 393 Assembly ............................................................... 418
Inspection .............................................................. 419
OIL PAN ........................................................... 394
TM-7
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
(SDS) .......................................................... 421 Sensor ................................................................... 435
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure So-
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS lenoid Valve .......................................................... 436
(SDS) ................................................................ 421 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
General Specification ............................................421 Solenoid Valve ...................................................... 436
Shift Characteristics ...............................................421 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve
Stall Speed ............................................................421 . 436
Torque Converter ..................................................421 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter
Heater Thermostat .................................................421 Clutch Solenoid Valve ........................................... 437
CVT: RE0F10G CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Sole-
noid Valve ............................................................. 437
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 422 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : G SENSOR .............. 437
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Electric Oil Pump ...... 438
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 422 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Electric Oil Pump Re-
Information .............................................................422 lay ......................................................................... 438
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch. 438
PRECAUTION ............................................ 423 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indica-
tor .......................................................................... 438
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 423
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 438
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
SIONER" ................................................................423 tion ........................................................................ 439
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Park Position Switch ..... 439
tion After Battery Disconnect .................................423 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Solenoid ....... 439
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..424 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch ......... 439
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ..........424
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Re- STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ..................... 440
placement ..............................................................425
General Precautions ..............................................425 TRANSAXLE ........................................................... 440
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View ................... 440
Engine ...................................................................426 TRANSAXLE : Operation Status ........................... 441
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism .................. 441
Connector ..............................................................426 TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System ..................... 443
TRANSAXLE : Component Description ................ 444
PREPARATION .......................................... 428 FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM ...... 444
PREPARATION ............................................... 428 FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM :
Special Service Tools ............................................428 System Description ............................................... 445
Commercial Service Tools .....................................428 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................................ 445
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ....... 445
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 430
KEY LOCK SYSTEM ............................................... 446
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 430 KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description .......... 446
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................430
SYSTEM ........................................................... 448
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation .....................................................................430 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 448
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM ..........................432 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description . 448
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe .................... 449
Switch ....................................................................432 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control ..... 454
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sen-
sor ..........................................................................433 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL ................................. 455
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor..433 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Descrip-
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor ..434 tion ........................................................................ 455
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Tempera-
SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 455
ture Sensor ............................................................434
SHIFT CONTROL : System Description ............... 455
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure
Sensor ...................................................................435 SELECT CONTROL ................................................ 459
SELECT CONTROL : System Description ........... 459
TM-8
LOCK-UP CONTROL .............................................. 459 CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR ...................... 506
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description .......... 459 Description ............................................................. 506 A
Work Procedure ..................................................... 506
ECO MODE CONTROL ........................................... 460
ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description ...... 460 BLEEDING ELECTRIC OIL PUMP ................. 507
B
Description ............................................................. 507
STOP/START SYSTEM ........................................... 461
Work Procedure ..................................................... 507
STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description ...... 461
STALL TEST ................................................... 508 C
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 463
Work Procedure ..................................................... 508
Description ............................................................ 463
Function of OBD .................................................... 463 CVT POSITION ............................................... 509
Inspection .............................................................. 509 TM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ........................... 464
Adjustment ............................................................. 509
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION ................................... 464
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Di- DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 510 E
agnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagnosis ................ 464 U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF ......... 510
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of
DTC Logic .............................................................. 510
1st Trip .................................................................. 464 F
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indica-
tor Lamp (MIL) ....................................................... 464 U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) .... 511
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System .... 464 DTC Logic .............................................................. 511 G
CONSULT Function .............................................. 466 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 511
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 471 U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM) ........ 512
DTC Logic .............................................................. 512 H
TCM .................................................................. 471 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 512
Reference Value ................................................... 471
Fail-safe ................................................................ 478 U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A) .... 513 I
Protection Control ................................................. 483 DTC Logic .............................................................. 513
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 484 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 513
DTC Index ............................................................. 485
U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC) .......... 514 J
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 487 DTC Logic .............................................................. 514
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 487
K
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 487 U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA .......... 515
DTC Logic .............................................................. 515
CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................ 494 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 515
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 494 L
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 516
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 497 Description ............................................................. 516
DTC Logic .............................................................. 516 M
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 497 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 516
Work Flow ............................................................. 497
Diagnostic Work Sheet .......................................... 498 U110F LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM) ........ 517
DTC Logic .............................................................. 517 N
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 517
TCM .................................................................. 500
Description ............................................................ 500 U1111 LOST COMMUNICATION (CHASSIS
O
Work Procedure .................................................... 500 CONTROL MODULE) ..................................... 518
DTC Logic .............................................................. 518
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 518
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............................... 502 P
Description ............................................................ 502 U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS) ........ 519
Work Procedure .................................................... 502 DTC Logic .............................................................. 519
TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............. 504 P062F EEPROM .............................................. 520
Description ............................................................ 504 Description ............................................................. 520
Work Procedure .................................................... 504 DTC Logic .............................................................. 520
TM-9
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................520 P0841 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
SEN/SW A ........................................................ 556
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 521 DTC Logic ............................................................. 556
DTC Logic ..............................................................521
Component Inspection ...........................................524 P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
SEN/SW B ........................................................ 557
P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 526
DTC Logic ............................................................. 557
DTC Logic ..............................................................526
Component Inspection ...........................................528 P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- SEN/SW B ........................................................ 559
DTC Logic ............................................................. 559
TURE SENSOR A ............................................ 529
DTC Logic ..............................................................529
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................529 P084C TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA- SEN/SW H ........................................................ 561
DTC Logic ............................................................. 561
TURE SENSOR A ............................................ 531
DTC Logic ..............................................................531
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................531 P084D TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................. 533 SEN/SW H ........................................................ 563
DTC Logic ............................................................. 563
DTC Logic ..............................................................533
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................. 536 P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION ....................... 565
DTC Logic ............................................................. 565
DTC Logic ..............................................................536
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ....................... 539 P0890 TCM ....................................................... 566

DTC Logic ............................................................. 566
DTC Logic ..............................................................539
DTC Logic ............................................................. 568
DTC Logic ..............................................................541
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A. 545 P0965 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 572
DTC Logic ............................................................. 572
DTC Logic ..............................................................545
DTC Logic ............................................................. 574
DTC Logic ..............................................................547
DTC Logic ............................................................. 576
DTC Logic ..............................................................549
P0779 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 551 P1586 G SENSOR ............................................ 578

DTC Logic ............................................................. 578
DTC Logic ..............................................................551
P0826 UP AND DOWN SHIFT SW .................. 553 P1588 G SENSOR ............................................ 581
DTC Logic ............................................................. 581
DTC Logic ..............................................................553
Component Inspection ...........................................555 P188E ELECTRIC OIL PUMP .......................... 583
TM-10
DTC Logic ............................................................. 583 CVT SHIFT SELECTOR .................................. 617
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 584 Exploded View ....................................................... 617 A
Component Inspection (Electric Oil Pump Relay).. 586 Removal and Installation ....................................... 617
Component Inspection (Diode) ............................. 586 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 619
Inspection .............................................................. 619 B
P188F ELECTRIC OIL PUMP .......................... 588
DTC Logic ............................................................. 588 CONTROL CABLE .......................................... 620
Removal and Installation ....................................... 620 C
P1890 ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY ............. 590 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 622
DTC Logic ............................................................. 590
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 590 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE .............................. 623 TM
Component Inspection (Electric Oil Pump Relay).. 592 Exploded View ....................................................... 623
Component Inspection (Diode) ............................. 592 Removal and Installation ....................................... 623
Inspection .............................................................. 624
P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B ................... 593 E
DTC Logic ............................................................. 593 TCM ................................................................. 625
Removal and Installation ....................................... 625 F
P2813 SELECT SOLENOID ............................. 596 Adjustment ............................................................. 626
DTC Logic ............................................................. 596
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 597 AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 627
Exploded View ....................................................... 627 G
P2814 SELECT SOLENOID ............................. 598 Removal and Installation ....................................... 627
DTC Logic ............................................................. 598
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 598 G SENSOR ...................................................... 628 H
Exploded View ....................................................... 628
P2815 SELECT SOLENOID ............................. 600 Removal and Installation ....................................... 628
DTC Logic ............................................................. 600 Adjustment ............................................................. 628
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 600 I
OIL PAN .......................................................... 629
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- Exploded View ....................................................... 629
CUIT .................................................................. 602 Removal and Installation ....................................... 629 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 602 Inspection .............................................................. 631
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ......... 604 INPUT SPEED SENSOR ................................. 632
Component Parts Function Inspection .................. 604 Exploded View ....................................................... 632 K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 604 Removal and Installation ....................................... 632
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 605
L
Component Function Check .................................. 605 PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ........................... 634
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 606 Removal and Installation ....................................... 634
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) ...... 607 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 634 M
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) ........ 607
Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Har- OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ............................. 636
ness) ..................................................................... 607 Exploded View ....................................................... 636 N
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 609 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 636
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 609 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL .................... 638 O
Symptom Table ..................................................... 609 Exploded View ....................................................... 638
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 613 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 639 P
CVT FLUID ....................................................... 613 WATER HOSE ................................................ 640
Inspection .............................................................. 613 Exploded View ....................................................... 640
Replacement ......................................................... 613 Removal and Installation ....................................... 640
Adjustment ............................................................ 615 Inspection .............................................................. 641
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 617 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM .............................. 642
Exploded View ....................................................... 642
TM-11
Removal and Installation .......................................644 Removal and Installation ....................................... 653
Inspection ..............................................................647 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 655
ELECTRIC OIL PUMP ..................................... 648 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY .. 656
Exploded View .......................................................648
Removal and Installation .......................................648 TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................649 HOUSING OIL SEAL ........................................ 656
Exploded View ...................................................... 656
CVT OIL WARMER .......................................... 650 Disassembly .......................................................... 656
Exploded View .......................................................650 Assembly .............................................................. 656
Removal and Installation .......................................650 Inspection .............................................................. 657
Inspection ..............................................................651
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
PLUG ............................................................... 652 (SDS) ......................................................... 659
Description .............................................................652
Exploded View .......................................................652 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Removal and Installation .......................................652 (SDS) ................................................................ 659
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................652 General Specification ............................................ 659
Shift Characteristics .............................................. 659
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 653 Stall Speed ............................................................ 659
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .............................. 653 Torque Converter .................................................. 659
Exploded View .......................................................653
TM-12
M/T SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
M/T SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000010288434
B
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
C
TM
SCIA7618E
O
1. Clutch housing 2. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) 3. Reverse idler shaft
4. Reverse input gear 5. Reverse output gear 6. 2nd input gear
7. 3rd input gear 8. 3rd-4th synchronizer assembly 9. 4th input gear P
10. 5th input gear 11. 5th-6th synchronizer assembly 12. 6th input gear
13. Transaxle case 14. 6th main gear 15. 5th main gear
16. 4th main gear 17. 3rd main gear 18. 2nd main gear
19. 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly 20. 1st main gear 21. Differential assembly
22. Final gear 23. Mainshaft 24. Input shaft
TM-13
M/T SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000010288435
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Triple-cone synchronizer is used for the 1st and the 2nd gears to
reduce operating force of the control lever.
1 : 1st main gear

2 : 1st-2nd coupling sleeve
3 : Insert key
4 : Outer baulk ring
5 : 2nd main gear
6 : Synchronizer cone
7 : Inner baulk ring
SCIA7636E
8 : 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
REVERSE GEAR NOISE PREVENTION FUNCTION (SYNCHRONIZING METHOD)

Reverse gear assembly consists of reverse input gear, return spring,
reverse baulk ring and reverse output gear. When the control lever is
shifted to the reverse position, the construction allows smooth shift
operation by stopping the reverse idler shaft rotation by frictional
force of synchronizer.
1 : Reverse fork rod

2 : Reverse output gear
3 : Return spring
4 : Reverse baulk ring
SCIA7621E
5 : Reverse input gear
TM-14
POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F94R]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
B
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010288436
C
1 : Position switch
TM
JPDIC0070ZZ
F
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010288437
1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH G
Check continuity between position switch terminals with control lever

turned to 1st to 6th and reverse position.
H
Terminals Gear position Continuity

Reverse Existed I
1–2
Except reverse Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END J
NO >> Replace position switch. Refer to TM-38, "Exploded
PCIB1781E
View".
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH K
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010288438
1 : Position switch
M
O
JPDIC0070ZZ
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010288439
P
1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
TM-15
POSITION SWITCH

Neutral Existed
2–3
Except neutral Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END
JPDIC0091ZZ
View".
TM-16
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F94R]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000010288440
B
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspec-
tion. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
C
TM-38
TM-38
TM-28
TM-38
TM-38
Reference page
TM
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

SUSPECTED PARTS
G
BEARING (Worn or damaged)

OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
(Possible cause)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

O-RING (Worn or damaged)
GEAR (Worn or damaged)

H
OIL (Oil level is high.)
GASKET (Damaged)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Oil level is low.)
OIL (Wrong oil.)
J
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2 2
Symptoms
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 3 3 K
Jumps out of gear 1 2 2
TM-17
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000010497458
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Transaxle INFOID:0000000010288441
CAUTION:
• If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder).
Return CSC insert to original position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc sliding
parts may damage seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage.
• Never reuse transaxle gear oil, once it has been drained.
• Check oil level or replace gear oil with vehicle on level surface.
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are
required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied.
• In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to out-
side. If tightening sequence is specified, use it.
• Never damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010508552
• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
TM-18
PRECAUTIONS
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
B
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes TM
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
K
TM-19
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000010288442
Tool number Description

Tool name
KV381054S0 Removing mainshaft front bearing outer race
Puller
ZZA0601D
KV38100200 • Installing mainshaft front bearing outer race

Drift • Installing mainshaft rear bearing outer race
a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. • Installing differential side bearing outer race
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. (clutch housing side)
ZZA1143D
ST33220000 Installing input shaft oil seal

Drift
a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia.
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
c: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
ZZA1046D
ST33400001 Installing differential side bearing outer race

Drift (transaxle case side)
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
ZZA0814D
KV38100300 Installing differential side oil seal

Drift
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
c: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
ZZA1046D
ST36720030 • Installing input shaft rear bearing

Drift • Installing mainshaft front bearing inner race
a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
c: 29 mm (1.14 in) dia.
ZZA0978D
TM-20
PREPARATION
Tool name A
ST33052000 • Removing mainshaft rear bearing inner race
Drift • Removing 6th main gear
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. • Removing 5th main gear B
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. • Removing 4th main gear
• Removing 1st main gear
• Removing 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly
• Removing 2nd main gear C
• Removing bushing
• Removing 3rd main gear
ZZA0969D • Removing mainshaft front bearing inner
race TM
KV32102700 • Installing bushing
Drift • Installing 2nd main gear
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia. • Installing 3rd main gear E
b: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia. • Installing 4th main gear
• Installing 5th main gear
• Installing 6th main gear
F
S-NT065
ST30901000 Installing mainshaft rear bearing inner race

Drift G
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia.
H
ZZA0978D
I
ST33061000 Removing differential side bearing inner race
Drift (clutch housing side)
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. J
K
ZZA0969D
KV32300QAM Removing and installing input shaft rear bear-

(Renault SST: B.vi 1823) ing mounting bolt
L
Drift
PCIB2078J
TM-21
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010288443
Tool name Description

Socket Removing and installing drain plug
a: 8 mm (0.31 in)
b: 5 mm (0.20 in)
PCIB1776E
Spacer Removing mainshaft front bearing outer race

a: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
b: 25 mm (0.98 in)
PCIB1780E
Drift • Installing bushing

a: 17 mm (0.67 in) dia. • Installing shifter lever oil seal
• Installing selector lever oil seal
S-NT063
Drift Installing input shaft front bearing

a: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
S-NT065
Drift Removing input shaft rear bearing

a: 24 mm (0.94 in) dia.
PCIB1779E
Drift • Removing differential side bearing inner

a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia. race (transaxle case side)
• Installing input shaft rear bearing
NT109
TM-22
PREPARATION
A
Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race
a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. (clutch housing side)
b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
B
C
S-NT474
Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race

a: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia. (transaxle case side)
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. TM
S-NT474
TM-23
GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: RS6F94R]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
GEAR OIL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010288444
Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".

Draining INFOID:0000000010288445
1. Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle.

2. Stop engine. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain gear oil.
3. Set a gasket on drain plug and install it to clutch housing.
Tighten drain plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
SCIA7622E
Refilling INFOID:0000000010288446
1. Remove filler plug (1). Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches
the specified limit at filler plug hole as shown.
Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and

Lubricants".
Oil capacity : Refer to MA-122, "GEAR OIL
(RS6F94R) : Refilling".
2. After refilling gear oil, check oil level. Refer to TM-24, "Inspec-
tion".
3. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transaxle case. SCIA7623E
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
4. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque.
Inspection INFOID:0000000010288447
LEAKAGE
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transaxle or around it.
LEVEL
1. Remove filler plug (1) and check oil level at filler plug hole as
shown.
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
2. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
SCIA7623E
TM-24
M/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

M/T SHIFT SELECTOR
B
TM
JSDIA5662GB
H
Shift lever knob M/T shift selector assembly M/T shift selector bracket
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

I
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010735672

J
REMOVAL
1. Shift shift lever to the neutral position. K
2. Pull shift lever knob upward to remove.
3. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and
Installation" . L
4. Disconnect and remove shift cable and select cable from M/T
shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installa-
tion". M
N
JSDIA5753ZZ
5. Remove M/T shift selector assembly from M/T shift selector O

bracket .
JSDIA5749ZZ
TM-25
M/T SHIFT SELECTOR
6. Remove M/T shift selector bracket .
JSDIA5750ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• For each tightening torque, refer to TM-25, "Exploded View" .
• Install shift lever knob to the shift lever, as per the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Never reuse shift lever knob.
1. Turn shift lever knob counterclockwise (30 degrees) and
insert it straight to the shift lever without pressing the orna-
ment .
: Vehicle front
JSDIA6032ZZ
2. Protrude the ornament of shift lever knob .
: Vehicle front
JSDIA6033ZZ
3. Turn shift lever knob clockwise (30 degrees) until coming to a

stop.
: Vehicle front
JSDIA6034ZZ
TM-26
M/T SHIFT SELECTOR
4. Press the ornament down and lock shift lever knob .
A
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of shift lever knob. B
JSDIA6035ZZ
TM
TM-27
CONTROL LINKAGE
CONTROL LINKAGE
JSDIA5664GB
Select cable Grommet Tapping bolt

Cable mounting bracket (M/T) Select lever Shift lever
Cable mounting bracket (floor) Shift cable M/T shift selector assembly
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

REMOVAL
1. Shift shift lever to the neutral position.
2. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation".
TM-28
CONTROL LINKAGE
3. Pull up the stopper of the select cable in the direction of the
arrow as shown in the figure. A
JSDIA5762ZZ
TM
4. Pull out and disconnect shift cable and select cable from
each pin of M/T shift selector assembly.
E
G
JSDIA5763ZZ
5. Remove shift cable and select cable from M/T shift selector H
assembly, as per the following procedure.
a. While pressing the lock of the shift cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove shift cable from M/T shift
selector assembly. I
b. While pressing the lock of the select cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove select cable from M/T shift
selector assembly. J
6. Remove air duct and air cleaner body. Refer to EM-23,
"Removal and Installation" (HRA2DDT), EM-147, "Removal and
Installation" (MR20DD), EM-279, "Removal and Installation" JPDIC0793ZZ
K
(K9K).
7. Remove battery and battery trays. Refer to PG-155, "Removal and Installation".
L
8. Pull out and disconnect the each cable from shift lever and
select lever .
M
O
JSDIA5761ZZ
TM-29
CONTROL LINKAGE
9. Remove shift cable and select cable from cable mounting
bracket (M/T), as per the following procedure.
a. While pressing the lock of the shift cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove shift cable from cable mount-
ing bracket (M/T).
b. While pressing the lock of the select cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove select cable from cable
mounting bracket (M/T).
10. Remove cable mounting bracket (M/T) from transaxle assembly.
JPDIC0793ZZ
11. Remove heat shield plate .
: Vehicle front
JSDIA5214ZZ
12. Remove shift cable and select cable from cable mounting
bracket (floor) .
: Vehicle front
13. Remove cable mounting bracket (floor).
JSDIA5764ZZ
14. Disengage the pawls of grommet , and pull downwards to

remove.
15. Remove shift cable and select cable from the vehicle.
JPDIC0844ZZ
INSTALLATION
• For each tightening torque, refer to TM-28, "Exploded View".
• Before working, set transaxle and M/T shift selector assembly to the neutral position.
• No occurrence of interference between cables and other parts, bent with a radius of 120 mm (4.72 in) or
less, and twist of 180 degrees or more.
• Do not damage the boot of each cable and prevent the occurrence of twist of 90 degrees or more.
• Tapping work for tapping bolts is not applied to new transaxle case. Do not perform tapping by other than
screwing tapping bolts because tapping is formed by screwing tapping bolts into transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Never reuse tapping bolt.
TM-30
CONTROL LINKAGE
• From under the vehicle, press grommet into place until the
pawls securely. A
CAUTION:
Check that pulling down on the grommet does not fall out it.
B
JPDIC0844ZZ
TM
• Insert the each socket part of cable until it reaches the cable
mounting bracket (M/T) and M/T shift selector assembly
securely. E
CAUTION:
Check that pulling up on the socket does not disconnect it.
F
G
JSDIA5773ZZ
• Install select cable (M/T shift selector assembly side), as per the following procedure. H
When M/T shift selector assembly is replaced with new one:

1. Install the select cable to the M/T shift selector assembly. I
2. Shift the shift lever to the neutral position.
3. Install the lock pin to the M/T shift selector assembly as
shown in the figure.
CAUTION: J
Select cable cannot be adjusted accurately without using
the lock pin.
4. Check that shift lever does not move in the direction of the K
select. If it moves, re-install lock pin.
JSDIA5774ZZ
M
5. Push the stopper until it reaches the select cable.
6. Remove the lock pin from M/T shift selector assembly.
7. Shift shift lever to each gear position to check that there are no
bindings. If any, re-install select cable with lock pin. N
P
JSDIA5775ZZ
When M/T shift selector assembly is reused or without lock pin:

1. Install the select cable to the M/T shift selector assembly.
2. Shift the shift lever to the 4th gear position.
TM-31
CONTROL LINKAGE
3. Adjust the clearance (C) between the stopper and the lever
to the standard value.
Clearance : 3.8 – 4.0 mm (0.150 – 0.157 in)
JSDIA5777ZZ
4. Push the stopper until it reaches the select cable.

5. Shift shift lever to each gear position to check that there are no
bindings. If any, re-install select cable and re-adjust the clear-
ance.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to TM-32, "Inspection".
JSDIA5775ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• When the shift lever is shifted to each position, check that the shift lever moves smoothly (no-hook up, no-
noise, no-backlash and non-contact to other parts). If any malfunction is detected, repair the malfunctioning
parts or replace cable assembly.
• When the shift lever is shifted to reverse gear side and 5th-6th side, confirm the shift lever returns to neutral
position. When the shift lever does not return to the neutral position smoothly, check M/T shift selector
assembly and select cable condition. If any malfunction is detected, repair or replace the malfunctioning
part.
TM-32
SIDE OIL SEAL
SIDE OIL SEAL
A
Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View". B

REMOVAL C
1. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)" or FAX-26, "Removal and
Installation (RH)".
2. Remove differential side oil seals (1) using a suitable tool. TM
CAUTION:
Never damage transaxle case and clutch housing.
E
G
SCIA7625E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. H
• Install differential side oil seals (1) to clutch housing and transaxle
case using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100300].
B : Transaxle case side I

C : Clutch housing side
Dimension “L1” : 1.2 - 1.8 mm (0.047 - 0.071 in) J
Dimension “L2” : 2.7 - 3.3 mm (0.106 - 0.130 in)

CAUTION: K
• Never reuse differential side oil seal.
• When installing, never incline differential side oil seal.
• Never damage clutch housing and transaxle case.
• Check oil level and oil leakage after installation. Refer to TM-24, L
"Inspection".
JPDIC0120ZZ
TM-33
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
JPDIC0052ZZ
1. Air breather hose 2. Transaxle assembly 3. Two way connector

4. Air cleaner case (MR20DE) 5. Air cleaner case (K9K)
: Vehicle front
REMOVAL
Refer to the figure for removal procedure.
CAUTION:
When removing air breather hose, be sure to hold two way connector securely.
INSTALLATION
Refer to the figure for installation procedure.
• When installing air breather hose on two way connector, aim paint mark face toward the vehicle front.
• When installing air breather hose on two way connector, push it until it hits transaxle case.
• When installing air breather hose to air cleaner case, make sure that clip are fully inserted.
CAUTION:
Make sure air breather hose is not collapsed or blocked due to folding or bending when installed.
TM-34
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F94R]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
K9K, HRA2DDT and MR20DDT

C
TM
JPDIC0148ZZ
H
1. Transaxle assembly
: For the bolt mounting positions, refer to “INSTALLATION”.
I
CAUTION:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Return CSC insert to orig-
inal position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc sliding parts may damage seal of CSC and may cause clutch
J
fluid leakage.
K
CAUTION:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder).
Return CSC insert to original position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc sliding parts
may damage seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. L
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. M
2. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-34, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove air cleaner case and air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation" (HRA2DDT) or
EM-279, "Removal and Installation" (K9K). N
4. Remove battery. Refer to PG-155, "Removal and Installation".
5. Disconnect connectors (A) and then remove bracket (1).
6. Drain clutch fluid and then remove clutch tube from CSC (Con- O
centric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
CAUTION: P
Never depress clutch pedal during removal procedure.
7. Disconnect position switch harness connector.
8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS). (For K9K) Refer to
EM-331, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks. JPDIA0240ZZ
• Never disassemble.
TM-35
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• Never allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip.
• Never place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism.
9. Disconnect ground cable.
10. Remove wire harnesses from transaxle assembly.
11. Disconnect select cable and shift cable from transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
12. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-24, "HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation" (HRA2DDT) or STR-30,
"K9K : Removal and Installation" (K9K) or STR-26, "MR20DD : Removal and Installation" (MR20DD).
13. Remove engine under cover.
14. Cap or plug transmission assembly opening(s) to prevent fluid from spilling.
15. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation" (HRA2DDT) or EX-15, "Removal
and Installation" (K9K) or EX-11, "Removal and Installation" (MR20DD).
16. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)" (LHD) or FAX-26, "Removal
and Installation (RH)" (RHD).
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug into differential side oil seal after removing front drive shaft.
17. Remove transaxle mounting lower brackets and transaxle torque rod. (For K9K) Refer to EM-318,
"Removal and Installation".
18. Remove suspension member and suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-21, "Removal and Installation".
19. Set a suitable jack to transaxle assembly and then set a suitable jack to engine assembly.
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the switch.
20. Remove transaxle assembly mounting bolts.
21. Remove engine mounting through bolt-securing nut. Refer to EM-52, "Removal and Installation"
(HRA2DDT) or EM-318, "Removal and Installation" (K9K) or EM-173, "Removal and Installation"
(MR20DD).
22. Remove transaxle assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure transaxle assembly to a suitable jack while removing it.
• The transaxle assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch tube.
23. Remove CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylin-
der). Return CSC insert to original position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc
sliding parts may damage seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage.
INSTALLATION
• Tighten transaxle assembly mounting bolts to the specified torque. The figure is the view from the engine.
- K9K and HRA2DDT
: Transaxle to engine
: Engine to transaxle
Bolt symbol A B C
Quantity 2 2 4
Bolt length
50 (1.97) 80 (3.15) 65 (2.56)
“ ” mm (in) JPDIC0054ZZ
Tightening torque
48 (4.9, 35)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
TM-36
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
- MR20DD
A
Bolt symbol
Quantity 3 6
B
Bolt length
60 (2.36) 50 (1.97)
“ ” mm (in)
Insertion direction Transaxle to engine Engine to transaxle C
JPDIC0837ZZ
TM
CAUTION:
• When installing transaxle assembly, never bring input shaft into contact with clutch cover. E
• Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation" for CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) installation procedure.
• Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installation" for select cable and shift cable installation procedure.
• Bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-8, "Air Bleeding Procedure".
• After installation, check for oil leakage and oil level. Refer to TM-24, "Inspection". F
TM-37
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: RS6F94R]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
CASE AND HOUSING
JPDIC0071GB
1. Filler plug 2. Gasket 3. Transaxle case

4. Bushing 5. Shift finger 6. Snap ring
7. Oil gutter 8. Oil channel 9. Position switch
10. Shifter lever oil seal 11. Shifter lever 12. Retaining pin
13. Bracket 14. Differential side oil seal 15. Selector lever oil seal
16. Selector lever 17. Magnet 18. Drain plug
19. Input shaft oil seal 20. Clutch housing 21. Two way connector
22. Plug (if equipped) 23. Pinion shaft (if equipped) 24. Pinion gear (if equipped)
TM-38
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
: Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Three Bond 1215 or an equivalent.

A
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.
SHAFT AND GEAR

B
TM
L
JPDIC0407GB
1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. 3rd input gear M

4. Washer 5. Snap ring 6. 3rd baulk ring
7. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve 8. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 9. Insert key
10. 4th baulk ring 11. 4th input gear 12. 5th input gear N
13. 5th baulk ring 14. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 15. 5th-6th synchronizer hub
16. 6th baulk ring 17. Needle bearing 18. 6th input gear
19. Input shaft rear bearing O
: Apply gear oil.

: Replace the parts as a set. P
TM-39
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
SFIA3293E
1. Mainshaft front bearing outer 2. Mainshaft front bearing inner race 3. Mainshaft
race
4. 1st main gear 5. 1st inner baulk ring 6. 1st synchronizer cone
7. 1st outer baulk ring 8. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 9. Insert key
10. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 11. 2nd outer baulk ring 12. 2nd synchronizer cone
13. 2nd inner baulk ring 14. 2nd main gear 15. Bushing
16. 3rd main gear 17. Intermediate adjusting shim 18. 4th main gear
19. 5th main gear 20. 6th main gear 21. Mainshaft rear bearing inner race
22. Mainshaft rear bearing outer race 23. Snap ring 24. Bearing preloading shim
: Apply gear oil.

: Replace the parts as a set.
TM-40
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
SFIA3294E
K
1. Reverse output gear 2. Snap ring 3. Reverse baulk ring

4. Return spring 5. Needle bearing 6. Reverse idler shaft L
7. Seal washer 8. Washer 9. Reverse input gear
10. Lock washer 11. Spring washer
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure. M
SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD

N
TM-41
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
SFIA3295E
1. Reverse fork rod 2. Selector 3. Retaining pin

4. 5th-6th shift fork 5. 3rd-4th shift fork 6. 3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod
7. 1st-2nd fork rod
FINAL DRIVE
TM-42
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
H
SFIA3296E
1. Side gear 2. Pinion mate gear 3. Thrust washer

4. Pinion mate shaft 5. shim 6. Differential side bearing outer race I
(transaxle case side)
7. Differential side bearing inner race 8. Final gear 9. Differential case
(transaxle case side) J
10. Speedometer drive gear 11. Lock ring 12. Differential side bearing inner race
(clutch housing side)
13. Differential side bearing outer race
K
(clutch housing side)
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. L
Disassembly INFOID:0000000010288458
1. Remove drain plug and gasket from clutch housing using the socket [Commercial service tool] and then M
drain gear oil.
2. Remove filler plug and gasket from transaxle case.
3. Remove retaining pin from shifter lever (1) using a pin punch. N
And then remove shifter lever.
4. Remove bracket (2) and position switch (3) from transaxle case.
O
PCIB1693E
TM-43
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
5. Remove mounting bolts.
PCIB1694E
6. Remove reverse idler shaft mounting bolt and seal washer.
PCIB1695E
7. Remove transaxle case (1) upward while rotating selector lever

(2).
JPDIC0105ZZ
8. Remove spring (1) of selector from return bushing (2).
PCIB1697E
9. Move 1st-2nd fork rod (1), 3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod (2), and
reverse fork rod (3) to neutral position.
10. Remove selector (4) from clutch housing.
PCIB1698E
TM-44
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
11. Remove retaining pin from 5th-6th shift fork using a pin punch.
A
PCIB1699E
TM
12. Remove 3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod (1) assembly according to
the following.
a. Lift the fork rod up. E
b. Remove 3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod (1) assembly from clutch
housing.
c. Remove 3rd-4th shift fork and 5th-6th shift fork from 3rd-4th and F
5th-6th fork rod.
G
PCIB1700E
13. Remove reverse gear assembly (1) according to the following. H

a. Lift up the input shaft assembly (2) and mainshaft assembly (3).
b. Remove reverse gear assembly (1) and reverse fork rod (4)
from clutch housing. I
14. Remove spring washer located under the reverse idler shaft.
PCIB1701E K
15. Remove input shaft assembly (1), mainshaft assembly (2), and
1st-2nd fork rod (3) from clutch housing.
L
PCIB1702E
16. Remove final drive assembly (1) from clutch housing. O

17. Remove magnet from clutch housing.
PCIB1703E
TM-45
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
18. Remove differential side oil seals (1) from clutch housing and
transaxle case using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch housing and transaxle case.
PCIB1704E
19. Remove differential side bearing outer race (1) from clutch hous-
ing using a brass bar.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch housing.
PCIB1716E
20. Remove differential side bearing outer race (1) and shim (2)
from transaxle case using a brass bar as shown.
CAUTION:
Never damage transaxle case.
PCIB1705E
21. Remove retaining pin from selector lever (1) using a pin punch.
22. Remove selector lever.
JPDIC0106ZZ
23. Remove shift finger (1) from transaxle case.
PCIB1712E
TM-46
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
24. Remove selector lever oil seal and bushings from transaxle
case using a suitable remover. A
PCIB1713E
TM
25. Remove oil gutter (1) from transaxle case.
G
PCIB1707E
26. Remove shifter lever oil seal (1) from transaxle case. H
PCIB1709E K
27. Remove bushings (1) from transaxle case using a suitable

remover.
L
PCIB1710E
28. Remove mainshaft rear bearing outer race from transaxle case O
using a suitable remover and then remove bearing preloading
shim.
CAUTION: P
PCIB1706E
TM-47
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
29. Remove snap ring (1) and oil channel (2) from transaxle case.
PCIB1708E
30. Remove input shaft oil seal (1) from clutch housing using a flat-
bladed screwdriver.
PCIB1714E
31. Remove mainshaft front bearing outer race (1) and oil channel
(2) from clutch housing using the puller (A) [SST: KV381054S0]
and the spacer (B) [Commercial service tool].
JPDIC0107ZZ
32. Remove bushings (1) from clutch housing using a suitable

remover.
PCIB1717E
33. Remove two way connector (1) from clutch housing.

34. Remove plug. (If equipped)
PCIB1720E
TM-48
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
35. Remove pinion gear (1) and pinion shaft (2) from clutch housing.
(If equipped) A
PCIB1719E
TM
Assembly INFOID:0000000010288459
1. Install pinion gear (1) and pinion shaft (2) into clutch housing. (If E
equipped)
2. Install plug. (If equipped)
F
H
PCIB1719E
3. Install two way connector (1) into clutch housing.

I
PCIB1720E
L
4. Install bushings (1) until they are flush with end face of clutch
housing using the drift (A) [Commercial service tool].
M
O
JPDIC0108ZZ
TM-49
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
5. Install oil channel and mainshaft front bearing outer race into
clutch housing using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100200].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil channel.
• Replace mainshaft front bearing outer race and mainshaft
front bearing inner race as a set.
PCIB1724E
6. Install input shaft oil seal (1) into clutch housing using the drift
(A) [SST: ST33220000].
PCIB1721E
7. Install snap ring (1) and oil channel (2) onto transaxle case.
PCIB1729E
8. Install bearing preloading shim and mainshaft rear bearing outer

race into transaxle case using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100200].
CAUTION:
Replace mainshaft rear bearing outer race and mainshaft
rear bearing inner race as a set.
PCIB1728E
9. Install bushings (1) into transaxle case using the drift (A) [Com-
mercial service tool].
JPDIC0109ZZ
TM-50
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
10. Install oil gutter (1) onto transaxle case.
A
PCIB1730E
TM
11. Install shifter lever oil seal (1) into transaxle case using the drift
(A) [Commercial service tool].
12. Install selector lever oil seal and bushings into transaxle case E
using the drift [Commercial service tool].
G
JPDIC0102ZZ
13. Install shift finger (1) into transaxle case. H
PCIB1712E K
14. Install selector lever (1) and then install retaining pin.
CAUTION:
Never reuse retaining pin. L
BCIA0047E
15. Install shim and differential side bearing outer race (transaxle O
case side) into transaxle case using the drift (A) [SST:
ST33400001].
CAUTION: P
Replace differential side bearing inner race and differential
side bearing outer race as a set.
PCIB1726E
TM-51
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
16. Install differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side)
into clutch housing using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100200].
CAUTION:
PCIB1722E
17. Install differential side oil seals (1) into clutch housing and tran-
saxle case using the drift (A) [SST: KV38100300].
B : Transaxle case side

Dimension “L1” : 1.2 - 1.8 mm (0.047 - 0.071 in)

Dimension “L2” : 2.7 - 3.3 mm (0.106 - 0.130 in)
18. Install magnet onto clutch housing.
19. Install final drive assembly into clutch housing.
JPDIC0120ZZ
20. Install input shaft assembly (1), mainshaft assembly (2) and 1st-
2nd fork rod (3) into clutch housing.
21. Install spring washer located under the reverse idler shaft.
PCIB1702E
22. Install reverse gear assembly (1) according to the following.

a. Lift up the input shaft assembly (2) and mainshaft assembly (3).
b. Install reverse gear assembly and reverse fork rod (4) to clutch
housing.
23. Install 3rd-4th shift fork and 5th-6th shift fork to 3rd-4th and 5th-
6th fork rod.
PCIB1701E
TM-52
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
24. While lifting up fork rod (1), install 3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod
assembly to clutch housing. A
CAUTION:
Replace the 5th-6th shift fork, the 3rd-4th shift fork, and the
3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod as a set. B
PCIB1700E
TM
25. Install retaining pin into 5th-6th shift fork using a pin punch.
CAUTION:
Never reuse retaining pin. E
G
PCIB1699E
26. Move 1st-2nd fork rod (1), 3rd-4th and 5th-6th fork rod assembly H
(2), and reverse fork rod (3) to neutral position.
27. Install selector (4) into clutch housing.
28. Install spring of selector into return bushing. I
29. Apply recommended sealant onto the mating surface of tran-
saxle case.
• Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Three Bond 1215 or an equiv- J
alent.
CAUTION:
• Remove old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to SCIA7782E K
both mating surfaces.
• Check for damage on the mating surface.
• Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to the mating surface. L
30. Engage shift finger and selector by moving selector lever (1).
Install transaxle case to clutch housing.
M
JPDIC0110ZZ
TM-53
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
31. Install seal washer and reverse idler shaft mounting bolt, and
then tighten mounting bolt to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse seal washer.
PCIB1695E
32. Tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque.
PCIB1694E
33. Apply recommended sealant to threads of position switch (1).

Then install it to transaxle case and tighten to the specified
torque.
• Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Three Bond 1215 or an equiv-
alent.
34. Install bracket (2), and then mounting bolt to the specified
torque.
35. Install shifter lever (3), and then install retaining pin using a pin
punch.
CAUTION:
Never reuse retaining pin. SCIA7784E
36. Install gasket onto drain plug, and then install it into clutch hous-
ing using the socket [Commercial service tool]. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
37. Install gasket onto filler plug, and then install it into transaxle case. Tighten filler plug to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse gasket.
• After gear oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specified torque.
TM-54
INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR
A

CAUTION: C
• Set input shaft on the vise with back plate and remove gears and snap rings.
• For installation and removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers
and flat pliers at both sides of snap ring. Stretch snap ring,
and move it with flat pliers. TM
• Disassemble gear components putting matching marks on
the parts that do not affect any functions.
E
SCIA1755J
G
1. Remove input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt (1), using the
drift (A) [SST: KV32300QAM].
H
J
JPDIC0449ZZ
2. Set the drift (A) [Commercial service tool] and puller to input
K
shaft rear bearing (1), and remove input shaft rear bearing from
input shaft using a press.
JPDIC0111ZZ
N
3. Remove washer (1), 6th input gear (2) and 5th-6th synchronizer
assembly (3).
4. Remove needle bearing. O
PCIB1750E
TM-55
5. Remove snap ring (1), washer and 5th input gear (2).
6. Remove washer.
PCIB1754E
7. Remove snap ring (1), washer, 4th input gear (2) and 3rd-4th
synchronizer assembly (3).
PCIB1753E
8. Remove snap ring (1), washer and 3rd input gear (2).
PCIB1752E
9. Remove input shaft front bearing (1) from input shaft using a
press.
PCIB1751E
Note the following, and assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
TM-56
• Press-fit the input shaft front bearing (1) onto the input shaft using
the drift (A) [Commercial service tool] and press. A
JPDIC0112ZZ
TM
• Press-fit the input shaft rear bearing (1) onto the input shaft using
the drift (A) [Commercial service tool], the drift (B) [SST:
ST36720030] and press. E
G
JPDIC0113ZZ
CAUTION: H
• Never reuse snap ring.
• Make sure that snap ring is securely installed in the groove.
• Apply gear oil to baulk ring. I
• Replace coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub as a set.
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
J
A : 3rd input gear side
B : 4th input gear side
PCIB1748E
M
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
A : 5th input gear side

N
P
PCIB1749E
• Install input shaft rear bearing mountinb bolt according to the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Follow the procedure. Otherwise, it may cause transaxle malfunction.
TM-57
1. Install the drift (A) [SST: KV32300QAM] in a vise.
2. Install input shaft assembly in the drift (A) [SST: KV32300QAM].
3. Install input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt (1). Tighten input
shaft rear bearing mounting bolt to the specified torque.
Tightening torque 100 N·m (10 kg-m, 74 ft-lb)

4. Loosen input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt by a half turn.
5. Tighten input shaft rear bearing mounting bolt to the specified
torque.
JPDIC0449ZZ
Tightening torque 165 N·m (17 kg-m, 122 ft-lb)

Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other non-
standard conditions of the shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard condi-
tions of the gears.
SCIA7736E
SYNCHRONIZER
Synchronizer Hub and Coupling Sleeve
• Damage and excessive wear of contact surfaces of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub and insert key.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly.
SCIA1753J
Baulk Ring
• If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of
baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it.
SCIA0608J
BEARING
TM-58
• Damage and rough rotation of bearing A
MTF0041D
TM
TM-59
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR

CAUTION:
• Set mainshaft on the vise with back plate and remove gears and snap rings.
• For installation and removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers
and flat pliers at both sides of snap ring. Stretch snap ring,
and move it with flat pliers.
• Disassemble gear components putting matching marks on
the parts that do not affect any functions.
SCIA1755J
1. Remove snap ring (1).
PCIB1745E
2. Set the drift (A) [SST: ST33052000] and puller on 6th main gear
(1), and remove mainshaft rear bearing inner race (2) and 6th
main gear from mainshaft using a press.
PCIB1744E
3. Set the drift (A) [SST: ST33052000] and puller on 4th main gear
(1), and remove 5th main gear (2), and 4th main gear from main-
shaft using a press.
4. Remove intermediate adjusting shim.
PCIB1743E
TM-60
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
5. Set the drift (A) [SST: ST33052000] and puller on 1st main gear
(1), and remove 1st main gear, 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly A
(2), 2nd main gear (3), bushing, and 3rd main gear (4) from
mainshaft using a press.
B
PCIB1742E
TM
6. Set the drift (A) [SST: ST33052000] and puller on mainshaft
front bearing inner race (1), and remove mainshaft front bearing
inner race from mainshaft using a press.
E
G
PCIB1741E
H
CAUTION:
For installation and removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers
and flat pliers at both sides of snap ring. Stretch snap ring, and I
move it with flat pliers.
SCIA1755J
L
1. Press-fit the mainshaft front bearing inner race (1) onto the
mainshaft using the drift (A) [SST: ST36720030] and press.
CAUTION: M
Replace mainshaft front bearing outer race and mainshaft
front bearing inner race as a set.
2. Apply gear oil to 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, 1st N
outer baulk ring, 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone,
and 2nd outer baulk ring.
O
PCIB1733E
TM-61
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
3. Install 1st main gear (1), and 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly (2)
onto the mainshaft.
CAUTION:
• Replace 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone and
1st outer baulk ring as a set.
• Replace 2nd inner baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone and
2nd outer baulk ring as a set.
• Replace 1st-2nd coupling sleeve and 1st-2nd synchro-
nizer hub as a set.
4. Press-fit the bushing (3) onto the mainshaft using the drift (A)
[SST: KV32102700] and press. PCIB1734E
5. Press-fit 3rd main gear (1) to the mainshaft using the drift (A)
[SST: KV32102700] and press after installing the 2nd main gear
(2) and the 3rd main gear to the mainshaft.
PCIB1735E
6. Select the thickness of the intermediate adjusting shim (1)

needed by measuring the distance “L” between the base of the
mainshaft (2) and the top of the 3rd main gear (3).
Unit: mm (in)
Distance “L” Adjusting shim thickness

147.690 – 147.666 (5.8146 – 5.8136) 1.500 (0.0591)
147.665 – 147.641 (5.8136 – 5.8126) 1.525 (0.0600)
147.640 – 147.616 (5.8126 – 5.8116) 1.550 (0.0610)
PCIB1736E
147.615 – 147.591 (5.8116 – 5.8107) 1.575 (0.0620)
147.590 – 147.566 (5.8106 – 5.8097) 1.600 (0.0630)
147.565 – 147.541 (5.8096 – 5.8087) 1.625 (0.0640)
147.540 – 147.516 (5.8086 – 5.8077) 1.650 (0.0650)
147.515 – 147.491 (5.8077 – 5.8067) 1.675 (0.0659)
147.490 – 147.466 (5.8067 – 5.8057) 1.700 (0.0669)
147.465 – 147.441 (5.8057 – 5.8048) 1.725 (0.0679)
147.440 – 147.416 (5.8047 – 5.8038) 1.750 (0.0689)
147.415 – 147.391 (5.8037 – 5.8028) 1.775 (0.0699)
7. Install selected intermediate adjusting shim.
8. Press-fit the 4th main gear (1) onto the mainshaft using the drift
(A) [SST: KV32102700].
PCIB1737E
TM-62
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
(A) [SST: KV32102700]. A
PCIB1738E
TM
(A) [SST: KV32102700].
E
G
PCIB1739E
11. Press-fit the mainshaft rear bearing inner race (1) onto the main- H
shaft using the drift (A) [SST: ST30901000].
CAUTION:
Replace mainshaft rear bearing outer race and mainshaft
rear bearing inner race as a set. I
12. Install snap ring onto mainshaft.
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring. J
PCIB1740E K
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR L

• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other non-
standard conditions of the shaft. M
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard condi-
tions of the gears.
N
O
PCIB1775E
SYNCHRONIZER P
TM-63
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
sleeve, synchronizer hub, insert key.
SCIA1753J
Baulk Ring
SCIA0608J
BEARING
Check for bearing damage and rough rotation. If necessary, replace
with a new one.
CAUTION:
When replacing tapered roller bearing, replace outer and inner
races as a set.
SPD715
CAUTION:
Bearing preloading shim: after the intermediate adjusting shim and/or the 6th main gear, 5th main
gear, and 4th main gear have been replaced, it is necessary to modify the bearing preloading setting
by changing the bearing preloading shim.
• Replacing the intermediate adjusting shim.
- Increase the size of the bearing preloading shim, if the replaced intermediate adjusting shim is thin-
ner than the shim used before.
- Decrease the size of the bearing preloading shim, if the replaced intermediate adjusting shim is
thicker than the shim used before.
• Replacing the 6th main gear, 5th main gear, and 4th main gear.
- Measure the thickness of the main gear used before and the new main gear.
- Increase the thickness of the bearing preloading shim, if the difference is smaller than 0.025 mm
(0.0010 in).
- Decrease the thickness of the bearing preloading shim, if the difference is greater than 0.025 mm
(0.0010 in).
TM-64
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEAR
A

1. Remove reverse output gear (1). C
TM
PCIB1760E F

G
PCIB1759E
J
3. Remove reverse baulk ring (1) and return spring (2).
M
PCIB1758E
4. Remove snap ring (1), lock washer (2), reverse input gear (3)
and washer. N
PCIB1757E
TM-65
5. Remove needle bearings (1) and washer from reverse idler
shaft.
PCIB1761E
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:
TM-66
FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
A

1. Remove differential side bearing inner race (clutch housing side) C

(1) using the drift (A) [SST: ST33061000] and a puller.
2. Remove speedometer drive gear.
TM
PCIB1767E F
3. Remove final gear mounting bolts (1), and then separate the
final gear (2) from differential case. G
PCIB1766E
J
4. Remove differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case
side) (1) using the drift (A) [Commercial service tool] and a suit-
able puller.
K
M
JPDIC0114ZZ
5. Remove lock ring (1) from differential case.

N
6. Remove pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gears, side gears and
thrust washer from differential case.
PCIB1764E
1. Install pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gears, side gears and thrust washer into differential case.
TM-67
FINAL DRIVE
2. Install lock ring (1) onto differential case.
CAUTION:
Make sure that lock ring is securely installed in the groove.
3. Install final gear into differential case, and tighten final gear
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
4. Install speedometer drive gear onto differential case.
PCIB1764E
5. Press-fit the differential side bearing inner race (clutch housing

side) onto the differential case using the drift (A) [Commercial
service tool] and press.
CAUTION:
JPDIC0115ZZ
6. Press-fit the differential side bearing inner race (transaxle case

side) onto the differential case using the drift (A) [Commercial
service tool] and press.
CAUTION:
JPDIC0116ZZ
GEAR, WASHER, SHAFT AND CASE

Check side gears, thrust washer, pinion mate shaft, pinion mate
gears, lock ring and differential case. If necessary, replace with a
new one.
PCIB0977J
BEARING
TM-68
FINAL DRIVE
with a new one. A
CAUTION:
races as a set.
B
SPD715
TM
TM-69

Refer to TM-43, "Disassembly" for disassembly procedure.

Refer to TM-49, "Assembly" for assembly procedure.

FORK ROD AND SHIFT FORK

Check contact surface and sliding surface of fork rod and shift fork
for wear, damage, and bend. Replace if necessary.
SCIA7785E
TM-70
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: RS6F94R]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specification INFOID:0000000010288479
B
TRANSAXLE
C
Engine type HRA2DDT K9K MR20DD
Transaxle model RS6F94R
Model code number 1KG0B (TL4 137) JD50D (TL4 126) 4EA0A (TL4 129) TM
Number of speeds 6
Synchromesh type Warner
E
Shift pattern
G
PCIB1769E
Gear ratio 1st 3.7273

2nd 1.9474 2.1053 H
3rd 1.3226 1.2258 1.5185
4th 0.975 0.8378 1.1714
5th 0.7632 0.6522 0.9143
I
6th 0.6383 0.5600 0.7674

Reverse 3.6865 J
Number of teeth Input gear 1st 11 11
2nd 19 19
3rd 31 27 K
4th 40 37 35
5th 38 46 35
L
6th 47 50 43
Reverse 11
Main gear 1st 41 M
2nd 37 40
3rd 41 38 41
N
4th 39 31 41
5th 29 30 32
6th 30 28 33 O
Reverse 42
Reverse idler gear Input/Output 28/29
P
Oil capacity (Imp pt) Approx. 2.0 (3-1/2)
Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed
Triple-cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd
FINAL GEAR
TM-71
Engine type HRA2DDT K9K MR20DD
Model code number 1KG0B (TL4 137) JD500 (TL4 126) 4EA0A (TL4 129)
Final gear ratio 4.2143 4.125 4.733
Number of teeth Final gear/Pinion 12/59 16/66 16/71
Side gear/Pinion mate gear 13/10
TM-72
M/T SYSTEM
M/T SYSTEM
B
C
TM
E1DIA0333ZZ
1. Mechanism housing 2. 6th main gear 3. 5th main gear

4. 4th main gear 5. 3rd main gear 6. 2nd main gear
7. 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly 8. 1st main gear 9. Reverse gear sprocket
10. Mainshaft 11. Input shaft 12. 6th input gear
TM-73
M/T SYSTEM
13. 5th-6th synchronizer assembly 14. 5th input gear 15. 4th input gear
16. 3rd-4th synchronizer assembly 17. 3rd input gear 18. 2nd input gear
19. Reverse gear sprocket 20. 1st main gear 21. Reverse gear shaft
22. Output seal 23. Differential assembly 24. Clutch housing
A. Mechanism assembly B. Differential assembly
System Description INFOID:0000000010428762
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Triple-cone synchronizer is used for the 1st and the 2nd gears to
reduce operating force of the control lever.
1 : 1st main gear

2 : 1st-2nd coupling sleeve
3 : Insert key
4 : Outer baulk ring
5 : 2nd main gear
6 : Synchronizer cone
7 : Inner baulk ring
SCIA7636E
8 : 1st-2nd synchronizer hub

Reverse gear assembly consists of reverse input gear, return spring,
reverse baulk ring and reverse output gear. When the control lever is
shifted to the reverse position, the construction allows smooth shift
operation by stopping the reverse idler shaft rotation by frictional
force of synchronizer.

2 : Reverse output gear
3 : Return spring
4 : Reverse baulk ring
SCIA7621E
5 : Reverse input gear
TM-74
POSITION SWITCH
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
B
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010428763
C
1 : Position switch
TM
E1DIA0340ZZ
F
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010428764
1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH G

H

Reverse Existed I
1–2
YES >> INSPECTION END J
E1DIA0344GB
View".
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH K
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010428765
1 : Position switch
M
O
E1DIA0340ZZ
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010428766
P
1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
TM-75
POSITION SWITCH

Neutral Existed
2–3
E1DIA0345GB
View".
TM-76
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F95R]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
C
TM-91
TM-91
TM-83
TM-91
TM-91
Reference page
TM
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)

SUSPECTED PARTS
G

(Possible cause)

O-RING (Worn or damaged)

H
GASKET (Damaged)
SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Wrong oil.)
J
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2 2
Symptoms
Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 3 3 K
Jumps out of gear 1 2 2
TM-77
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
windshield.
PIIB3706J
NOTE:
NOTE:
SEF289H
NOTE:
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.

K9K engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes
CAUTION:
TM-78
PRECAUTIONS
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. A
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. B
NOTE: C
3. Open the hood. TM
CAUTION: E
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. F
CAUTION:
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Transaxle INFOID:0000000010428768
G
CAUTION:
• If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). H
• Check oil level or replace gear oil with vehicle on level surface. I
required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied. J
K
TM-79
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION

Renault tool number
Tool name
KV32910340 Tool kit for repairing RS6F95R gearbox
Bvi.1683
Gearbox repair kit
E1DIA0334ZZ
Bvi.1902 Gearbox renovation kit

Gearbox renovation kit Use in addition to KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)
E1DIA0336ZZ
Bvi.1934 Tool for installing gear switch

Reverse gear switch socket
E1DIA0335ZZ

Roll pin punch Removing differential bearing
Feeler gauge Determine the thickness
Slide hammer 16 mm (0.63 in) dia. Removing the control lever shaft
Slide hammer 14 mm (0.55 in) dia. Removing the fork shaft bearing and selector
lever shaft ring
Separator Removing differential bearings
TM-80
GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: RS6F95R]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
GEAR OIL
B
Draining INFOID:0000000010428772 C

2. Stop engine. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain gear oil. TM
CAUTION: E
Never reuse gasket.
SCIA7622E G
Refilling INFOID:0000000010428773
H
1. Remove filler plug (1). Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches
the specified limit at filler plug hole as shown.
Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and I

Lubricants".
Oil capacity : Refer to TM-126, "General
J
Specification".
2. After refilling gear oil, check oil level. Refer to TM-81, "Inspec-
tion".
K
3. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transaxle case. SCIA7623E
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
L
M
LEAKAGE
LEVEL N
1. Remove filler plug (1) and check oil level at filler plug hole as
shown.
CAUTION: O
Never start engine while checking oil level.
CAUTION: P
Never reuse gasket.
SCIA7623E
TM-81
DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT SEAL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT SEAL

REMOVAL
1. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)" or FAX-26, "Removal and
Installation (RH)".
2. Tap the base of the differential output seal using a roll pin punch and a small hammer to rotate it in its
housing.
3. Remove differential output seals (1) using pliers, taking care not
to damage the splines.
CAUTION:
SCIA7625E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Lubricate differential output seals before installing
• Install differential output seals (1) to clutch housing and transaxle
case using the drift (A) [SST: Bvi. 1689].
B : Transaxle case side

CAUTION:
• When installing, never incline differential output seals.
• Check oil level and oil leakage after installation. Refer to TM-81,
"Inspection".
E1DIA0341ZZ
TM-82
CONTROL LINKAGE
CONTROL LINKAGE
A
TM
L
JPDIC0058GB
1. Bracket 2. Shift cable 3. Selector lever M

4. Shifter lever 5. Tapping bolt 6. Cable mounting bracket
7. Select cable 8. Grommet 9. Control device assembly
10. Control lever 11. Control lever knob N
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.

O
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner case and air duct (inlet) or air ducts. Refer to EM-380, "Removal and Installation" P
.
2. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-155, "Removal and Installation".
TM-83
CONTROL LINKAGE
3. While pressing the lock of the select cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove the select cable from the
selector lever.
4. While pressing the lock of the shift cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shift cable from the shifter
lever.
JPDIC0066ZZ
5. While pulling the lock of the select cable in the direction of the
cable mounting bracket.
6. While pulling the lock of the shift cable in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shift cable from the cable
mounting bracket.
JPDIC0067ZZ
7. Remove the control lever knob:

• Push the lever knob ornament to the top, then remove it,
• Turn the control lever knob to the left, then remove it.
8. Remove console finisher assembly and the center console assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
9. Shift the control lever to the neutral position.
arrow shown in the figure, remove the select cable from the con-
trol device assembly.
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shift cable from the con-
JPDIC0066ZZ
14. Remove the control device assembly.
15. Remove the heat plate.
16. Remove the bracket.
17. Remove the grommet and then remove the shift cable and JPDIC0067ZZ
select cable from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
• Shift the control lever to the neutral position.
TM-84
CONTROL LINKAGE
• Securely assemble each cable and the selector lever and shifter lever.
• Securely assemble each cable and the cable mounting bracket. A
• Securely assemble each cable and the control device assembly.
• Make sure that the claws of grommet are in contact with the floor.
• Be careful about the installation direction and push the control lever knob into the control lever.
B
CAUTION:
Never reuse control lever knob.
• Tapping work for tapping bolt is not applied to new clutch housing. Do not perform tapping by other than
screwing tapping bolt because tapping is formed by screwing tapping bolt into clutch housing. C
CAUTION:
Never reuse tapping bolt.
Install the select cable (the control device assembly side) with the following procedure. TM
arrow shown in the figure, install the select cable to the control
device assembly. E
G
JPDIC0067ZZ
2. Slide the lock (1) of the select cable in the direction of the arrow H
as shown in the figure to pull up the stopper (2) of the select
cable.
3. Install the end of the select cable to the pin of the control device I
assembly.
JPDIC0064ZZ
K
4. Install the lever stopper pin (1) or a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.] to
the control device assembly. L
CAUTION:
Select cable cannot be adjusted accurately without a use of
a lever stopper pin or a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.]. M
NOTE:
A lever stopper pin is not included in control device assembly.
Therefore, if the control device assembly is not replaced, pre-
pare a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.]. N
5. Check that the control lever does not move in the direction of the
select. If it moves, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0069ZZ
6. Shift the control lever to 4th gear position. O
7. With the stopper (1) of the select cable pressed into all the way,
slide lock (2) of the select cable all the way in the direction of the
arrow.
8. Remove the lever stopper pin or a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.] from P
the control device assembly.
9. Shift the control lever to each gear position to check that there is
no bindings. If any, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0065ZZ
TM-85
CONTROL LINKAGE
After installing, confirm the following items:

• When the control lever is shifted to 1st-2nd side and 5th-6th side, confirm the control lever returns to neutral
position smoothly.
• When the control lever is shifted to each position, make sure there is no binding or disconnection in each
boot.
TM-86
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
E1DIA0337ZZ
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Air breather hose 3. Clamp

4. Connecting tube
H
: Vehicle front

I
REMOVAL
Refer to the figure for removal procedure. J
INSTALLATION
K
• The hook of the clamp shall face frontward direction of the vehicle.
TM-87
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
E1DIA0339ZZ
A: For the tightening torque, refer to “INSTALLATION”.
CAUTION:
fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
may damage seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove air cleaner case and air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-380, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove battery bracket .
5. Drain clutch fluid and then remove clutch tube from CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-17,
CAUTION:
6. Disconnect position switch harness connector.
7. Disconnect ground cable.
tion".
10. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-32, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
12. Cap or plug transmission assembly opening(s) to prevent fluid from spilling.
TM-88
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
13. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-22, "Removal and Installation" .
14. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)" or FAX-26, "Removal and A
Installation (RH)" .
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug into differential side oil seal after removing front drive shaft. B
15. Remove rear engine mounting brackets and rear torque rod. Refer to EM-431, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
16. Remove suspension member and suspension member stay. Refer to EM-431, "Removal and Installation" C
.
CAUTION: TM
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the switch.
18. Remove transaxle assembly mounting bolts.
19. Remove engine mounting through bolt-securing nut. Refer to EM-431, "Removal and Installation" . E
CAUTION:
• The transaxle assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch tube. F
21. Remove CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylin- G
der). Return CSC insert to original position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc
H
INSTALLATION
- I
A : Transaxle to engine
B : Engine to transaxle J
E1DIA0338ZZ
Nuts/ Bolts/ Studs symbol (1 ) (2) (3)

Quantity 4 4 4
Tightening torque 44.0 (4.5, 32) N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 6.5 (0.66, 58) N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
CAUTION:
TM-89
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• When installing transaxle assembly, never bring input shaft into contact with clutch cover.
• Refer toCL-17, "Removal and Installation" for CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) installation procedure.
• After installation, check for oil leakage and oil level. Refer to TM-81, "Inspection".
TM-90
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
CASE AND HOUSING

C
TM
K
E1DIA0248GB
1. Clutch slave cylinder 2. Gear control sheath stop 3. Clutch housing L

4. Differential output seal 5. Gear control sheath stop 6. Input shaft output seal
7. Lubrication neck 8. Oil deflector bowl 9. Dual function switch
10. Mechanism housing bolt 11. Mechanism housing 12. Seal M
13. Cap 14. Blanking cover cap 15. Blanking cover cap
16. Seal 17. Cap 18. Differential output seal
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. N
SHAFT AND GEAR

O
TM-91
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
E1DIA0244ZZ
1. Bearing 2. Primary shaft 3. Needle bearing

4. Third gear pinion 5. Synchromesh ring 6. Synchronising spring
7. Rollers 8. Third-fourth gear synchroniser hub 9. Synchronising spring
10. Synchromesh ring 11. Sprocket supporting ring 12. Needle bearing
13. Fourth gear pinion 14. Adjusting shim 15. Sprocket supporting ring
16. Needle bearing 17. Fifth gear pinion 18. Synchromesh ring
19. Synchronising spring 20. Rollers 21. Fifth-sixthgear synchroniser hub
22. Synchronising spring 23. Synchromesh ring 24. Sixth gear pinion
25. Needle bearing 26. Sprocket supporting ring 27. Locking spring ring Bearing
28. Bearing 29. Oil deflector 30. Adjusting shim
TM-92
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
I
E1DIA0246ZZ
1. Oil deflector 2. Bearing 3. Output shaft

J
4. Reverse gear sprocket 5. First gear pinion 6. Sprocket supporting ring
7. Needle bearing 8. Triple-cone synchroniser rings 9. Synchronising spring
10. Rollers 11. First-second gear synchroniser hub 12. Synchronising spring
K
13. Triple-cone synchroniser rings 14. Retaining shim 15. Bolt
16. Sprocket supporting ring 17. Needle bearing 18. Second gear pinion
19. Third gear pinion 20. Spacer 21. Adjusting shim
L
22. Fourth gear pinion 23. Fifth gear pinion 24. Spacer
25. Sixth gear pinion 26. Adjusting shim 27. Bearing
28. Half-shim 29. Closure washer 30. Locking spring ring
M
31. Bearing locking spring ring 32. Adjusting shim
TM-93
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
E1DIA0245ZZ
1. Retaining pin 2. Reverse gear shaft 3. Washer

4. Needle washer 5. Washer 6. Needle bearing
7. Reverse gear sprocket 8. Synchromesh ring 9. Washer
10. Needle washer 11. Washer 12. Needle bearing
13. Synchroniser hub 14. Reverse gear sprocket 15. Engagement clip
16. Adjusting shim
TM-94
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
I
E1DIA0247ZZ
1. Assembled gear change lever 2. Rolled ring 3. Rolled ring

J
4. Ball bearing 5. First - second gear shift fork 6. Ball bearing
7. Fork shaft ring 8. Third - fourth gear shift fork 9. Fork shaft ring
10. Fork shaft ring 11. Fifth - sixth gear shift fork 12. Fork shaft ring
K
13. Neutral return shaft 14. Gear selection return spring 15. Gear selection guide finger
16. Fitted internal selector shaft 17. Selector seal
L
FINAL DRIVE
TM-95
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
E1DIA0249GB
1. Bearing 2. Differential ring gear 3. Differential unit

4. Ring gear bolt 5. Bearing 6. Adjustment washer
1. Remove drain plug and gasket from clutch housing using the socket [Commercial service tool] and then
drain gear oil.
3. Remove:
• the clutch thrust bearing bolts (1),
• the hydraulic clutch thrust bearing (2).
E1DIA0254ZZ
4. Remove:
TM-96
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the blanking cover (1)
• the selector lever pin (2), A
• the gear lever (3),
• the dual function switch (4) .
B
E1DIA0255ZZ
TM
5. Remove:
• the bolt (1) from the lifting eye,
• the lifting eye, E
• the gear shift cable sheath stop bolts (2) ,
• the gear shift cable sheath stop,
• the selector cable sheath stop bolts (3) ,
• the selector cable sheath stop, F
• the mechanism housing bolts.
E1DIA0256ZZ
H
6. Separate the retaining stop ring (1) of the output shaft.
K
E1DIA0257ZZ
7. Remove the mechanism housing with the gear lever (1) turned. L
E1DIA0258ZZ
O
8. Remove:
P
TM-97
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the oil neck (1) ,
• the oil neck (2) .
E1DIA0259ZZ
9. Remove:
• the stop ring (1) ,
• the output shaft adjusting shim,
• the differential output seal, refer to TM-82, "Removal and
Installation",
E1DIA0260ZZ
10. Remove the seal of the selector lever (1) using a screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Never damage mechanism housing.
E1DIA0261ZZ
11. Remove:
• the pin (1),
• the gear lever (2).
E1DIA0309ZZ
TM-98
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
12. Remove the selector shaft (1) from the mechanism housing.
A
E1DIA0310ZZ
TM
13. Remove the control lever shaft seal (1) using a screwdriver.
G
E1DIA0311ZZ
14. Remove the control lever shaft rings using a slide hammer (A) H
with a diameter 16 mm (0.63 in).
K
E1DIA0312ZZ
15. Raise the spring (1) and rotate the control module (2) clockwise
L
until the claw (3) of the reverse gear shaft is freed from any
restriction.
E1DIA0273ZZ
O
TM-99
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
16. Engage reverse gear by pushing on the fork.
17. Put the part (1) of the selector shaft in the top position.
E1DIA0274ZZ
18. Pass the part (2) of the control module over the claw (1) of the
reverse gear shaft.
E1DIA0275ZZ
NOTE:
It is possible that the control module will attach to the claw of the 5-6 fork claw during the rotation. In this
case, pull gently upwards to allow it to pass.
19. Slightly raise forks 1-2, 3-4 and 5-6 and pivot the control module clockwise again until it stops on the claw
of fork 3-4.
20. Raise the control module to remove it from the clutch housing.
E1DIA0276ZZ
21.
NOTE:
This operation requires two people.
Remove the “input shaft - output shaft - shafts and forks” assem-
bly by raising the reverse gear intermediate pinions and shaft
slightly.
E1DIA0277ZZ
TM-100
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
22. Remove the input shaft lip seal (1) using a screwdriver (A) . A
CAUTION:
Never damage mechanism housing.
E1DIA0278ZZ
TM
23. Remove the reverse gear “fork and shaft - pinions” assembly (1)
. E
E1DIA0319ZZ
H
24. Remove:
• the permanent shim (1) ,
• the reverse gear sprocket (2),
• the synchroniser hub (3), I
• the engagement clips (4),
• the needle bearing cage (5),
• the stop needle bearing cage (6),
J
• the synchroniser ring (7),
• the stop needle bearing cage (10), K
• the pin (11) from the reverse gear shaft (12) .
E1DIA0320ZZ
L
25. Remove differential assembly (1).
O
E1DIA0324ZZ
26. Remove:
P
TM-101
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the bolts (1) of the differential crownwheel,
• the differential unit of the differential crownwheel.
E1DIA0325ZZ
27. Remove differential bearings using a separator (A).
E1DIA0328ZZ
28. Remove the differential bearing housing using a roll pin punch
(A).
E1DIA0271ZZ
E1DIA0306ZZ
29. Remove:
TM-102
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the retaining bracket bolt (1),
• the retaining bracket, A
• the output shaft bearing (2) ,
• the oil deflector (3) .
B
E1DIA0307ZZ
TM
1. Refit the differential bearings using component (H) of the tool

E
[SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
E1DIA0329ZZ
H
2. Refit
• the oil deflector (3),
• the output shaft bearing (2), I
• the retaining bracket,
• the retaining bracket bolt (1).
J
:8 N.m (0.8 kg-m, 71 in-lb)
E1DIA0307ZZ
L
3. Refit the differential bearing housing using component (E) of the
tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
M
O
E1DIA0308ZZ
TM-103
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
4. Refit the differential bearing housing using component (E) of the
tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
E1DIA0272ZZ
5. Refit:
• the ball bearing ring of fork shaft 1-2 in the mechanism hous-
ing using components (A) and (AA) of the tool [Bvi. 1902],
• the ball bearing ring of fork shaft 1-2 in the clutch housing
using component (A) of the tool [Bvi. 1902].
E1DIA0316ZZ
6. Refit the rings of fork shafts 3-4, 5-6 and reverse gear using
component (F) of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
E1DIA0317ZZ
7. Refit the selector lever shaft ring using component (A) of the tool
[Bvi. 1902].
E1DIA0318ZZ
8. Install differential output seals. Refer to TM-82, "Removal and Installation".
9. Refit
TM-104
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the differential unit of the crownwheel
• the bolts (1) of the differential crownwheel. A
: 120 N.m (12 kg-m, 89 ft-lb)

B
E1DIA0325ZZ
TM
10. Adjust the pretension of the differential bearings, refer to TM-123, "Adjustment".
11. Refit the differential assembly. E
12. Check all of the removed parts of reverse gear shaft, refer to TM-196, "Inspection".
F
13. Adjust the reverse gear shaft when replacing the shaft or a reverse gear intermediate pinion, refer to TM-
121, "Adjustment".
G
14. Refit:
• a new pin (11),
• the stop needle bearing cage (10), H
• the synchroniser ring (7) ,
• the stop needle bearing cage (6), I
• new engagement clips (4),
• the synchroniser hub (3), J
• the permanent shim (1).
E1DIA0320ZZ
K
15.
NOTE:
hen refitting the shaft assembly, pay attention to the position of L
the reverse gear shaft.The anti-rotation mechanism of the shaft
is retained by a pin (1) .
16. Refit the reverse gear “pinions - shaft and fork” assembly.
M
N
E1DIA0321ZZ
17. Refit: O
TM-105
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the two control lever shaft rings using components (B) and
(BB) of the tool [Bvi. 1902],
• the seal of the control lever shaft using the component (C) of
the tool [Bvi. 1902].
WARNING:
Failure to adhere to the following procedure may damage
the gearbox mechanism housing.
E1DIA0313ZZ
18.
NOTE:
The control shaft and the gear lever cannot be separated.When
replacing the gear lever, it is essential to refit the shaft supplied
in the kit.
19. Refit the control shaft (1) and the gear lever (2) .
20. Attach the gear lever to the control shaft using a new pin.
E1DIA0314ZZ
21. Adjust the input shaft if replacing a shaft or housing. Refer to TM-114, "Adjustment".
22. Fit a new input shaft lip seal using component (G) of the tool
[SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
E1DIA0279ZZ
23.
NOTE:
This operation requires two people.
Fit the “input shaft - output shaft - shafts and forks” assembly by
raising the reverse gear intermediate pinions and shaft slightly.
E1DIA0280ZZ
TM-106
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
24. Slightly raise forks 1-2 and 3-4 and 5-6 and fit the control mod-
ule. A
E1DIA0281ZZ
TM
25. Pivot the module anti-clockwise until the claw of the reverse
gear shaft is freed from any restriction.
E
Place:
• the part (1) of the control module in neutral,
• the reverse gear shaft in neutral.
F
G
E1DIA0282ZZ
26. Raise the spring (1) , pivot the control module and pass the H
return spring over the return pin (2) .
K
E1DIA0283ZZ
27. Check that the spring (1) is securely seated in the groove of the
L
return pin (2) .
E1DIA0330ZZ
O
28. Refit:
TM-107
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• the output shaft adjusting shim,
• the new stop ring (1) .
E1DIA0262ZZ
29. Refit the deflector (1) and the adjusting shim (2) at the end of the
input shaft.
E1DIA0263ZZ
30. Refit the oil neck (1) , making sure that the lug (2) is properly
positioned in its housing.
E1DIA0264ZZ
31. Refit the oil neck (1) by positioning the lug (2) and the two cen-
tring pins (3) in their housings.
E1DIA0265ZZ
32. Check that the centring dowels are in place.
WARNING:
Applying excess sealant could cause it to be squeezed out when parts are tightened. A mixture of
sealant and fluid may cause damage to some components.
TM-108
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
33. Apply a bead of SILICONE ADHESIVE SEALANT all around the
joint face of the mechanism housing as shown on the figure. A
E1DIA0331ZZ
TM
34. Position the mechanism housing temporarily with the gear lever
(1) turned.
E
G
E1DIA0266ZZ
35. Refit the mechanism housing while rotating the gear lever (1) . H
K
E1DIA0267ZZ
36. Widen the stop ring (1) at the level of the output shaft rear bear-
L
ing in such a way that the stop ring comes into contact with the
edge of the output shaft rear bearing.
E1DIA0268ZZ
O
TM-109
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
37. Pretighten the mechanism housing bolts following the order as
shown on the figure.
: 35 N.m (3.6 kg-m; 26 ft-lb)
E1DIA0332ZZ
38. Position:
• the gear lever in 2nd gear,
• the stop ring in the bearing channel of the output shaft.
39. Check that:

• the stop ring (1) is in the bearing channel of the output shaft,
• the adjusting shim (2) rotates freely in its housing and is not secured..
40. Tighten the mechanism housing bolts following the order as

shown on the figure.
: 52 N.m (5.3 kg-m; 38 ft-lb)
E1DIA0332ZZ
41. Refit the selector lever seal using component (D) of the tool [Bvi.
1902].
42. Put the gear lever in neutral.
E1DIA0269ZZ
43. Refit:
• a new blanking cover (1),
• the gear lever (2),
• a new selector lever pin (3),
• the new dual function switch (4) coated with RESIN ADHE-
SIVE. Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and Lubricants".
E1DIA0270ZZ
TM-110
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
44. Tighten the dual function switch.
A
: 23 N.m (2.3 kg-m; 17 ft-lb)
B
45. Refit:
• the gear shift cable sheath stop,
• the gear shift cable sheath stop bolts,
• the selector cable sheath stop, C
• the selector cable sheath stop bolts,
• the lifting eye,
• the lifting eye bolt.
TM
46. Refit:
• the gear shift cable sheath stop bolts, E
: 21 N.m (2.1 kg-m; 15 ft-lb)

F
• the selector cable sheath stop bolts,
: 21 N.m (2.1 kg-m; 15 ft-lb) G

• the lifting eye bolt.
H
: 21 N.m (2.1 kg-m; 15 ft-lb)
47. Refit a new Concentric Slave Cylinder. Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation". I
TM-111

CAUTION:
• Set input shaft on the vise with back plate and remove gears and snap rings.
• For installation and removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers at both sides of snap
ring. Stretch snap ring, and move it with flat pliers.
• Disassemble gear components putting matching marks on the parts that do not affect any functions.
• The gear supporting rings are fitted tightly on the shafts, and the pressure required to remove them
is approximately 3 to 5 tons, which means that high-quality equipment is needed (press and sup-
port).
1. Remove the bearing (1) using a press and an extractor (A) .
E1DIA0284ZZ
2. Remove:
• the locking ring (1),
• the “rings - gears - hubs” assembly using a press, while apply-
ing pressure under the third gearusing component (A) of the
tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)]
E1DIA0285ZZ
1. Fit the input shaft on component (B) of the tool [SST:

KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)].
2. Lubricate and position the needle bearing (1) and the third idle
gear (2) with its synchroniser ring.
3. Refit the third-fourth gear selector rod (3) using a press and
component (C) of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)], (large
hub offset on third gear side, selector rod offset on fourth gear
side).
4. Align and engage the notches on the ring with those on the hub.
5. Refit the ring (4) using a press and component (C) of the tool E1DIA0286ZZ
[SST: KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)], positioning the lubrication holes
at 90° in relation to those of the shaft.
6. Apply a final pressure of 2.5 tonnes.
TM-112
7. Measure the distance (X1) between the bearing pressure face
and the end of the ring in order to de-termine the thickness of A
the thrust washer.
a. Given that the nominal value is 154.75 ± 0.05 mm (6.093 ± 0.002 In), use
the following procedure:
• Thrust washer = 154.75 - X1. B
b. Example:
• X1 = 150.80 mm (5.937In).
• Thrust washer= 154.75 - 150.80 = 3.95 mm(0.156 In). C
c. Given that the shims vary by 0.06 mm (0.0024 In), in this exam-
ple, it is necessary to use the 3.96 mm (0.156 In) thrust washer E1DIA0287ZZ
from the set. TM
8. Lubricate and position the needle bearing (1) and the fourth idle
gear (2) with its synchroniser ring. E
9. Refit the thrust washer (3) then the ring (4) using a press and
component (C) of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)], posi-
tioning the lubrication holes at 90° in relation to those of the
shaft. F
G
E1DIA0288ZZ
H
11. Lubricate and position the needle bearing (1) and the fifth idle
gear (2) with its synchroniser ring.
12. Refit the fifth-sixth gear selector rod (3) using a press and com- I
ponent (C) of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)], (large hub
offset on fifth gear side, selector rod offset on sixth gear side).
J
K
E1DIA0289ZZ
13. Align and engage the notches on the ring with those on the hub. L
14. Position the sixth gear (1) with its synchroniser ring.
15. Lubricate and position the needle bearing (2) . M
16. Refit the ring (3) using a press and component (C) of the tool
[SST: KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)], positioning the lubrication holes
at 90° in relation to those of the shaft. N
E1DIA0290ZZ
TM-113
18. Select and fit a locking ring (1) so that it just enters the groove.
E1DIA0291ZZ
19. Refit the bearing (1) using component (C) of the tool [SST:
KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)].
E1DIA0292ZZ
20. Refit:
• the oil deflector,
• the permanent shim.
21. Adjust the input shaft, Refer to TM-114, "Adjustment".
Adjustment INFOID:0000000010471526
INPUT SHAFT AXIAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1. With the input shaft in place, note the distance (X1) between the
end of the bearing and the joint face.
E1DIA0304ZZ
2. Measure the distance (X2) between the mechanism housing

joint face and the bearing face that takes the permanent shim.
E1DIA0305ZZ
TM-114
3. Determine the thickness of the shim using the following procedure, accounting for the axial clearance A
between 0 and 0.06 mm (0.0024 In).
a. Permanent shim = (X2 - X1) - axial clearance.
B
b. Example:
• X1 = 226.59 mm (8.9208 In).
• X2 = 227.56 mm (8.959 In).
• Permanent shim = (227.56 - 226.59) = 0.97 mm (0.038 In). C
Given that shims vary by 0.040 mm (0.0002 In), in this example, it is necessary to use the 0.096 mm
(0.078 In) shim in the set. TM
INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR E

When checking, make sure that you pay particular attention to the
appearance of the teeth, especially that of the chamfers and claws.
F
Check that:
• the teeth (1) are not broken or chipped,
• the dogs (2) are not broken, chipped or worn,.
• the friction cone (3) shows no sign of scratches or blue stains, G
• the inner wall (4) shows no sign of sticking or wear.
H
E1DIA0250ZZ
SYNCHRONIZER HUB
I
Check:
• that the selector rod slides onto the hub easily, J
• that the collets (1) are in good condition.
E1DIA0251ZZ
M
SYNCHROMESH RING
N
Check that the dog teeth (1) show no sign of wear or any fractures.
To check that the synchroniser ring is working correctly, push the ring
on the friction cone and rotate (2) : the ring should not turn. Other- O
wise, replace the synchroniser ring.
E1DIA0252ZZ
BEARING
TM-115
Make sure the bearings (1) are rotating properly.
If a bearing rotates unevenly or noisily, it must be replaced.
E1DIA0253ZZ
TM-116
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
A

1. Remove: C
• the locking ring (1) ,
• the closure washer (2) ,
• the two half shims (3) .
TM
F
E1DIA0293ZZ
2. Remove the fourth, fifth and sixth gear assembly with a press,
G
applying pressure under the fourth gear with an extractor.
E1DIA0294ZZ
J
3. Remove the gears - hubs assembly with a press, applying pres-
sure under the reverse gear using component (A) of the tool
[SST: KV32910340 (Bvi.1683)]. K
M
E1DIA0295ZZ
N
1. Refit the reverse gear (1) and the ring (2) using a press and
component D of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)], posi-
O
tioning the lubrication holes at 90° in relation to those of the
shaft.
2. Apply a final pressure of 2.5 tons.
P
E1DIA0296ZZ
TM-117
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
3. Lubricate and position the needle bearing (1) , the thrust needle
bearing (2) and the first idle gear (3) fitted with its synchroniser
ring.
4. Refit the first-second gear selector rod (4) using a press and
component (C) of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)], (large
hub offset on second gear side, selector rod offset on first gear
side).
5. Align and engage the notches on the synchroniser ring with
those on the hub.
6. Refit the ring (5) using a press and component (D) of the tool
[SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)], positioning the lubrication holes E1DIA0297ZZ
at 90° in relation to those of the shaft.

7. Apply a final pressure of 2.5 tons.
8. Lubricate and position the needle bearing (1) and the second
idle gear (2) with its synchroniser ring.
9. Refit the third fixed gear (4) using a press and component (D) of
the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
E1DIA0298ZZ
Intermediate adjustment of the output shaft
1. Position the spacer (1) .

2. Measure the distance (X1) between the end of the fixed gear of
the shaft and the end of the spacer in order to determine the
thickness of the permanent shim.
E1DIA0299ZZ
3. Given that the nominal value is 173.90 ± 0.05 mm (6.846 ± 0.002 In)
a. Use the following procedure:
• Permanent shim = 173.90 - X1.
b. Example:
X1 = 173.23 mm (0.820 In)
Permanent shim = 173.90 - 173.23 = 0.67 mm (0.0264 In)
Given that shims vary by 0.08 mm (0.003), in this example it is necessary to use the 0.68 mm (0.0268 In)
shim in the set.
TM-118
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
4. Position the selected shim.
5. Refit the fourth (1) and fifth (2) fixed gear using a press and A
component (D) of the tool [SST: KV32910340 (Bvi. 1683)].
6. Position the spacer (3) and the sixth fixed gear (4).
B
E1DIA0300ZZ
TM
Output shaft end float adjustment
1. The output shaft end float must be 0.01 mm (0.0004 In). E

2. Measure the distance (X2) between the end of the shaft and the
sixth gear, in order to determine the thickness of the shim (1).
3. Example: F
• X2 = 1.30 mm (0.051 In)
• Shim (1) = 1.30 - 0.01 = 1.29 mm (0.0508 In)
Refit the bearing (2) using component (C) of [SST: KV32910340 G

(Bvi. 1683)] and a press.
E1DIA0301ZZ H
4. Determine the thickness of the half shims with a feeler gauge

(1). I
E1DIA0302ZZ
L
5. Refit:
• the two half shims (1), M
• the closure washer (2),
• the lock ring (3).
N
E1DIA0303ZZ
P
TM-119
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
Check that:
• the friction cone (3) shows no sign of scratches or blue stains,
E1DIA0250ZZ
SYNCHRONIZER HUB
Check:
• that the selector rod slides onto the hub easily,
E1DIA0251ZZ
SYNCHROMESH RING
on the friction cone and rotate (2) : the ring should not turn. Other-
E1DIA0252ZZ
BEARING
E1DIA0253ZZ
TM-120
A

Refer to TM-96, "Disassembly" C

Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. TM

Refer to TM-103, "Assembly".
CAUTION:
• Never reuse snap ring. E
ADJUSTMENT OPERATION FOR THE AXIAL CLEARANCE OF THE REVERSE GEAR INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
G
1. Measure the distance (X1) between the end of the reverse gear
pinion and the joint face with the reverse gear shaft in place.
H
2. Remove the reverse gear shaft.
E1DIA0322ZZ
K
3. Measure the distance (X2) between the mechanism housing
L
N
E1DIA0323ZZ
4. Determine the thickness of the shim using the following procedure, accounting for the axial clearance O
between 0.04 mm(0.002In) and 0.14 mm (0.006 In).
a. Adjusting shim = (X2 - X1) - axial clearance
P
b. Example:
• X1 = 58.29 mm (2.295 In)
• X2 = 60.60 mm (2.386 In)
• Permanent shim = (60.60 - 58.29) - 0.04 = 2.27 mm (0.0894 In).
Given that shims vary by 0.080 mm (0.003 In), in this example, it is necessary to use the 2.24 mm (0.088
In) shim in the set.
TM-121

Check that:
• the friction cone (3) shows no sign of scratches or blue stains,
E1DIA0250ZZ
SYNCHRONIZER HUB
Check:
• that the selector rod slides onto the hub easily,
E1DIA0251ZZ
SYNCHROMESH RING
on the friction cone and rotate (2) : the ring should not turn. Other-
E1DIA0252ZZ
BEARING
E1DIA0253ZZ
TM-122
FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
A

Refer to TM-96, "Disassembly". C

Refer to TM-103, "Assembly". TM
Adjusting the pretension of the differential bearings

F
1. Fit the differential.
2. Measure the distance (X1) between the end of the bearing hous-
ing and the joint face. G
3. Remove the differential.
I
E1DIA0326ZZ
4. Measure the distance (X2) between the mechanism housing J

E1DIA0327ZZ
M
5. Determine the thickness of the permanent shim using the following procedure, accounting for a preten-
sioning determined by a value between 0.15mm (0.006 In) and 0.21 mm (0.008 In). N
a. Permanent shim = (X2 - X1) + pretensioning
b. Example: O
• X1 = 26.49 mm (1.043 In)
• X2 = 26.98 mm (1.062 In)
• Permanent shim = (26.98 - 26.49) + 0.18 = 0.67 mm (0.026 In) P
Given that shims vary by 0.04 mm (0.002 In), in this example, it is necessary to use the 0.68 mm (0.027
In) shim in the set.
NOTE:
In some cases, two shims are required to obtain the correct pretensioning torque.
Example: Calculated value 1.04 mm - shims available 0.48 + 0.56 = 1.04 mm (0.041)
TM-123
FINAL DRIVE
GEAR, WASHER, SHAFT AND CASE

Check side gears, thrust washer, pinion mate shaft, pinion mate
gears, lock ring and differential case. If necessary, replace with a
new one.
PCIB0977J
BEARING
with a new one.
CAUTION:
races as a set.
SPD715
TM-124
A

Refer to TM-96, "Disassembly" for disassembly procedure. C

Refer to TM-103, "Assembly" for assembly procedure. TM
E
Check contact surface and sliding surface of fork rod and shift fork
for wear, damage, and bend. Replace if necessary.
F
SCIA7785E L
TM-125

TRANSAXLE
Engine type R9M

Model code number 4EA2A
Number of speeds 6
Shift pattern
PCIB1769E

2nd 2.043
3rd 1.323
4th 0.947
5th 0.723
6th 0.596
Reverse 3.641
Number of teeth Input gear 1st 11
2nd 23
3rd 31
4th 38
5th 47
6th 52
Reverse 11
Main gear 1st 41
2nd 47
3rd 41
4th 36
5th 34
6th 31
Reverse 39
Reverse idler gear Input/Output 38/37
Oil capacity (Imp pt) Approx. 1.8 (1.6)
Triple-cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd
FINAL GEAR
TM-126
Engine type R9M A

Model code number 4EA2A
Final gear ratio 4.133
B
Number of teeth Final gear/Pinion 15/62

Side gear/Pinion mate gear - C
TM
TM-127
M/T SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: RS6F52A]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
M/T SYSTEM
4WD
JPDIC0046ZZ
1. Transaxle case 2. 3rd input gear 3. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub

4. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve 5. 4th input gear 6. 5th input gear
7. 5th-6th synchronizer hub 8. 5th-6th coupling sleeve 9. 6th input gear
10. Input shaft rear bearing 11. Mainshaft rear bearing 12. 6th main gear
13. 5th main gear 14. 4th main gear 15. 3rd main gear
16. 2nd main gear 17. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 18. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve
19. 1st main gear 20. Reverse main gear 21. Differential side bearing
22. Differential case assembly 23. Final gear 24. Output gear assembly
25. Reduction gear 26. Mainshaft front bearing 27. Mainshaft
TM-128
M/T SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: RS6F52A]
28. Input shaft 29. Input shaft front bearing 30. Clutch housing
31. Reverse idler shaft 32. Reverse idler gear (front) 33. Reverse coupling sleeve A
34. Reverse idler gear (rear)
System Description INFOID:0000000010288485 B
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
R9M C
Double-cone synchronizer is adopted for 3rd gear to reduce operating force of the control lever.
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER TM
R9M
Triple-cone synchronizer are adopted for 1st and 2nd gears to reduce operating force of the control lever.
E
PCIB1454E
H
Reverse gear can be matched smoothly in a structure by setting syn-
chronizer hub (1) of reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling I
sleeve (2), reverse baulk ring (3), and reverse insert spring (4) to
reverse idler gears, and letting reverse gear be synchronized.
5 : Reverse idler gear (rear) J

6 : Reverse idler gear (front)
PCIB1909E
TM-129
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F52A]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010288486
1 : Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

2 : Back-up lamp switch
3 : 1st gear position switch
JPDIC0124ZZ
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010288487
1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between back-up lamp switch terminals with control lever turned to 1st to 6th and reverse
position.

Reverse Existed
1–2
NO >> Replace back up lamp switch. Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View" or TM-150, "4WD :
Exploded View".
TM-130
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F52A]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
A
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010288488
B
1 : Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
2 : Back-up lamp switch
C
3 : 1st gear position switch
TM
JPDIC0124ZZ E
1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH F
Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals with control lever turned to 1st to 6th
and reverse position.
G

Neutral Existed H
1–2
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View" or TM-150,
"4WD : Exploded View".
J
TM-131
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: RS6F52A]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
TM-140 (4WD)
TM-150 (4WD)
TM-150 (4WD)
TM-150 (4WD)
TM-143
Reference page
SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn or damaged, defect of adjustment)
CAM SIDE OF CLUTCH GEAR (Worn or damaged)

STRIKING ROD ASSEMBLY (Worn or damaged)
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)

SHIFT FORK (Worn or damaged)


GASKET (Damaged)
OIL (Wrong oil.)
Noise 1 2 3 3
Oil leakage 3 1 2 2
Symptoms
Hard to shift or will not shift 2 2 1 3 3 3 3
Jumps out of gear 1 2 3 3 3
TM-132
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: RS6F52A]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
B
windshield. C
TM
PIIB3706J
Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Transaxle INFOID:0000000010288491 F
CAUTION:
• If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder).
G
• Check oil level or replace gear oil with vehicle on level surface. H
required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied. I
J
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even K
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing L
NOTE:
M
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- N
NOTE:
SEF289H
O
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. P
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
TM-133
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [6MT: RS6F52A]

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Open the hood.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
TM-134
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [6MT: RS6F52A]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
KV381054S0 • Removing differential side bearing outer
Puller race (transaxle case side)
• Removing mainshaft front bearing TM
• Removing differential side bearing outer
race (clutch housing side)
E
ZZA0601D
ST33400001 Installing differential side oil seal (clutch hous-

Drift ing side) F
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
G
ZZA0814D
H
ST35321000
Drift • Installing input shaft oil seal
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. • Installing reverse main gear
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. • Installing 1st main gear bushing I
• Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-
bly
• Installing 2nd main gear bushing
• Installing 3rd main gear J
ZZA1000D
KV40105320 Installing differential side bearing outer race

Drift (clutch housing side)
K
a: 88 mm (3.46 in) dia.
b: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
ZZA1000D
ST33200000 • Installing mainshaft front bearing M

Drift • Installing 6th input gear bushing
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. • Installing 4th main gear
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. • Installing 5th main gear
• Installing 6th main gear N
ZZA1002D O
ST30720000 • Installing differential side oil seal (transaxle
Drift case side)
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. • Installing differential side bearing outer race P
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. (clutch housing side)
• Installing differential side bearing outer race
(transaxle case side)
• Installing mainshaft rear bearing
• Installing differential side bearing (clutch
housing side)
ZZA0811D • Installing differential side bearing (transaxle
case side)
TM-135
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name
ST33061000 • Installing bore plug
Drift • Removing differential side bearing (transax-
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. le case side)
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. • Removing differential side bearing (clutch
housing side)
ZZA1000D
ST33052000 • Removing input shaft rear bearing

Drift • Removing 6th input gear, 6th input gear
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. bushing, 5th-6th synchronizer hub assem-
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. bly, and 5th input gear
• Removing 5th input gear bushing, 4th input
gear, 4th input gear bushing, 3rd-4th syn-
chronizer hub assembly, and 3rd input gear
• Installing input shaft front bearing
• Removing mainshaft rear bearing
ZZA1023D • Removing 6th main gear
• Removing 4th main gear and 5th main gear
KV40105020 Removing 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd
Drift main gear bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia. assembly, 1st main gear, 1st main gear bush-
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. ing, and reverse main gear
c: 15 mm (0.59 in)
ZZA1133D
ST30031000 Measuring wear of inner baulk ring

Puller
ZZA0537D
KV40105710 • Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assem-

Press stand bly
a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. • Installing 4th input gear bushing
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) • Installing 5th input gear bushing
• Installing 5th-6th synchronizer hub assem-
bly
• Installing 2nd main gear bushing
ZZA1058D
• Installing 3rd main gear
ST30901000 • Installing input shaft rear bearing

Drift • Installing 4th main gear
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. • Installing 5th main gear
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. • Installing 6th main gear
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia. • Installing mainshaft rear bearing
ZZA0978D
TM-136
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name A
ST30032000 Installing input shaft front bearing
Drift
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. B
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
C
ZZA0978D
ST38220000 • Installing reverse main gear

Press stand • Installing 1st main gear bushing TM
a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. • Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) bly
E
ZZA1058D
F
KV40101630 Installing reverse main gear
Drift
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. G
H
ZZA1003D
KV38102510 • Installing 1st main gear bushing

Drift • Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assem-
a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia. bly I
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. • Installing differential side bearing (clutch
housing side)
• Installing differential side bearing (transaxle J
case side)
ZZA0838D
ST15243000 Measuring end play of side gear K

Drift
a: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia.
SCIA1088J M
ST30612000 Removing output gear bearing
Drift
b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
N
b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
O
ZZA1000D
TM-137
PREPARATION

Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin
a: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia.
NT410
Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin of selec-

a: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. tor lever
NT410
Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin of each

a: 7.5 mm (0.295 in) dia. shifter lever
NT410
Drift Installing striking rod oil seal and shifter lever

a: 24.5 mm (0.965 in) dia. oil seal
S-NT063
Drift Installing differential side bearing (clutch hous-

a: 57 mm (2.24 in) dia. ing side)
b: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia.
S-NT474
Drift Installing output gear bearing

a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
S-NT474
TM-138
PREPARATION
A
Puller Removing each bearing, gear, and bushing
C
ZZA0537D
Puller Removing each bearing, gear, and bushing
TM
NT077
TM-139
GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: RS6F52A]
GEAR OIL
4WD
4WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010288498
Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View".

4WD : Draining INFOID:0000000010288499

2. Stop engine. Remove drain plug and then drain gear oil.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
JPDIC0073ZZ
4WD : Refilling INFOID:0000000010288500
1. Remove filler plug (1). Fill with new gear oil to transaxle.
A : Suitable gauge
: Vehicle front
Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and

Lubricants".
Oil capacity (reference) : Refer to TM-206,
"General Specifications".
JPDIC0139ZZ
2. After refilling gear oil, check oil level. Refer to TM-140, "4WD :
Inspection".
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
4WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000010288501
LEAKAGE
LEVEL
TM-140
GEAR OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: RS6F52A]
1. Remove filler plug (1).
A
: Vehicle front
2. Measure oil level using a suitable gauge (A) as shown in the fig-
B
ure and then check if it is within the specifications.
Oil level “L” : Refer to TM-206,

"General Specifications". C
CAUTION:
• Never start engine while checking oil level. JPDIC0139ZZ
• Measure suitable gauge according to the wall of the plug TM

mounting hole.
CAUTION: E
Never reuse gasket.
F
TM-141
SIDE OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F52A]

SIDE OIL SEAL

REMOVAL
1. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)" (4WD), or FAX-26,
"Removal and Installation (RH)"(4WD).
2. Remove differential side oil seals using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
SCIA0824E
INSTALLATION
• Install differential side oil seal to transaxle case and clutch housing
using the drift.
Dimension “A” : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)
Transaxle case side : Drift [SST: ST30720000]

Clutch housing side : Drift [SST: ST33400001]
CAUTION:
• When installing, never incline differential side oil seal. SCIA1010E
• Check oil level and oil leakage after installation. Refer to TM-140, "4WD : Inspection".
TM-142
CONTROL LINKAGE
CONTROL LINKAGE
A
TM
L
JPDIC0056GB
1. Bracket 2. Shift cable 3. Shifter lever A M

4. Selector lever 5. Cable mounting bracket 6. Select cable
7. Grommet 8. Control device assembly 9. Control lever
10. Control lever knob N

O
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner case and air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-380, "Removal and Installation". P
TM-143
CONTROL LINKAGE
JPDIA0240ZZ
selector lever.
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shift cable from the shifter
lever A.
JPDIC0066ZZ
cable mounting bracket.
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shift cable from the cable
mounting bracket.
JPDIC0067ZZ
8. Remove the control lever knob:

• Push the lever knob ornament to the top, then remove it,
• Turn the control lever knob to the left, then remove it.
9. Remove console finisher assembly and the center console assembly. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
10. Shift the control lever to the neutral position.
JPDIC0066ZZ
TM-144
CONTROL LINKAGE
arrow shown in the figure, remove the select cable from the con- A
arrow shown in the figure, remove the shift cable from the con- B
15. Remove the control device assembly.
16. Remove the heat plate. C
17. Remove the bracket.
18. Remove the grommet and then remove the shift cable and JPDIC0067ZZ
select cable from the vehicle. TM
INSTALLATION
• Shift the control lever to the neutral position. E
• Securely assemble each cable and the selector lever and shifter lever A.
• Securely assemble each cable and the cable mounting bracket.
• Securely assemble each cable and the control device assembly. F
• Make sure that the claws of grommet are in contact with the floor.
• Be careful about the installation direction and push the control lever knob into the control lever.
CAUTION:
Never reuse control lever knob. G
Install the select cable (the control device assembly side) with the following procedure.
arrow shown in the figure, install the select cable to the control H
device assembly.
JPDIC0067ZZ
K
2. Slide the lock (1) of the select cable in the direction of the arrow
as shown in the figure to pull up the stopper (2) of the select
cable. L
3. Install the end of the select cable to the pin of the control device
assembly.
M
JPDIC0064ZZ
O
4. Install the lever stopper pin (1) or a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.] to
CAUTION:
Select cable cannot be adjusted accurately without a use of P
a lever stopper pin or a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.].
NOTE:
A lever stopper pin is not included in control device assembly.
Therefore, if the control device assembly is not replaced, pre-
pare a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.].
5. Check that the control lever does not move in the direction of the
select. If it moves, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0069ZZ
TM-145
CONTROL LINKAGE
6. Shift the control lever to 4th gear position.
7. With the stopper (1) of the select cable pressed into all the way,
slide lock (2) of the select cable all the way in the direction of the
arrow.
8. Remove the lever stopper pin or a pin [3 mm (0.12 in) dia.] from
9. Shift the control lever to each gear position to check that there is
no bindings. If any, repeat step 3.
JPDIC0065ZZ
After installing, confirm the following items:

• When the control lever is shifted to 1st-2nd side and 5th-6th side, confirm the control lever returns to neutral
position smoothly.
• When the control lever is shifted to each position, make sure there is no binding or disconnection in each
boot.
TM-146
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JPDIC0051ZZ
1. Air breather hose 2. Transaxle assembly 3. Air breather tube

4. Clamp 5. Air cleaner case
H
: Vehicle front

I
REMOVAL
Refer to the figure for removal procedure. J
INSTALLATION
K
CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
winding when installing it.
• Be sure to insert air breather hose into air breather tube until L
hose end reaches the tube's base.
• Set air breather hose with painted mark facing forward.
• Install air breather hose to air cleaner case by fully inserting M
the clip.
SCIA2663J O
TM-147
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F52A]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
R9M
JPDIC0126GB
: For the tightening torque, refer to “INSTALLATION”.
CAUTION:
fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
may damage seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-147, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove air cleaner case and air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-380, "Removal and Installation" (R9M).
6. Drain clutch fluid and then remove clutch tube from CSC (Con-
centric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
CAUTION:
7. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connec-
tor.
8. Disconnect back-up lamp switch harness connector.
9. Disconnect ground cable. JPDIA0240ZZ
TM-148
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: RS6F52A]
tion". A
12. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-32, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
14. Cap or plug transmission assembly opening(s) to prevent fluid from spilling. B
15. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-22, "Removal and Installation" (R9M).
16. Remove propeller shaft assembly (for 4WD). Refer to DLN-186, "Removal and Installation" .
C
17. Remove front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-60, "Removal and Installation (LH)" (4WD), or FAX-63, "Removal
and Installation (RH)" (4WD).
NOTE:
Insert a suitable plug into differential side oil seal after removing front drive shaft. TM
18. Remove transfer assembly (for 4WD). Refer to DLN-155, "Removal and Installation".
19. Remove rear engine mounting brackets and rear torque rod. Refer to EM-431, "Removal and Installation".
E
20. Remove suspension member and suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-21, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the switch. F
22. Remove transaxle assembly mounting bolts or nuts.
23. Remove engine mounting through bolt-securing nut . Refer to EM-431, "Removal and Installation".
G
24. Remove two mounting bolts of engine mounting insulator (LH) (for R9M). Refer to EM-431, "Removal and
Installation".
CAUTION: H
26. Remove CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation". I
CAUTION:
If transaxle assembly is removed from the vehicle, always replace CSC (Concentric Slave Cylin-
der). Return CSC insert to original position to remove transaxle assembly. Dust on clutch disc J
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. K
- R9M
L
: Transaxle to engine
: Engine to transaxle
M
Bolt and nut symbol A* B C

Quantity 2 4 3 N
Bolt length
— 60 (2.36) 55 (2.17)
“ ” mm (in) JPDIC0128ZZ
Tightening torque O
48 (4.9, 35)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
*: Nut and stud
CAUTION: P
• When installing transaxle assembly, never bring input shaft into contact with clutch cover.
• Refer to CL-17, "Removal and Installation" for CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) installation procedure.
• After installation, check for oil leakage and oil level. Refer to TM-140, "4WD : Inspection".
TM-149
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [6MT: RS6F52A]

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
4WD
CASE AND HOUSING
JPDIC0045GB
1. Differential side oil seal 2. Clutch housing 3. Input shaft oil seal
4. Oil channel 5. Oil gutter A 6. Back-up lamp switch
7. Plunger 8. Gasket 9. Plug
10. Bore plug 11. Striking rod oil seal 12. Transaxle case
13. Oil gutter B 14. Filler plug 15. Air breather tube
16. Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch 17. Shifter lever oil seal 18. Drain plug
19. Magnet
: Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Three Bond 1215 or an equivalent.

SHAFT AND GEAR
TM-150
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
I
PCIB1888E
1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. 3rd needle bearing

J
4. 3rd input gear 5. 3rd inner baulk ring 6. 3rd synchronizer cone
7. 3rd outer baulk ring 8. 3rd-4th spread spring 9. 3rd-4th shifting insert
10. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub 11. 4th baulk ring 12. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
K
13. 4th input gear bushing 14. 4th needle bearing 15. 4th input gear
16. Thrust washer 17. 5th input gear bushing 18. 5th needle bearing
19. 5th input gear 20. 5th baulk ring 21. 5th-6th spread spring
L
22. 5th-6th shifting insert 23. 5th-6th synchronizer hub 24. 5th-6th coupling sleeve
25. 6th baulk ring 26. 6th input gear 27. 6th needle bearing
28. 6th input gear bushing 29. Snap ring 30. Input shaft rear bearing
M
31. Oil channel 32. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting 33. Retaining pin
shim
34. Reverse idler shaft 35. Thrust needle bearing 36. Reverse idler gear needle bearing
N
37. Reverse insert spring 38. Reverse idler gear (front) 39. Reverse baulk ring
40. Reverse coupling sleeve 41. Reverse idler gear (rear) 42. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim
: Replace the parts as a set. O
• Apply gear oil to gears, shafts, synchronizers, and bearings when assembly.
P
TM-151
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
PCIB1889E
1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft bearing retainer 3. Mainshaft

4. Reverse main gear 5. 1st main gear 6. 1st main gear bushing
7. 1st needle bearing 8. 1st inner baulk ring 9. 1st synchronizer cone
10. 1st outer baulk ring 11. 1st-2nd spread spring 12. 1st-2nd shifting insert
13. 1st-2nd synchronizer hub 14. 2nd outer baulk ring 15. 2nd synchronizer cone
16. 2nd inner baulk ring 17. 1st-2nd coupling sleeve 18. 2nd main gear bushing
19. 2nd needle bearing 20. 2nd main gear 21. 3rd main gear
22. 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer 23. 4th main gear adjusting shim 24. 4th main gear
25. 5th main gear 26. 5th-6th mainshaft spacer 27. 6th main gear
28. 6th main gear adjusting shim 29. Mainshaft rear bearing 30. Mainshaft C-ring
31. C-ring holder 32. Snap ring 33. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting
shim
• Apply gear oil to gears, shafts, synchronizers, and bearings when assembly.
TM-152
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TM
PCIB1806E
K
1. Clutch housing 2. Retaining pin 3. Reverse shift fork

4. Reverse fork rod 5. Return spring 6. Striking rod assembly L
7. Striking rod shim 8. Striking rod adjusting shim 9. Shifter lever A
10. Shifter lever B 11. Guide bolt 12. Selector lever
13. Transaxle case 14. 3rd-4th shift fork 15. 3rd-4th fork rod M
16. 1st-2nd shift fork 17. 1st-2nd fork rod 18. 5th-6th shift fork
19. 5th-6th fork rod
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure. N
FINAL DRIVE
O
TM-153
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
JPDIC0131GB
1. Differential side bearing adjusting 2. Differential side bearing outer race 3. Differential side bearing (transaxle
shim (transaxle case side) case side)
4. Final gear 5. Retaining pin 6. Differential case
7. Reduction gear 8. Differential side bearing (clutch 9. Differential side bearing outer race
housing side) (clutch housing side)
10. Side gear thrust washer 11. Pinion mate gear 12. Pinion mate thrust washer
13. Side gear 14. Pinion mate shaft 15. Output gear
16. Output gear bearing 17. Snap ring
A. M9R B. MR20DE C. MR20DE
4WD : Disassembly INFOID:0000000010288516
1. Remove drain plug and gasket from clutch housing.
JPDIC0073ZZ
TM-154
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
A
JPDIC0047ZZ
TM
3. Remove plug and gasket from transaxle case.
G
PCIB1865E
4. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch (1) from transaxle

H
case.
5. Remove back-up lamp switch (2) and plunger from transaxle
case.
CAUTION: I
Never lose plunger.
6. Remove air breather tube (3) from transaxle case.
J
PCIB1835E
K
7. Remove guide bolt from transaxle case.
N
PCIB1836E
8. Remove retaining pin using a pin punch and then remove selec- O
tor lever from transaxle case.
PCIB1837E
TM-155
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
9. Remove transaxle case mounting bolts.
PCIB1838E
10. Remove bore plug from transaxle case.

CAUTION:
• Never damage transaxle case.
• Access bore plug from cutout (A) of transaxle case when
removing.
PCIB1839E
11. Remove transaxle case following the procedures below.

a. Expand snap ring at mainshaft rear bearing accessing from the
bore plug hole. Then pull up transaxle case from clutch housing
until snap ring comes off.
PCIB1840E
b. With shifter lever A (1) held in the position shown in the figure,
remove transaxle case from clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Never drop each adjusting shim.
NOTE:
Make sure to hold shifter lever A in the position shown in the fig-
ure. Otherwise transaxle case cannot be removed from clutch
housing.
JPDIC0140ZZ
TM-156
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
12. Remove oil gutter A (1) and oil gutter B (2) from transaxle case.
A
A : Tab of oil gutter
PCIB1841E
TM
13. Remove snap ring from transaxle case.
G
PCIB1842E
14. Remove retaining pin using a pin punch and then remove shifter H
lever A and shifter lever B from transaxle case.
PCIB1844E K
15. Remove differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case
side) from transaxle case using the puller and then remove dif-
ferential side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. L
CAUTION:
Never damage transaxle case and differential side bearing
outer race. M
SCIA0897E
16. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case. O

CAUTION:
P
SCIA0397E
TM-157
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
17. Remove shifter lever oil seal (1) and striking rod oil seal (2) from
transaxle case.
CAUTION:
PCIB1846E
18. Remove striking rod shim (1), striking rod adjusting shim (2),
mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim (3), input shaft rear bear-
ing adjusting shim (4), and reverse idler gear adjusting shim (5).
PCIB1858E
19. Remove retaining pin of reverse shift fork (1) using a pin punch.
PCIB1850E
20. Rotate striking lever of striking rod assembly as shown in the fig-
ure. Then rotate reverse fork rod to a position where bracket of
reverse fork rod does not interfere with striking lever of striking
rod assembly.
21. Pull out reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod.
PCIB1851E
22. Remove retaining pin of 5th-6th shift fork (1) using a pin punch.
2 : 5th-6th fork rod
PCIB1852E
TM-158
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
23. Remove retaining pin of 3rd-4th shift fork (1) using a pin punch. A
24. Pull out 3rd-4th fork rod (2).
PCIB1853E
TM
25. Pull out 5th-6th shift fork (1) and 5th-6th fork rod (2).
E
G
PCIB1854E
26. Pull out 3rd-4th shift fork (1). H
PCIB1855E
K
27. Remove retaining pin of 1st-2nd shift fork (1) using a pin punch.
28. Pull out 1st-2nd shift fork and 1st-2nd fork rod (2). L
PCIB1856E
O
29. Remove striking rod assembly (1).
PCIB1857E
TM-159
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
30. Remove gear components from clutch housing in the following
procedure.
a. Remove a set of input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and
reverse idler gear assembly by tapping the tip of input shaft from
the back of the clutch housing with a plastic hammer.
CAUTION:
Always withdraw mainshaft straight out. Failure to do so
can damage resin oil channel on clutch housing side.
b. Remove final drive assembly.
SCIA0964E
31. Remove magnet from clutch housing.
PCIB1859E
32. Remove mainshaft bearing retainer and then mainshaft front

bearing from clutch housing using the puller.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch housing, mainshaft front bearing, and
oil channel.
33. Remove oil channel from clutch housing.
SCIA1077J
34. Remove differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing

side) from clutch housing using the puller.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch housing and differential side bearing
outer race.
SCIA1069J
35. Remove input shaft oil seal from clutch housing.

CAUTION:
SCIA0398E
TM-160
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
36. Remove snap ring (1) from clutch housing.
CAUTION: A
JPDIC0044ZZ
TM
37. With output gear assembly (1) held by hand, turn clutch housing
upside down as shown in the figure.
CAUTION: E
• When turning clutch housing upside down, hold output
gear assembly by hand so that it will not become
detached.
• Never damage clutch housing. F
NOTE:
Output gear assembly spontaneously falls when changing the
clutch housing direction as shown in the figure. G
38. With output gear assembly held by hand, slowly remove output JPDIC0075ZZ
gear assembly from clutch housing. If output gear assembly can
not be removed, tap it with a plastic hammer from the transaxle case contact surface side of clutch hous- H
ing for removal.
39. Remove differential side oil seal from clutch housing.
CAUTION:
I
JPDIC0076ZZ
TM-161
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
4WD : Assembly INFOID:0000000010288517
1. Install differential side oil seal (1) to clutch housing using the drift
(A) [SST: ST33400001].
Dimension “H” : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)

CAUTION:
• Never damage clutch housing.
JPDIC0077ZZ
2. Install differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side) to

clutch housing using the drifts.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse differential side bearing and differential side
bearing outer race.
• Replace differential side bearing and differential side
bearing outer race as a set.
A : Drift [SST: ST30720000]

B : Drift [SST: KV40105320]
C : M9R
D : MR2ODE
JPDIC0132ZZ
TM-162
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
4. Select differential side bearing adjusting shim. Refer to TM-173, A
"4WD : Adjustment".
CAUTION:
Never select differential side bearing adjusting shim with B
output gear assembly installed on clutch housing.
5. Remove final drive assembly.
C
SCIA0888E
TM
6. Turn clutch housing upside down as shown in the figure. And
then install output gear assembly (1) into clutch housing.
CAUTION:
E
• Gently install it, aligning the clutch housing hole with the
center of output gear assembly.
• Install output gear assembly, straightening it with a mag-
net. F
• Never damage clutch housing and output gear assembly.
G
JPDIC0074ZZ
7. Install snap ring (1) onto clutch housing and make sure that end
H
play (gap between snap ring and groove) of output gear assem-
bly (2) satisfies the standard value.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207, I

“L” "End Play".
CAUTION:
• Only one snap ring can be selected. J
JPDIC0043ZZ
K
8. Install input shaft oil seal (1) to clutch housing using the drift (A)
[SST: ST35321000].
L
Dimension “H” : 1.1 - 2.1 mm (0.043 - 0.083 in)
CAUTION:
• Never reuse input shaft oil seal. M
• When installing, never incline input shaft oil seal.
N
PCIB1814E
TM-163
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
9. Install oil channel (1) on mainshaft side.
CAUTION:
When installing oil channel, fit the rib (A) of oil channel into
the processed area of the spot facing (B).
PCIB1921E
10. Install mainshaft front bearing to clutch housing using the drift.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of mainshaft front bearing.
SCIA0401E
11. Install mainshaft bearing retainer (1) to clutch housing and

tighten mounting bolt to the specified torque.
2 : Mainshaft front bearing

3 : Oil channel
CAUTION:
Install with punched surface facing up.
PCIB1938E
12. Install magnet to clutch housing.
PCIB1859E

CAUTION:
Engage reduction gear teeth in output gear teeth.
SCIA0888E
TM-164
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
14. Install input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse
idler gear assembly into clutch housing. A
CAUTION:
• Wrap a tape, etc. to the spline of input shaft so as not to
damage the input shaft oil seal. B
• Be careful with the orientation of reverse idler shaft.
SCIA0964E
TM
15. Install striking rod assembly (1) into clutch housing.
G
PCIB1857E
CAUTION: H
Check that return spring is securely seated in the groove on
return pin.
I
K
PCIB1866E
16. Install 1st-2nd shift fork (1) and 1st-2nd fork rod (2) and then L
install retaining pin to 1st-2nd shift fork.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin.
• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd shift fork and M
1st-2nd fork rod.
• Assemble retaining pin from the direction shown by the
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur- N
face of 1st-2nd shift fork.
PCIB1856E O
TM-165
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
17. Install 3rd-4th shift fork (1) to 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th shift fork.
PCIB1855E
18. Install 5th-6th shift fork (1) and 5th-6th fork rod (2) and then
install retaining pin to 5th-6th shift fork.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-6th shift fork and
5th-6th fork rod.
arrow in the figure until it becomes flush with the end sur-
face of 5th-6th shift fork.
PCIB1852E
19. Install 3rd-4th fork rod (2) and then install retaining pin to 3rd-4th
shift fork (1).
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th fork rod.
face of 3rd-4th shift fork.
PCIB1853E
20. Install reverse shift fork (1) and reverse fork rod (2).
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of reverse shift fork and
reverse fork rod.
PCIB1875E
21. Rotate striking lever of striking rod assembly as shown in the fig-
ure. Then rotate reverse fork rod to a position where bracket of
reverse fork rod does not interfere with striking lever of striking
rod assembly.
PCIB1851E
TM-166
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
22. Install retaining pin to reverse shift fork (1).
A
CAUTION:
• Never reuse retaining pin. B
face of reverse shift fork. C
PCIB1850E
TM
23. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and differential side bearing outer race (transaxle
case side).
• For selection of adjusting shim, refer to TM-173, "4WD : Adjustment". E
24. Install selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto reverse idler gear assembly.
• For selection of adjusting shim, refer to TM-173, "4WD : Adjustment".
25. Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input shaft. F
26. Install selected striking rod adjusting shim and striking rod shim onto striking rod assembly.
• For selection of adjusting shim, refer to TM-173, "4WD : Adjustment". G
27. Install shifter lever oil seal (1) and striking rod oil seal (2) to tran-
saxle case using the drift [Commercial service tool].
H
Dimension “H” : 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.039 in)
CAUTION:
• Never reuse shifter lever oil seal and striking rod oil seal. I
• When installing, never incline shifter lever oil seal and
striking rod oil seal.
• Never damage transaxle case.
J
PCIB1818E
28. Install differential side oil seal (1) to transaxle case using the drift
K
(A) [SST: ST30720000].
Dimension “H” : -0.5 - 0.5 mm (-0.020 - 0.020 in)

L
CAUTION:
• Never damage transaxle case. M
PCIB1878E
TM-167
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
29. Install shifter lever B (1) and shifter lever A (2) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of shifter lever B and shifter
lever A.
PCIB1843E
30. Install retaining pin to shifter lever A.

CAUTION:
face of shifter lever A.
PCIB1844E
31. Install transaxle case following the procedures below.

a. Install selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into transaxle case.
b. Install oil gutter A (1) and oil gutter B (2) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Insert the tab (A) of oil gutter A and oil gutter B into tran-
saxle case.
PCIB1841E
c. Temporarily install snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing into tran-

saxle case.
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.
PCIB1842E
TM-168
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
d. Apply recommended sealant to mating surface of clutch housing
as shown in the figure. A
alent.
CAUTION:
B
• Remove old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces.
Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adher-
ing to both mounting surfaces.
• Apply sealant so as not to break the bead. C
• The width of sealant bead is 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
• The height of sealant bead is 0.4 - 1 mm (0.016 - 0.04 in).
PCIB1807E
• The overlap length of both ends of sealant bead is 3 - 5 TM
mm (0.12 - 0.20 in).
e. With shifter lever A (1) held in the position shown in the figure,
temporarily assemble transaxle case to clutch housing. E
CAUTION:
Never damage striking rod oil seal.
NOTE: F
ure. Otherwise transaxle case cannot be installed to clutch
housing.
G
JPDIC0140ZZ
H
f. While rotating shifter lever A (1) in the direction of the arrow in
the figure, assemble transaxle case to clutch housing.
I
2 : Shifter lever B
K
JPDIC0141ZZ
g. Accessing from the bore plug hole, expand snap ring at main- L
shaft rear bearing so that the ring catches the periphery of main-
shaft rear bearing.
h. Temporarily tighten transaxle case mounting bolts.
M
PCIB1840E
O
TM-169
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
i. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to 2nd gear position.
NOTE:
• The 2nd gear position is attained when shifter lever A is in the
position shown in the figure.
PCIB1809E
• When transaxle is shifted to the 2nd gear position, mainshaft

assembly is lifted.
j. Seat snap ring in the groove on mainshaft rear bearing. If snap
ring is not seated in the groove on mainshaft rear bearing,
remove transaxle case and repeat the procedure from step d.
SCIA0893E
k. Tighten transaxle case mounting bolts to the specified torque.
PCIB1838E
l. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to neutral position.

NOTE:
The neutral position is attained when shifter lever A is in the
PCIB1930E
TM-170
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
32. Install bore plug to transaxle case using the drift.
CAUTION: A
Never reuse bore plug.
SCIA0894E
TM
33. Install selector lever to transaxle case and then install retaining
pin to selector lever.
CAUTION: E
face of selector lever. F
G
PCIB1837E
34. Install guide bolt following the procedures below. H

a. Shift the shifter lever A and selector lever to neutral position.
b. Visually confirm from the guide bolt mounting hole (C) that the
lever is securely set to neutral position. If it is not in the neutral I
position, repeat the procedure from step a.
1 : Guide bolt
J
A : Neutral position
B : Except neutral position
CAUTION: K
The guide groove (D) of striking rod assembly will be dam-
aged when assembling guide bolt with the lever is in except
neutral position.
L
c. Check continuity between terminals of park/neutral position
(PNP) switch to confirm it in the neutral position. If it is not in the
neutral position, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch and
repeat the procedure from step a. Refer to TM-131, "Component M
Inspection".
O
PCIB1890E
TM-171
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
d. Install guide bolt to transaxle case and then tighten guide bolt to
the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse guide bolt.
PCIB1836E
35. Apply recommended sealant to threads of park/neutral position

(PNP) switch (1). Then install it to transaxle case and tighten to
alent.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
36. Install plunger to transaxle case.
37. Apply recommended sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch
(2). Then install it to transaxle case and tighten to the specified
torque. PCIB1835E

alent.
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads.
38. Install air breather tube (3) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse air breather tube.
• Assemble air breather tube until its collar element contacts with transaxle case.
39. Install gasket onto plug and then install them into transaxle
case. Tighten plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
PCIB1865E
40. Install gasket onto drain plug and then install them into clutch
housing. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse gasket.
JPDIC0073ZZ
TM-172
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
41. Install gasket onto filler plug and then install them into transaxle
case. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. A
CAUTION:
• Never reuse gasket.
• After gear oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specified
B
torque.
JPDIC0047ZZ
TM
4WD : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010288518
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD E

• When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting
shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim, mea-
sure clearance “L” between transaxle case and differential side
bearing outer race. F
CAUTION:
Up to 2 adjusting shims can be selected.
• Calculate dimension “L” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol- G
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of preload for differential
side bearing.
H
Preload : Refer to TM-209, "Differential Side Bearing PCIB0795E
Preload".
Dimension “L” = (L1 - L2) + Preload
I
L : Thickness of adjusting shim
L1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim J
L2 : Distance between differential side bearing
outer race and clutch housing end face
1. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension K
“L1” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim.
CAUTION: L
“L1”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
use the average value.
2. Install differential side bearing outer race onto differential side M
bearing on final gear side. Holding lightly differential side bear-
ing outer race horizontally by hand, rotate final gear five times or
more (for smooth movement of bearing roller).
SCIA1078E
N
3. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge as shown in the fig-

ure, measure dimension “L2” between differential side bearing O
outer race and clutch housing end face.
CAUTION:
“L2”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
use the average value. P
SCIA1079E
TM-173
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
4. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and then
install differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case side)
using the drift.
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing and differential side bear-
ing outer race as a set.
SCIA0898E
REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY

• When adjusting reverse idler gear end play, select adjusting shim
for reverse idler gear. To select adjusting shim (1), measure clear-
ance between transaxle case (2) and reverse idler gear (rear) (3).
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
• Calculate dimension “Q” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol-
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for reverse
idler gear.
End play : Refer to TM-207, "End Play".

Dimension “Q” = (Q1 - Q2) - End play PCIB1925E
Q : Thickness of adjusting shim

Q1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim
Q2 : Distance between clutch housing end face
and end face of reverse idler gear (rear)
1. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension
“Q1” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim.
SCIA1003E

ure, measure dimension “Q2” between clutch housing (1) end
face and end face of reverse idler gear (rear) (2).
CAUTION:
“Q2”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
3. Install selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto reverse
idler gear (rear).
PCIB1879E
INPUT SHAFT END PLAY
TM-174
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
• When adjusting input shaft end play, select adjusting shim for input
shaft rear bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance A
between transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing.
CAUTION:
B
• Calculate dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol-
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for input shaft
rear bearing.
C
Dimension “O” = (O1 - O2) - End play SCIA1001E
O : Thickness of adjusting shim TM
O1 : Distance between transaxle case end face

E
O2 : Distance between clutch housing end face
and end face of input shaft rear bearing
1. Using a depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension F
“O1” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim.
CAUTION:
“O1”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and G
SCIA1002E I

ure, measure dimension “O2” between clutch housing end face
J
and end face of input shaft rear bearing.
CAUTION:
“O2”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
use the average value. K
3. Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input
shaft.
L
PCIB0792E
M
STRIKING ROD END PLAY
• When adjusting striking rod end play, select adjusting shim (1) for
striking rod (2). To select adjusting shim, measure clearance
between transaxle case (3) and striking rod shim (4). N
CAUTION:
• Calculate dimension “R” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol- O
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for striking
rod.
P
Dimension “R” = (R1 - R2) - End play PCIB1823E
R : Thickness of adjusting shim
TM-175
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
R1 : Distance between transaxle case end face
R2 : Distance between clutch housing end face
and end face of striking rod shim
1. Using a depth micrometer (A) and straightedge (B), measure
dimension “R1” between transaxle case (1) end face and mount-
ing face of adjusting shim.
CAUTION:
“R1”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
PCIB1824E
2. Using a depth micrometer (A) and straightedge (B) as shown in

the figure, measure dimension “R2” between clutch housing (1)
end face and end face of striking rod shim (2).
CAUTION:
• “R2”: Measure at 4 point by approximately 90 degrees and
• When measuring, be careful for the inclination of striking
rod assembly and striking rod shim.
3. Install selected striking rod adjusting shim onto striking rod
assembly.
PCIB1825E
MAINSHAFT END PLAY

• When adjusting mainshaft end play, select adjusting shim (1) for
mainshaft rear bearing (2). To select adjusting shim, measure
clearance “M” between transaxle case (3) and dummy adjusting
shim (4) on mainshaft rear bearing.
5 : Snap ring
6 : Mainshaft
CAUTION:
• Calculate dimension “P” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the fol-
lowing procedure to satisfy specification of end play for mainshaft JPDIC0146ZZ
rear bearing.

Dimension “P” = (M + N) - End play
P : Thickness of adjusting shim
M : Distance between dummy adjusting shim on
mainshaft rear bearing end face and transaxle
case end face
N* : Thickness of dummy adjusting shim
*: Refer to the latest parts information to use a dummy adjusting shim of which part number is the thinnest in thickness.
1. Install transaxle case following the procedures below.
TM-176
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
a. Temporarily install snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing into tran-
saxle case. A
CAUTION:
B
PCIB1842E
TM
b. Install dummy adjusting shim (1) to mainshaft assembly.
G
PCIB1826E
c. With shifter lever A (1) held in the position shown in the figure,
H
temporarily assemble transaxle case to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Never damage striking rod oil seal.
NOTE: I
ure. Otherwise transaxle case cannot be installed to clutch
housing. J
JPDIC0140ZZ
K
d. While rotating shifter lever A (1) in the direction of the arrow
shown in the figure, assemble transaxle case to clutch housing.
L
2 : Shifter lever B
N
JPDIC0141ZZ
e. Accessing from the bore plug hole, expand snap ring at main- O
shaft rear bearing so that the ring catches the periphery of main-
shaft rear bearing.
f. Temporarily tighten transaxle case mounting bolts. P
PCIB1840E
TM-177
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
2. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to 2nd gear position.
NOTE:
• The 2nd gear position is attained when shifter lever A is in the
PCIB1809E
• When transaxle is shifted to the 2nd gear position, mainshaft

assembly (1) is lifted.
PCIB1923E
3. Seat snap ring in the groove on mainshaft rear bearing. If snap ring is not seated in the groove on main-
shaft rear bearing, remove transaxle case and repeat the procedure 1 from step c.
4. Shift the shifter lever A to 1st gear position, and then shift it to 2nd gear position. Repeat 3 times.
NOTE:
• The mainshaft rear bearing position will be stabilized by shifting between 1st gear position and 2nd gear
position alternately.
• The 1st gear position is attained when shifter lever A (1) is in
the position shown in the figure.
PCIB1881E
• When transaxle is shifted to the 1st gear position, mainshaft

assembly (1) is declined.
PCIB1934E
TM-178
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
5. Set the dial indicator (A) to dummy adjusting shim (1) through
the bore plug mounting hole. A
2 : Mainshaft rear bearing

3 : Snap ring B
PCIB1827E
TM
6. Shift the shifter lever A (1) to 2nd gear position (A), and then
rotate it in the direction of the arrow (C) in the figure until it stops.
Using this position as the reference point, measure the amount E
of movement when shifting shifter lever A to 1st gear position (B)
and rotating it in the direction of the arrow (D) in the figure until it
stops. This measurement is the "M" dimension.
7. When measurement "M" is 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in), adjust- F
ment terminates, and the dummy adjusting shim becomes regu-
lar adjusting shim. Select adjusting shim from the computed
expressions when measurement "M" is over 0.06 mm (0.0024 G
in).
PCIB1935E
K
TM-179
Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View" .

1. Before disassembling, measure end play for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and
6th input gears.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207, "End Play".

2. Remove oil channel.
SCIA0966E
3. Press out input shaft rear bearing using the drift and a puller.
4. Remove snap ring.
SCIA0967E
5. Press out 6th input gear, 6th needle bearing, 6th input gear
bushing, 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly, and 5th input gear
using the drift (A) [SST: ST33052000] and a puller (B).
6. Remove 5th needle bearing.
PCIB1882E
7. Press out 5th input gear bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear,
4th needle bearing, 4th input gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub assembly, and 3rd input gear using the drift and a puller.
8. Remove 3rd needle bearing.
SCIA0919E
TM-180
9. Press out input shaft front bearing using a puller.
A
SCIA0920E
TM
1. Install 3rd needle bearing to input shaft.

E
2. Install 3rd input gear, 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer cone, and 3rd outer baulk ring to input shaft.
CAUTION:
Replace 3rd inner baulk ring, 3rd synchronizer cone, and 3rd outer baulk ring as a set.
F
3. Install 3rd-4th spread springs, 3rd-4th shifting inserts, and 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto 3rd-4th coupling
sleeve.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 3rd-4th synchronizer hub. G
• Never reuse 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th cou-
pling sleeve.
• Replace 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th coupling H
sleeve as a set.
SCIA0921E J
• Be careful with orientation of 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.

K
PCIB0799E
N
• Be sure not to hook center projection of 2 spread springs
on same shifting insert.
O
SCIA1083E
TM-181
4. Press in 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly using the press
stand.
CAUTION:
Align grooves of 3rd-4th shifting insert and 3rd outer baulk
ring.
SCIA0922E
5. Press in 4th input gear bushing using the press stand.

6. Install 4th baulk ring.
7. Install 4th needle bearing and 4th input gear to input shaft.
PCIB0800E
8. Select thrust washer so that dimension “C2” satisfies the stan-

dard value below. Then install thrust washer onto input shaft.
Standard value for dimen- : Refer to TM-208, "Di-

sion “C2” mension".
CAUTION:
Only one thrust washer can be selected.
SCIA0925E
9. Press in 5th input gear bushing using the press stand.

CAUTION:
Never reuse 5th input gear bushing.
10. Install 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear to input shaft.
11. Install 5th baulk ring.
SCIA0926E
TM-182
12. Install 5th-6th synchronizer hub, 5th-6th spread springs, and 5th-6th shifting inserts onto 5th-6th coupling
sleeve. A
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
B
A :Transaxle front side
B :Transaxle rear side
• Never reuse 5th-6th synchronizer hub and 5th-6th cou- C
pling sleeve.
• Replace 5th-6th synchronizer hub and 5th-6th coupling
sleeve as a set.
TM
PCIB1883E
E
• Be careful with orientation of 5th-6th coupling sleeve.
A : 5th input gear side

F
H
PCIB1884E
• Be sure not to hook center projection of 2 spread springs I

on same shifting insert.
SCIA1083E L
13. Press in 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly using the press

stand.
CAUTION: M
Align grooves of 5th-6th shifting insert and 5th baulk ring.
SCIA0928E
TM-183
14. Install 6th needle bearing, 6th input gear, 6th baulk ring onto 6th
input gear bushing and then press in 6th input gear bushing onto
input shaft using the drift [SST: ST33200000].
WCIA0309E
15. Install snap ring onto input shaft and make sure that end play
(gap between snap ring and groove) of 6th input gear bushing
satisfies the standard value.
End play standard value :Refer to TM-207, "End Play".

• If measurement is outside the standard range, select snap
ring.
CAUTION:
SCIA0970E
16. Press in input shaft rear bearing using the drift [SST:
ST30901000].
CAUTION:
Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing
the 6th input gear side.
WCIA0310E
17. Press in input shaft front bearing using the drifts.

18. Install oil channel onto input shaft.
PCIB0825E
19. Check end play of 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th input gears.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207,

"End Play".
SCIA0966E
TM-184
A
• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, etc. of shaft B
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, etc. of gears
• Excessive wear, damage, peeling, etc. of cam side of clutch gears
C
TM
JPDIC0142ZZ
E
SYNCHRONIZER
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. F
sleeve, synchronizer hub and shifting insert
G
SMT387A I
Baulk Ring and Spread Spring

Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. J
K
SMT867D M
Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (4th, 5th, and 6th)
Push baulk ring on the cone and measure the clearance between N
baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a
new one.
O
Clearance
Standard value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance". P
Limit value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring Clear-
ance".
SMT140
Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer (3rd)
TM-185
Check the clearance between outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone,
and inner baulk ring as follows.
CAUTION:
The clearances “A” and “B” are controlled with outer baulk
ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set. Replace
them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit value.
SCIA0950E
1. Measure the clearance “A” at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a dial indicator. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance “A”
ance".
ance".
SCIA0951E
2. Measure the clearance “B” at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-

site using a feeler gauge. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance “B”
Standard value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring
Clearance".
Limit value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring
Clearance".
SCIA1084E
BEARING
• Damage and rough rotation of bearing
MTF0041D
TM-186
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
A
Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View". B

1. Before disassembling, measure the end play of 1st and 2nd C

main gears.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207, TM

"End Play".
SCIA0973E F
2. Remove snap ring.

3. Remove C-ring holder and then remove mainshaft C-rings. G
PCIB0805E
J
4. Press out mainshaft rear bearing, 6th main gear adjusting shim,
and 6th main gear using the drift and a puller.
5. Remove 5th-6th mainshaft spacer.
K
M
SCIA0976E
6. Press out 4th main gear and 5th main gear using the drift and a
puller. N
7. Remove 4th main gear adjusting shim.
8. Remove 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
O
SCIA0937E
TM-187
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
9. Press out 3rd main gear and 2nd main gear using the drift (A)
[SST: KV40105020] and a puller (B).
10. Remove 2nd needle bearing.
PCIB1885E
11. Press out 2nd main gear bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
assembly, 1st main gear, 1st needle bearing, 1st main gear
bushing, and reverse main gear using the drift (A) [SST:
KV40105020].
PCIB1886E
1. Press in reverse main gear using the drifts and the press stand.
SCIA0939E
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of reverse main gear.
• Never reuse reverse main gear.
SCIA0992E
TM-188
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
2. Press in 1st main gear bushing using the drifts and the press
stand. A
3. Install 1st needle bearing and then 1st main gear.
SCIA0940E
TM
4. Install 1st-2nd spread springs, 1st-2nd shifting inserts, and 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto 1st-2nd cou-
pling sleeve.
CAUTION:
E
• Be careful with orientation of 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
• Never reuse 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd cou-
pling sleeve.
• Replace 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd coupling F
sleeve as a set.
H
SCIA0921E
• Be careful with orientation of 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.

I
PCIB0803E
L
• Be sure not to hook center projection of 2 spread springs

on same 1st-2nd shifting insert.
M
SCIA1083E
TM-189
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
5. Install 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and 1st outer
baulk ring onto mainshaft and then press in 1st-2nd synchro-
nizer hub assembly onto mainshaft using the drifts and the press
stand.
CAUTION:
• Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
on 2nd gear-side must have been removed.
• Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve.
• Replace 1st inner baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and
1st outer baulk ring as a set.
SCIA0941E
6. Press in 2nd main gear bushing using the drift and the press
stand.
7. Install 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd
inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Replace 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and
2nd inner baulk ring as a set.
8. Install 2nd needle bearing and 2nd main gear.
SCIA0942E
9. Press in 3rd main gear using the drift and the press stand.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 3rd main gear.
• Never reuse 3rd main gear.
10. Install 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
SCIA0943E
11. Select 4th main gear adjusting shim so that dimension “C1” sat-
isfies the standard value below and install 4th main gear adjust-
ing shim onto mainshaft.
Standard value for dimension “C1” : Refer to TM-208,

"Dimension".
CAUTION:
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
PCIB0804E
TM-190
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
12. Press in 4th main gear using the drifts.
CAUTION: A
• Be careful with orientation of 4th main gear.
• Never reuse 4th main gear.
B
SCIA0945E
TM
CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of 5th main gear.
E
• Never reuse 5th main gear.
14. Install 5th-6th mainshaft spacer.
F
G
SCIA0946E

H
CAUTION:
Never reuse 6th main gear.
SCIA0977E
K
16. Select 6th main gear adjusting shim and then install it onto mainshaft.
• Calculate thickness “S” of 6th main gear adjusting shim follow-
ing the procedure below so that end play dimension between L
6th main gear and mainshaft rear bearing becomes the dimen-
sion shown below.
M
End play :Refer to TM-207, "End Play".
Dimension “S” = (S1 - S2) - End play
S : Thickness of adjusting shim N
S1 : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to
mainshaft rear bearing press-fit end face
S2 : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to O
6th main gear end face
CAUTION:
P
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
a. Measure dimension “S1” and “S2” using a height gauge (A) and
pick tester (B).
b. Install selected 6th main gear adjusting shim to mainshaft.
PCIB1887E
TM-191
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
17. Press in mainshaft rear bearing using the drifts.
SCIA0978E
18. Install mainshaft C-rings onto mainshaft and check that end play
of mainshaft rear bearing satisfies the standard value.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207, "End Play".

• If measurement is outside the standard range, reselect main-
shaft C-rings.
SCIA0979E
19. Install C-ring holder and then install snap ring.

CAUTION:
PCIB0805E
20. Check end play of 1st and 2nd main gears.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207,

"End Play".
SCIA0973E
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
TM-192
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, etc. of shaft A
B
JPDIC0143ZZ
TM
SYNCHRONIZER
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. E
• Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve,
synchronizer hub and shifting insert.
F
SMT387A H
Baulk Ring and Spread Spring

Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. I
J
SMT867D L
Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer

M
R9M :—
and inner baulk ring as follows. N
CAUTION:
The clearances “A” and “B” are controlled with outer baulk
ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set. Replace
O
them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit value.
SCIA0950E
TM-193
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
site using a dial indicator. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance “A”
ance".
ance".
SCIA0951E

site using a feeler gauge. And then calculate mean value.
Clearance “B”
Clearance".
Clearance".
SCIA1084E
Baulk Ring Clearance for Triple Cone Synchronizer
R9M : 1st and 2nd

and inner baulk ring as follows.
CAUTION:
The clearances “A”, “B”, and “C” are controlled with outer
baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring as a set.
Replace them as a set if the clearances are outside the limit
value.
PCIB1358E

site using a feeler gauge (B) when pressing outer baulk ring (1),
synchronizer cone (2), and inner baulk ring (3) toward gear taper
cone (C). And then calculate mean value.
Clearance “A”
Clearance".
Clearance".
JPDIC0034ZZ
TM-194
MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
site using a feeler gauge. And then calculate mean value. A
Clearance “B”
Standard value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring B
Clearance".
Clearance". C
PCIB1360E
TM
3. Measure the clearance “C” at 2 points or more diagonally oppo-
site using a feeler gauge (A) when pressing outer baulk ring (1),
synchronizer cone (2), and inner baulk ring (3) toward gear taper E
cone (B). And then calculate mean value.
Clearance “C”
F
Clearance".
Limit value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring G
Clearance".
JPDIC0035ZZ
BEARING
H
K
MTF0041D
TM-195
Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View" .

1. Remove reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve, and reverse insert springs simultaneously.
2. Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.
3. Remove thrust needle bearing.
4. Remove reverse baulk ring.
5. Remove reverse idler gear (front).
6. Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.
7. Remove thrust needle bearing.
8. Remove retaining pin from reverse idler shaft.
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:
• Be careful with orientation of reverse insert spring.
: Transaxle front side
PCIB1924E

• Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, etc. of shaft
JPDIC0144ZZ
SYNCHRONIZER
TM-196
• Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, A
synchronizer hub of reverse idler gear (rear), and insert spring.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub of reverse idler gear (rear)
must move smoothly.
B
SMT637A
TM
Baulk Ring
Check damage, or excessive wear on cam face of baulk ring or
working face of insert. If necessary, replace it with new ones. E
SMT867D
H
Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (Reverse)
Push baulk ring on the cone and measure the clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If the measurement is below limit, replace it with
a new one. I
Clearance
Standard value : Refer to TM-207, "Baulk Ring J
Clearance".
Clearance". K
SMT140
BEARING L
M
TM-197
FINAL DRIVE
FINAL DRIVE
4WD

4WD : Disassembly INFOID:0000000010288536
DIFFERENTIAL CASE
1. Remove final gear mounting bolts and then separate the final gear from differential case.
2. Remove reduction gear mounting bolts.
JPDIC0036ZZ
3. Remove differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using the

drift (A) [SST: ST33061000] and pullers (B).
CAUTION:
Hook a puller on the inner race of differential side bearing.
4. Remove reduction gear.
PCIB1876E
5. Remove differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using the

drift (A) [SST: ST33061000] and pullers (B).
CAUTION:
Hook a puller on the inner race of differential side bearing.
JPDIC0103ZZ
6. Remove retaining pin from differential case using a pin punch

and then remove pinion mate shaft.
7. Rotate pinion mate gears and remove pinion mate gears, pinion
mate thrust washers, side gears, and side gear thrust washers
from differential case.
SCIA0908E
TM-198
FINAL DRIVE
OUTPUT GEAR
A
A : Output gear groove B

: Snap ring notch
TM
JPDIC0040ZZ
2. Remove output gear bearing using the drift (A) [SST: E

ST30612000] and a puller (B).
JPDIC0038ZZ
H
4WD : Assembly INFOID:0000000010288537
I
DIFFERENTIAL CASE
1. Apply gear oil to sliding area of differential case, each gear, and thrust washer.
2. Install side gear thrust washers and side gears into differential J
case.
3. While rotating pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate
gears, aligning them diagonally, install them into differential K
case.
SMT839 M
4. Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case.

CAUTION: N
Be sure not to damage pinion mate thrust washers.
MTK0132D
TM-199
FINAL DRIVE
5. Measure end play of side gears following the procedure below.
Then select side gear thrust washer.
a. Put differential case vertically so that its side gear to be mea-
sured faces upward.
b. Place the drift and a dial indicator onto side gears.
PCIB0875E
c. Move side gears up and down to measure the clearance and

select thrust washer so that it satisfies the standard value.
Allowable Clearance be- : Refer to TM-209, "Differen-

tween side gear and dif- tial Side Gear Clearance".
ferential case with thrust
washer
CAUTION:
• There should be no resistance and gears should rotate
freely.
SMT611A
• Place differential case upside down. Measure the end play
for opposite side-gears likewise securely.
• Only one thrust washer can be selected.
6. Install retaining pin into pinion mate shaft using a pin punch.
CAUTION:
Never reuse retaining pin.
SCIA0908E
7. Install reduction gear into differential case and tighten reduction

gear mounting bolts to the specified torque.
JPDIC0036ZZ
8. Press in differential side bearing (clutch housing side) to differential case using the drifts.

B : Drift [SST: KV38102510]
C : Drift [Commercial service tool]
CAUTION:
• Never reuse differential side bearing and differential side bearing outer race.
• Replace differential side bearing and differential side bearing outer race as a set.
TM-200
FINAL DRIVE
9. Press in differential side bearing (transaxle case side) to differ-
ential case using the drifts. A

B : Drift [SST: KV38102510] B
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing and differential side bear-
ing outer race as a set. C
JPDIC0079ZZ
TM
10. Install final gear into differential case and tighten final gear mounting bolts to the specified torque.
• R9M E
JPDIC0149ZZ
H
OUTPUT GEAR
1. Install output gear bearing (1) to output gear (2) using the drift I
(A) [Commercial service tool].
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of output gear bearing. J
L
JPDIC0039ZZ
2. Install snap ring (1) onto output gear and make sure that end
play (gap between snap ring and groove) of output gear bearing M
satisfies the standard value.
End play standard value : Refer to TM-207, "End Play". N

CAUTION:
• Only one snap ring can be selected.
• Never reuse snap ring. O
• Never align snap ring notch with output gear groove (A)
when assembling.
JPDIC0040ZZ
P
4WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000010288538
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
TM-201
FINAL DRIVE
Check the clearance between side gear and differential case as fol-
lows.
1. Clean final drive assembly sufficiently to prevent side gear thrust
washer, differential case, side gear, and other parts from sticking
by gear oil.
PCIB0875E
2. Put differential case vertically so that side gear to be measured faces upward.
3. Place the drift and a dial indicator onto side gear. Move side
gear up and down, and measure the clearance.
Allowable Clearance be- : Refer to TM-209, "Differen-

tween side gear and dif- tial Side Gear Clearance".
ferential case with thrust
washer
CAUTION:
There should be no resistance and gears should rotate
freely.
SMT611A
4. If not within specification, adjust the clearance by changing side
gear thrust washer thickness.
5. Turn differential case upside down and measure the clearance between side gear and differential case on
the other side in the same way.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Gear, Washer, Shaft, and Case
• Check side gears, side gear thrust washers, pinion mate shaft, pin-
ion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers and differential case. If
necessary, replace with a new one.
MTK0135D
Gear
• Check output gear and reduction gear. If necessary, replace with a new one.
Bearing
Check for bearings damage and rough rotation. If necessary, replace
with a new one.
CAUTION:
races as a set.
SPD715
TM-202
A
Refer to TM-150, "4WD : Exploded View" . B

Remove return spring to striking rod assembly. C
TM
PCIB1867E F
1. Temporarily install return spring to striking rod assembly. G

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of return spring.
H
J
PCIB1830E
2. Attach one end of the return spring to striking interlock of striking

rod assembly while holding return spring. K
PCIB1831E
N
CAUTION:
When installing, check that return spring is securely seated
in the groove of striking interlock of striking rod assembly. O
PCIB1833E
TM-203
STRIKING ROD ASSEMBLY AND RETURN SPRING

Check contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, bending,
etc. If necessary, replace parts.
JPDIC0145ZZ

• Check contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, bend-
ing, etc. If necessary, replace parts.
PCIB1869E
TM-204
• Check if the width of shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling
sleeve) is within allowable specification below. A
Item One-side wear specification Sliding width of new part

7.80 - 7.93 mm B
1st-2nd 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
7.80 - 7.93 mm
3rd-4th 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in) C
6.10 - 6.23 mm
5th-6th 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.2402 - 0.2453 in) SMT801D
12.80 - 12.93 mm TM
Reverse 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.5039 - 0.5091 in)
TM-205
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: RS6F52A]

General Specifications INFOID:0000000010288543
TRANSAXLE
Engine type R9M

Transaxle model RS6F52A
Axle type 4WD
Model code number JA60A
Number of speed 6
Shift pattern
PCIB1769E

2nd 2.043
3rd 1.322
4th 0.947
5th 0.723
6th 0.596
Reverse 3.641
Number of teeth Input gear 1st 11
2nd 20
3rd 31
4th 38
5th 47
6th 52
Reverse 11
Main gear 1st 41
2nd 39
3rd 41
4th 36
5th 34
6th 31
Reverse 39
Reverse idler gear Front 37
Rear 39
Oil level “L” mm (in) 87.0 - 92.0 (3.425 - 3.622)
Oil capacity (Reference) (Imp pt) 2.0 (3-1/2)
TM-206
Engine type R9M
A
Axle type 4WD
Model code number JA60A B
Double-cone synchronizer 3rd
Triple-cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd C
FINAL GEAR
TM
Engine type R9M
Axle type 4WD E
Model code number JA60A
Final gear ratio 4.266
F
Number of teeth Final gear/Pinion 64/15
Side gear/Pinion mate gear 14/10
G
End Play INFOID:0000000010288544
Unit: mm (in)
H
Items Standard value
1st main gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
2nd main gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) I
6th main gear 0 - 0.1 (0 - 0.004)
3rd input gear 0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122)
J
4th input gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
5th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
6th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) K
Reverse idler gear 0.04 - 0.10 (0.0016 - 0.0039)
6th input gear bushing 0 - 0.1 (0 - 0.004)
Input shaft 0 - 0.06 (0 - 0.0024) L
Mainshaft 0 - 0.06 (0 - 0.0024)
Mainshaft C-ring 0 - 0.06 (0 - 0.0024)
M
Striking rod 0.05 - 0.152 (0.0020 - 0.0060)
Output gear bearing (For 4WD) 0 - 0.06 (0 - 0.0024)
Output gear assembly (For 4WD) 0 - 0.06 (0 - 0.0024) N
Baulk Ring Clearance INFOID:0000000010288545
TM-207
Unit: mm (in)
Measurement point Standard value Limit value

3rd Clearance between synchronizer cone and 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031) 0.2 (0.008)
(Double-cone synchronizer) inner baulk ring end face “A”
Clearance between outer baulk ring pawl 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 -0.043) 0.2 (0.008)
and synchronizer cone “B”
PCIB0249E
1st and 2nd Clearance between synchronizer cone and 0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047) 0.3 (0.012)
(Triple-cone synchronizer) clutch gear end face “A”
Clearance between outer baulk ring pawl 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.2 (0.008)
and synchronizer cone “B”
Clearance between inner baulk ring and 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) 0.3 (0.012)
clutch gear end face “C”
PCIB0835J
4th 0.9 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.057) 0.7 (0.028)

5th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028)
6th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028)
Reverse 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028)
Dimension INFOID:0000000010288546
Unit: mm (in)
Measurement point Standard value
Mainshaft: JA60A 182.85 - 182.95 (7.199 - 7.203)
Dimension “C1”
SCIA1009E
Input shaft: JA60A 161.8 - 161.9 (6.370 - 6.374)

Dimension “C2”
SCIA1008E
TM-208
Differential Side Bearing Preload INFOID:0000000010288547
A
Unit: mm (in)
Differential side bearing preload: L* JA60A 0.15 - 0.21 (0.0059 - 0.0083)
*: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness.

B
Differential Side Gear Clearance INFOID:0000000010288548
C
Unit: mm (in)
Allowable clearance between side gear and differential case with thrust washer 0.1 - 0.2 (0.004 - 0.008)
TM
TM-209
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010589198
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000010765808
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables.
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro-
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Open driver door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open.
5. Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open.
NOTE:
• Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed.
TM-210
PRECAUTIONS
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a A
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned. B
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock C
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
TM
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to E
windshield.
PIIB3706J
H
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even I
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing J
NOTE:
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the K
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- L
NOTE:
SEF289H
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected. M
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. N
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2. O
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
P

TM-211
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Open the hood.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000010589202
CAUTION:
• To replace TCM, refer to TM-280, "Description".
• To replace transaxle assembly, refer to TM-282, "Description".
General Precautions INFOID:0000000010589203
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable

from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the CVT assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
SEF289H
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from TCM, do not damage pin terminals (bend or break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
AAT470A
TM-212
PRECAUTIONS
• Perform TCM input/output signal inspection and check
whether TCM functions normally or not before replacing TCM. A
Refer to TM-256, "Reference Value".
MEF040DA
TM
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE”.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the E
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
G
JSBIA1315ZZ
• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and Lubricants". H
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the CVT fluid.
I
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine INFOID:0000000010589204
The TCM and ECM have an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to
warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. J
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid K
valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.) L
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube M
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
N
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector INFOID:0000000010589205
REMOVAL O
TM-213
PRECAUTIONS
• Rotate bayonet ring counterclockwise. Pull out CVT unit har-
ness connector upward and remove it.
SCIA6685J
INSTALLATION
1. Align marking on CVT unit harness connector terminal with
marking on bayonet ring. Insert CVT unit harness connector.
2. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise.
JPDIA0294ZZ
3. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until marking on CVT unit har-

ness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit on bayo-
net ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition).
JPDIA0295ZZ
CAUTION:
• Securely align marking on CVT unit harness connector
terminal body with bayonet ring slit . Then, be careful
not to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Never mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent por-
tion.
JPDIA0296ZZ
TM-214
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
1. KV311039S0 CVT fluid changing and adjustment
Charging pipe set
2. KV31103920* TM
O-ring
E
JSDIA1844ZZ
KV38107900 Installing drive shaft

Protector F
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
PDIA1183J
H
*: The O-ring as a unit part is set as a SST.
I
Tool number
Description
Tool name J
Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts
L
PBIC0190E
Lint-free paper Cleaning transaxle

M
JSDIA4746ZZ
Oil seal remover Removing each oil seal O
JSDIA4998ZZ
TM-215
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
Tool number
Description
Tool name
Drift Installing differential side oil seal
a: 56 mm (2.20 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT115
Drift Installing converter housing oil

a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. seal
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
NT115
TM-216
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
B
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010589208
TM
JSDIA5307ZZ
O
Engine room, LH Transaxle assembly CVT shift selector assembly
TM-217
COMPONENT PARTS
No. Component Function

Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• ABS operation signal
• TCS operation signal
• VDC operation signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • ABS malfunction signal
• Vehicle speed signal
• Decel G signal
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion.
• Engine and CVT integrated control signal
NOTE:
General term for the communication (torque-down permission, torque-
down request, etc.) exchanged between the ECM and TCM.
• Engine speed signal
• Engine coolant temperature signal
ECM • Accelerator pedal position signal
• Closed throttle position signal
Mainly receives the following signals from TCM via CAN communication.
• Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal
• ECO mode signal*1
Refer to ECM-14, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" for detailed installation location.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
Refer to BCS-7, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
ECO mode switch*1 DMS-5, "ECO Mode Switch"

• Manual mode signal
• Non-manual mode signal
• Manual mode upshift signal
• Manual mode downshift signal
Combination meter • ECO mode switch signal*1
• Shift position signal
• Manual mode shift refusal signal
Refer to MWI-6, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion.
Manual mode switch TM-224, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
TCM TM-219, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"
Transmission range switch TM-219, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Input speed sensor TM-221, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"
CVT fluid temperature sensor*2 TM-221, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor"
Primary pressure sensor*2 TM-222, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Sensor"
Secondary pressure sensor*2 TM-222, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor"
Line pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-224, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Control
valve Primary pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-222, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Secondary pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-223, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid TM-223, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
valve*2 Valve"
Select solenoid valve*2 TM-223, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve"
CVT unit connector —
TM-218
COMPONENT PARTS
A
Primary speed sensor TM-219, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor"
Output speed sensor TM-220, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"
*1: For Russia, Ukraine, Kazakhstan, and Australia. B

*2: These components are included in control valve assembly.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000010589209
C
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply.
• The vehicle driving status is judged based on the signals from the TM
sensors, switches, and other control units, and the optimal tran-
saxle control is performed.
• For TCM control items, refer to TM-236, "CVT CONTROL SYS- E
TEM : System Description".
F
JSDIA4183ZZ
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000010589210

G
• The transmission range switch is installed to upper part of tran-
saxle case.
• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position. H
JSDIA4184ZZ
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000010589211 K
• The primary speed sensor is installed to side cover of transaxle.

• The primary speed sensor detects primary pulley speed. L
JSDIA3073ZZ
TM-219
COMPONENT PARTS
• The primary speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM
judges the rotating body speed from the pulse signal.
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000010589212
• The output speed sensor is installed to back side of transaxle.

• The output speed sensor detects final gear speed.
JSDIA3073ZZ
• The output speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM
JSDIA1824GB
TM-220
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000010589213
A
• The input speed sensor is installed to the front side of transaxle
case.
• The input speed sensor detects input shaft speed. B
TM
JSDIA3074ZZ
• The input speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM E
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000010589214

K
• The CVT fluid temperature sensor is installed to control valve.

• The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects CVT fluid temperature in oil pan. L
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor, and changes the signal voltage by converting changes in the
CVT fluid temperature to a resistance value. TCM evaluates the CVT fluid temperature from the signal volt-
age value.
M
JSDIA1825GB
TM-221
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000010589215
• The primary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.

• The primary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the primary pulley.
• When pressure is applied to the ceramic device in the primary pressure sensor, the ceramic device is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the primary pressure from its voltage change. Voltage
is increased along with pressure increase.
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000010589216
• The secondary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the secondary pulley.
• When pressure is applied to the metal diaphragm in the secondary pressure sensor, the metal diaphragm is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the secondary pressure from its voltage change. Volt-
age is increased along with pressure increase.
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010589217
• The primary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The primary pressure solenoid valve controls the primary reducing valve. For information about the primary
reducing valve, refer to TM-232, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
TM-222
COMPONENT PARTS
• The primary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve
[N/H (normal high) type]. A
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
B
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil
is not energized. C
JSDIA3647GB
TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010589218
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure solenoid valve controls the secondary reducing valve. For information about the E
secondary reducing valve, refer to TM-232, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid
valve [N/H (normal high) type]. F
NOTE:
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro- G
is not energized. H
JSDIA3647GB
I
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010589219
• The select solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The select solenoid valve adjusts the forward clutch engaging pressure and the reverse brake engaging J
pressure. For information about the forward clutch and reverse brake, refer to TM-232, "TRANSAXLE :
Component Description".
• The select solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (nor-
K
mal high) type].
NOTE:
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil L
• The N/H (normal high) type produces hydraulic control when the M
coil is not energized.
JSDIA3647GB
N
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010589220
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve. O

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the torque converter clutch control valve. For information
about the torque converter clutch control valve, refer to TM-232, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
P
TM-223
COMPONENT PARTS
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve utilizes a linear sole-
noid valve [N/L (normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized.
JSDIA3648GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010589221
• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The line pressure solenoid valve controls the pressure regulator valve. For information about the pressure
regulator valve, refer to TM-232, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The line pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/
H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
is not energized.
JSDIA3647GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000010589222
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position

select switch (upshift/downshift)] is installed in the CVT shift selec-
tor assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate
side or manual shift gate side) of the selector lever and transmits a
manual mode signal or a not manual mode signal to the combina-
tion meter. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-
manual mode signal from the combination meter.
• The position select switch (upshift) detects that the selector lever is
shifted to the upshift side of the manual shift gate and transmits a
manual mode upshift signal to the combination meter. Then, the JSDIA5308ZZ
TCM receives a manual mode upshift signal from the combination
meter.
• The position select switch (downshift) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the downshift side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode downshift signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode downshift signal from the combination meter.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator INFOID:0000000010589223
TCM transmits shift position signal to combination meter via CAN communication. The actual shift position is
displayed on combination meter according to the signal.
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-224
COMPONENT PARTS
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010589224
TM
JSDIA5309ZZ
J
CVT shift selector assembly Brake pedal, upper
K
Shift lock solenoid TM-226, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Solenoid"
Park position switch TM-225, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Park Position Switch"
L
Stop lamp switch TM-226, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch"
M
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Park Position Switch INFOID:0000000010589225
The park position switch detects that the selector lever is in “P” posi-
tion. N
JSDIA5310ZZ
TM-225
COMPONENT PARTS
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Solenoid INFOID:0000000010589226
The shift lock solenoid operates according to the signal from the stop
lamp switch and moves the lock lever. For shift lock operation, refer
to TM-234, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description".
JSDIA5311ZZ
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch INFOID:0000000010589227
• The stop lamp switch turns ON when the brake pedal is

depressed.
• When the stop lamp switch turns ON, shift lock solenoid is ener-
gized.
JSFIA1143ZZ
TM-226
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
A
TRANSAXLE
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000010589228
B
TM
JSDIA5169ZZ
N
Converter housing Oil pump Planetary gear

Control valve Oil pan Steel belt O
Primary pulley Secondary pulley Side cover
Transaxle case Differential case Final gear
P
Reduction gear Idler gear Output gear
Drive sprocket Torque converter Driven sprocket
Oil pump chain
2WD models 4WD models
TM-227
TRANSAXLE : Operation Status INFOID:0000000010589229
×: Engaged or applied.
Selector lever Parking mech- Forward Secondary
Reverse brake Primary pulley Steel belt Final drive
position anism clutch pulley
P ×
R × × × × ×
N
D × × × × ×
TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism INFOID:0000000010589230
TORQUE CONVERTER (WITH LOCK-UP FUNCTION)

In the same way as a conventional A/T, the torque converter is a system that increases the engine torque and
transmits the torque to the transaxle. A symmetrical 3-element, 1-stage, 2-phase type is used here.
OIL PUMP
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to increase
efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume in high-speed
zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of primary and second-
ary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
PLANETARY GEAR
• A planetary gear type of forward/reverse selector mechanism is installed between the torque converter and
primary pulley.
• The power from the torque converter is input via the input shaft, operating a wet multi-plate clutch by means
of hydraulic pressure to switch between forward and reverse driving.
Operation of Planetary gear
JSDIA2426GB
BELT & PULLEY

It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel belt
(the steel plates are placed continuously and the belt is guided with the multilayer steel rings on both sides).
TM-228
The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to overdrive
status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pulley. A
TM
K
JSDIA2428GB
Steel Belt
L
It is composed of multiple steel plates and two steel rings
stacked to a several number. The feature of this steel belt transmits
power with compression of the steel plate in contrast with transmis-
sion of power in pulling with a rubber belt. Friction force is required M
with the pulley slope to transmit power from the steel plate. The force
is generated with the following mechanism:
Oil pressure applies to the secondary pulley to nip the plate. ⇒The N
plate is pushed and extended outward. ⇒The steel ring shows with-
stands. ⇒Pulling force is generated on the steel ring. ⇒The plate of
the primary pulley is nipped between the pulley. ⇒Friction force is
generated between the steel belt and the pulley. O
JSDIA2431ZZ
Therefore, responsibilities are divided by the steel plate that trans-
mits the power with compression and the steel ring that maintains necessary friction force. In this way, the
tension of the steel ring is distributed on the entire surface and stress variation is limited, resulting in good P
durability.
Pulley
The primary pulley (input shaft side) and the secondary pulley (output shaft side) have the shaft with slope
(fixed cone surface), movable sheave (movable cone surface that can move in the axial direction) and oil pres-
sure chamber at the back of the movable sheave.
TM-229
The movable sheave slides on the shaft to change the groove width of the pulley. Input signals of engine load
(accelerator pedal opening), primary pulley speed and secondary pulley speed change the operation pres-
sures of the primary pulley and the secondary pulley, and controls the pulley groove width.
JSDIA2429GB
FINAL DRIVE AND DIFFERENTIAL

The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and sec-
ondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.
TM-230
The lubrication oil is the same as the CVT fluid which lubricates the entire transaxle.
A
TM
JSDIA2427GB F
TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System INFOID:0000000010589231
Oil pressure required for operation of the transaxle transmission mechanism is generated by oil pump, oil G
pressure control valve, solenoid valve, etc.
JSDIA3786GB
P
TM-231
TRANSAXLE : Component Description INFOID:0000000010589232
Part name Function

Torque converter Increases engine torque and transmits it to the transaxle.
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to
increase efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume
Oil pump
in high-speed zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of
primary and secondary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
The forward clutch is wet and multiple plate type clutch that consists of clutch drum, piston, drive plate,
Forward clutch and driven plate. It is a clutch to move the vehicle forward by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and directly connecting sun gear and input shaft.
The reverse brake is a wet multiple-plate type brake that consists of transaxle case, piston, drive plate,
Reverse brake and driven plate. It is a brake to move the vehicle in reverse by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and fixing planetary gear.
The internal gear is directly connected to forward clutch drum. It is a gear that moves the outer edge of
Internal gear pinion planet of planet carrier. It transmits power to move the vehicle in reverse when the planet carrier
is fixed.
Composed of a carrier, pinion planet, and pinion shaft. This gear fixes and releases the planet carrier in
Planet carrier
order to switch between forward and reverse driving.
Sun gear is a set part with planet carrier and internal gear. It transmits transmitted force to primary fixed
Sun gear sheave. It rotates in forward or reverse direction according to activation of either forward clutch or re-
verse brake.
The input shaft is directly connected to forward clutch drum and transmits traction force from torque con-
Input shaft verter. In shaft center, there are holes for hydraulic distribution to primary pulley and hydraulic distribution
for lockup ON/OFF.
Primary pulley It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel
belt. The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to
Secondary pulley
overdrive status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and
Steel belt secondary pulley.
Manual shaft
Parking rod When the manual shaft is in the P position, the parking rod that is linked to the manual shaft rotates the
parking pole. When the parking pole rotates, it engages with the parking gear, fixing the parking gear. As
Parking pawl a result, the secondary pulley that is integrated with the parking gear is fixed.
Parking gear
Output gear
Idler gear The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and
Reduction gear secondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.
Differential
Torque converter regulator Adjusts the feed pressure to the torque converter to the optimum pressure corresponding to the driving
valve condition.
Adjusts the discharge pressure from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) corresponding
Pressure regulator valve
to the driving condition.
Torque converter clutch
Adjusts the torque converter engage and disengage pressures.
control valve
Manual valve Distributes the clutch operation pressure to each circuit according to the selector lever position.
Secondary reducing valve Reduces line pressure and adjusts secondary pressure.
Primary reducing valve Reduces line pressure and adjusts primary pressure.
Reduces line pressure and adjusts pilot pressure to the solenoid valves listed below.
• Primary pressure solenoid valve
Pilot valve A • Secondary pressure solenoid valve
• Select solenoid valve
• Line pressure solenoid valve
Pilot valve B Reduces pilot pressure and adjusts pilot pressure to the torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM

TM-232
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010589233
A
CVT FLUID COOLER SCHEMATIC
TM
JSDIA5253GB F
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CVT Oil Warmer G
• The CVT oil warmer is installed on the front part of transaxle
assembly.
• When engine is started while engine and CVT are cold, engine H
coolant temperature rises more quickly than CVT fluid tempera-
ture. CVT oil warmer is provided with two circuits for CVT and
engine coolant respectively so that warmed engine coolant warms
CVT quickly. This helps shorten CVT warming up time, improving I
fuel economy.
• A cooling effect is obtained when CVT fluid temperature is high.
J
JSDIA5059ZZ
Heater Thermostat
• The heater thermostat is installed on the front part of transaxle K
assembly.
• The heater thermostat open and close with set temperature.
L
JSDIA5254ZZ
N
CVT Fluid Cooler

• The CVT fluid cooler is installed to the vehicle front.
• CVT fluid is cooled by driving blast while driving the vehicle. O
JSDIA5255ZZ
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

TM-233
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010661300
• The shift lock system prevents the select lever from being moved from “P” position to other positions due to
a driver's improper operation and prevents the occurrence of an abrupt start.
• Shift lock can be released when the following conditions are satisfied.
- Ignition switch is ON.
- Brake pedal is depressed. (Stop lamp switch is ON)
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT P POSITION
When brake pedal is not depressed (no selector operation allowed)
When the brake pedal is not depressed with the ignition switch ON,
the shift lock solenoid is OFF (not energized) and the solenoid rod
is extended with spring.
The connecting lock lever is located at the position shown in the
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod . The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P”
position for this reason.
JSDIA2817ZZ
When brake pedal is depressed (selector lever operation allowed)

The shift lock solenoid is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod
is compressed with the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever rotates when the solenoid rod is compressed. Therefore, the
detent rod can be moved. The selector lever can be shifted to
other positions for this reason.
JSDIA2818ZZ
FORCIBLE RELEASE OF SHIFT LOCK

• When battery voltage decreases or an electrical/mechanical mal-
function occurs in the shift lock system, the selector lever cannot
be operated in “P” position. When shift lock release rod is
pressed in this state, lock lever is forcibly rotated, and then it
becomes possible to release shift lock.
: Shift lock solenoid

: Detent rod
JSDIA2819ZZ
• To release the shift lock forcibly and shift the selector lever from “P” position to other positions, follow the
steps below.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply parking brake.
TM-234
3. Press the shift lock release button with suitable tool.
4. Press and hold the selector lever knob button and move the A
selector lever from “P” position to other positions while press the
shift lock release button.
B
JSDIA5409ZZ
KEY LOCK SYSTEM TM
KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010928186
E
KEY LOCK MECHANISM
The key is not set to LOCK when the selector lever is not selected to P position. This prevents the key from
being removed from the key cylinder. F
Key lock status
The slider in the key cylinder is moved to the left side of the fig-
ure when the selector lever is in any position other than P position. G
The rotator that rotates together with the key cannot be rotated
for this reason. The key cannot be removed from the key cylinder
because it cannot be turned to LOCK . H
JPDIA0108ZZ
Key unlock status J

The slider in the key cylinder is moved to the right side of the
figure when the selector lever is in P position and the finger is
removed from the selector button. The rotator can be rotated for K
this reason. The key can be removed from the key cylinder
because it can be turned to LOCK .
L
M
JPDIA0109ZZ
TM-235
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010589235
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5257GB
MAIN CONTROL CONTENTS OF TCM
Controls Reference
Line pressure control TM-241, "LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description"
Shift control TM-242, "SHIFT CONTROL : System Description"
Select control TM-245, "SELECT CONTROL : System Description"
Lock-up control TM-246, "LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description"
ECO mode control* TM-246, "ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description"
Fail-safe TM-263, "Fail-safe"
Self-diagnosis function TM-251, "CONSULT Function"
Communication function with CONSULT TM-251, "CONSULT Function"
*: With ECO mode switch
LIST OF CONTROL ITEMS AND INPUT/OUTPUT
TM-236
SYSTEM
Line pressure Lock-up con- Fail-safe func- A

Control Item Shift control Select control
control trol tion*
Engine torque signal
× × × × ×
(CAN communication)
B
Engine speed signal
× × × × ×
(CAN communication)
Accelerator pedal position signal C
× × × ×
(CAN communication)
Closed throttle position signal
× × ×
(CAN communication)
TM
Stop lamp switch signal
× × × ×
(CAN communication)
Primary pressure sensor ×
E
Input Secondary pressure sensor × × ×
CVT fluid temperature sensor × × × × ×
Primary speed sensor × × × × × F
Output speed sensor × × × ×
Input speed sensor × × × × ×
G
Transmission range switch × × × × ×
Manual mode switch signal
(Manual mode signal, non-manual
H
mode signal, manual mode upshift
× × ×
signal, manual mode downshift sig-
nal)
(CAN communication) I
Line pressure solenoid valve × × × ×
Primary pressure solenoid valve × × ×
Torque converter clutch solenoid J
× ×
valve
Output
Secondary pressure solenoid valve × × ×
K
Select solenoid valve × ×
Shift position indicator
×
(CAN communication)
L
*: If these input/output signals show errors, TCM activates the fail-safe function.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010661335
M
TCM has a fail-safe mode. The mode functions so that operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
If the vehicle shows following behaviors including “poor acceleration”, a malfunction of the applicable system
N
is detected by TCM and the vehicle may be in a fail-safe mode. At this time, check the DTC code and perform
inspection and repair according to the malfunction diagnosis procedures.
Fail-safe function O
DTC Vehicle behavior Conditions of vehicle

P062F Not changed from normal driving — P
• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not dis-
played
• Selector shock is large
P0705 —
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow
• Lock-up is not performed
TM-237
SYSTEM
played
P0706 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow Engine coolant temperature when engine start:
• Acceleration is slow Temp. ≥ 10°C (50°F)
Engine coolant temperature when engine start:
• Start is slow
P0712 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
Engine coolant temperature when engine star:
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Start is slow
P0713 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Start is slow
P0715 —
• Manual mode is not activated
• Start is slow
P0717 • Acceleration is slow —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0746 —
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P0776 • Vehicle speed is not increased
• Start is slow
When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
• Start is slow
P0778 —
TM-238
SYSTEM
A
• Start is slow
P0779 —
• Lock-up is not performed B
P0826 Manual mode is not activated —
P0841 Not changed from normal driving —
P0847 Not changed from normal driving — C
P084C Not changed from normal driving —
TM
P084D Not changed from normal driving —
• Start is slow E
P0863 —
• Start is slow F
• Vehicle speed is not increased
G
• Start is slow
P0962 —
• Lock-up is not performed H
• Start is slow
P0963 —
• Acceleration is slow I
• Start is slow J
When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P0965 • Lock-up is not performed
When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side K
• Start is slow
P0966 — L
• Start is slow M
P0967 —
• Start is slow
N
P2765 —
• Selector shock is large O
• Start is slow
P2813 • Acceleration is slow
P
Selector shock is large When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
P2814 Selector shock is large —
• Start is slow
U0073 —
TM-239
SYSTEM
• Start is slow
U0100 —
U0102 Not changed from normal driving —
• Start is slow
U0300 —
U110F Not changed from normal driving —
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000010661336
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
CONTROL FOR WHEEL SPIN
When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased.
Control
Limits engine output when a wheel spin occurs in any of right and left drive wheels.
Vehicle behavior in If the accelerator is kept depressing during wheel spin, the engine revolution and vehicle speed are limited to
control a certain degree.
Normal return condi-
Wheel spin convergence returns the control to the normal control.
tion
TORQUE IS REDUCED WHEN DRIVING WITH THE REVERSE GEAR
Control Engine output is controlled according to a vehicle speed while reversing the vehicle.
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered while reversing the vehicle.
control
Torque returns to normal by positioning the selector lever in a range other than “R” position.
tion
CONTROL WHEN FLUID TEMPERATURE IS HIGH
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the gear shift permission maximum revolution and the maximum
Control
torque are reduced than usual to prevent increase of the oil temperature.
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered, compared to normal control.
control
The control returns to the normal control when CVT fluid temperature is lowered.
tion
REVERSE PROHIBIT CONTROL
The reverse brake is controlled to avoid becoming engaged when the selector lever is set in “R” position while
Control
driving in forward direction at more than the specified speed.
TM-240
SYSTEM
Vehicle behavior in If the selector lever is put at “R” position when driving with the forward gear, the gear becomes neutral, not
control reverse. A
Normal return condi- The control returns to normal control when the vehicle is driven at low speeds. (The reverse brake becomes
tion engaged.)
B
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010589238
C
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TM
JSDIA5312GB L
DESCRIPTION
Highly accurate line pressure control and secondary pressure control reduces friction for improvement of fuel
economy. M
Normal Oil Pressure Control
Appropriate line pressure and secondary pressure suitable for driving condition are determined based on the
accelerator pedal position, engine speed, primary pulley (input) speed, secondary pulley (output) speed, vehi- N
cle speed, input torque, stop lamp switch signal, transmission range switch signal, lock-up signal, power volt-
age, target shift ratio, oil temperature, oil pressure, and manual mode switch signal.
Secondary Pressure Feedback Control O
In normal oil pressure control and oil pressure control in shifting, highly accurate secondary pressure is deter-
mined by detecting the secondary pressure using an oil pressure sensor and by feedback control.
SHIFT CONTROL P
TM-241
SYSTEM
SHIFT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010589239
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5313GB
DESCRIPTION
To select the gear ratio that can give the driving force to meet driver's intent or vehicle situation, the vehicle
driving condition such as vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position is detected and the most appropriate
gear ratio is selected and the shifting method before reaching the speed is determined. The information is out-
put to the primary pressure solenoid valve and secondary pressure solenoid valve to control the line pressure
input/output to the pulley, to determine the pulley (movable pulley) position and to control the gear position.
Shift Position Function
• D Position (Normal)
TM-242
SYSTEM
Gear shifting is performed in all shifting ranges from the lowest to
the highest gear ratio. A
SCIA1953E
TM
• M Position (Manual Mode)
When the selector lever is put in the manual shift gate side, the
fixed changing gear line is set. By moving the selector lever to + E
side or - side, the manual mode switch is changed over, and shift
change like M/T becomes possible following the changing gear set
line step by step.
F
JSDIA4104GB
H
- Manual Mode Information
The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the combination meter if the TCM refuses the
transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever shifts to UP side (+ side) or DOWN I
side (−side). The combination meter blinks shift indicator on the combination meter and sounds the buzzer to
indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the TCM does not
transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following.
J
• When the selector lever shifts to DOWN side (− side) while driving in M1.
• When the selector lever shifts to UP (+ side) side while driving in M7.
Blipping Control
K
Using engine torque, the blipping control enables a faster and more responsive gear shifting by compensating
inertia torque generated from the rotational change during gear shifting in real time.
Operation L
• The blipping control is activated when shifting up/down in manual mode or when shifting up/down in “Ds”
position.
NOTE:
The blipping control is not activated when the vehicle is in the following conditions: M
• When CAN communication is abnormal.
• During the retard inhibit signal transmission from ECM within the engine-CVT integrated control.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 20°C (68°F). N
• CVT fluid temperature is more than 120°C (248°F).
• Vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h (13 MPH).
• When ABS, TCS or VDC is active.
• During wheel spin. O
• ECM selects blipping control or normal shift control according to the gear position, the selector lever posi-
tion, etc.
• The blipping control is activated when ECM judges it controllable after receiving a control permit signal from P
TCM.
TM-243
SYSTEM
• ECM controls engine torque, based on generated inertia torque.
JSDIA2841GB
Hill Climbing And Descending Control

If a downhill is detected with the accelerator pedal is released, the system performs downshift to increase the
engine brake force so that vehicle may not be accelerated more than necessary. If a climbing hill is detected,
the system improves the acceleration performance in re-acceleration by limiting the gear shift range on the
high side.
NOTE:
For engine brake control on a downhill, the control can be stopped with CONSULT.
JSDIA2060GB
Control In Acceleration
From change of the vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position, the acceleration request level of the driver or
driving scene is evaluated. In start or acceleration during driving, the gear shift characteristics with linearity of
revolution increase and vehicle speed increase are gained to improve the acceleration feel.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed 4/8 or more in D position, CVT performs step shifting to allow the
vehicle speed and engine speed to increase simultaneously. This improves the feel of acceleration and
enables the fuel economy by preventing unnecessary rise in engine speed, compared to the conventional
shifting.
TM-244
SYSTEM
TM
E
JSDIA5273GB
SELECT CONTROL
F
SELECT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010589240
SYSTEM DIAGRAM G
JSDIA3711GB
O
DESCRIPTION
Based on accelerator pedal angle, engine speed, primary pulley speed, and the input speed, the optimum
operating pressure is set to reduce impact of a selector lever operation while shifting from “N” (“P”) to “D” (“R”)
position. P
LOCK-UP CONTROL
TM-245
SYSTEM
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010589241
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5314GB
DESCRIPTION
• Controls for improvement of the transmission efficiency by engaging the torque converter clutch in the
torque converter and eliminating slip of the converter. Achieves comfortable driving with slip control of the
torque converter clutch.
• The oil pressure feed circuit for the torque converter clutch piston chamber is connected to the torque con-
verter clutch control valve. The torque converter clutch control valve is switched by the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve with the signal from TCM. This controls the oil pressure circuit, which is supplied to the
torque converter clutch piston chamber, to the release side or engagement side.
• If the CVT fluid temperature is low or the vehicle is in fail-safe mode due to malfunction, lock-up control is
prohibited.
Lock-up engagement
In lock-up engagement, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control
valve locked up to generate the lock-up apply pressure. This pushes the torque converter clutch piston for
engagement.
Lock-up release condition
In lock-up release, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control valve
non-locked up to drain the lock-up apply pressure. This does not engage the torque converter clutch piston.
ECO MODE CONTROL
ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010589242
• Driving mode that selects the shift schedule with priority on fuel economy which gives low engine revolution.
• For details on ECO mode control, refer to DMS-6, "ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description".
• The gear shift line is not changed with the control mode change for the following conditions:
- When the selector lever is in “M” position.
FAIL-SAFE
TM-246
SYSTEM
If a malfunction occurs in the system of CVT during ECO mode, the ECO mode indicator turns OFF and the
control switches to the normal mode control. A
TM
TM-247
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Description INFOID:0000000010589243
This system is an on board diagnostic system that records exhaust emission-related diagnostic information
and detects a sensors/actuator-related malfunction. A malfunction is indicated by the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) and stored in ECU memory as a DTC. The diagnostic information can be obtained with the diag-
nostic tool (GST: Generic Scan Tool).
GST (Generic Scan Tool) INFOID:0000000010589244
When GST is connected with a data link connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the
control module equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to GI-49,
"Description".
NOTE:
Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.
TM-248
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Diagnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagno-
B
sis INFOID:0000000010589245
NOTE:
“Start the engine and turn OFF the ignition switch after warm-up.” This is defined as 1 trip. C
1 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS
When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC. In these diagnoses, some illuminate MIL and
some do not. Refer to TM-267, "DTC Index". TM

When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage. <1 E
trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again in next driving, TCM memorizes DTC. When DTC is memorized, MIL
lights. <2 trip>
“Trip” of the “2 trip detection diagnosis” indicates the driving mode that executes self-diagnosis during driving. F
×: Check possible —: Check not possible
DTC at the 1st trip DTC MIL

Item Display at the Display at the Display at the Display at the Illumination at Illumination at
G
1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip the 1st trip the 2nd trip
1 trip detection diagnosis
— — × — × — H
(Refer to TM-267, "DTC Index")
× — — × — ×
I
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of 1st Trip INFOID:0000000010589246
2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL J

• The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
• When a malfunction is detected at the 1st trip, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this
stage. If the same malfunction is not detected at the 2nd trip (conforming to necessary driving conditions),
DTC at the 1st trip is erased from TCM. If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes K
DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• The DTC of the 1st trip is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. Since detection of DTC at the
1st trip does not illuminate MIL, warning for a problem is not given to a driver. L
• For procedure to delete DTC and 1st trip DTC from TCM, refer to TM-251, "CONSULT Function".
• If DTC of the 1st trip is detected, it is necessary to check the cause according to the “Diagnosis flow”. Refer
to TM-277, "Work Flow".
M
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000010589247
• TCM not only detects DTC, but also sends the MIL signal to ECM through CAN communication. ECM sends N
the MIL signal to the combination meter through CAN communication according to the signal, and illumi-
nates MIL.
• For malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) description, refer to ECM-62, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunc-
tion Indicator Lamp (MIL)". O
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System INFOID:0000000010589248
P
RELATION BETWEEN DTC AT 1ST TRIP/DTC/MIL AND DRIVING CONDITIONS (FOR 2 TRIP DE-
TECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL)
• When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage.
• If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• Then, MIL goes after driving the vehicle for 3 trips under “Driving condition B” without malfunction.
• DTC is displayed until 40 trips of “Driving condition A” are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction.
DTC is erased when 40 trips are satisfied.
TM-249
• When the self-diagnosis result is acceptable at the 2nd trip (conforming to driving condition B), DTC of the
1st trip is erased.
COUNTER SYSTEM LIST
Item Driving condition Trip

MIL (OFF) B 3
DTC (clear) A 40
DTC at 1st trip (clear) B 1
DRIVING CONDITION
Driving condition A
Driving condition A is the driving condition that provides warm-up.
In specific, count-up is performed when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
• After start of the engine, the water temperature increased by 20°C (36°F) or more.
• Water temperature was 70°C (158°F) or more.
• The ignition switch was changed from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the A counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the A counter.
• When MIL goes off due to the malfunction and the A counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased.
Driving condition B
Driving condition B is the driving condition that performs all diagnoses once.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (43 – 75 MPH) continued for 60 seconds or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less and idle determination ON continued for 12
seconds or more.
• After start of the engine, 22 minutes or more have passed.
• The condition that the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more continued for 10 seconds or more in total.
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the B counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the B counter.
• When the B counter reaches 3 without malfunction, MIL goes off.
• When the B counter is counted once without detecting the same malfunction after TCM memorizes DTC of
the 1st trip, DTC of the 1st trip is erased.
TM-250
TIME CHART
A
TM
N
JSDIA1868GB
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010589249

O
APPLICABLE ITEM
P
Conditions Function
Work Support The settings for ECU functions can be changed.
Self Diagnostic Results The ECU self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The ECU input/output data is displayed in real time.
ECU Identification The ECU part number is displayed.
CALIB DATA The calibration data status of TCM can be checked.
TM-251
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Refer to TM-267, "DTC Index".
DTC at 1st trip and method to read DTC
• DTC (P0705, P0712, P0715, etc.) is specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
• DTC and DTC at 1st trip are displayed on “Self Diagnostic results” of CONSULT.
When DTC is currently detected, “CRNT” is displayed. If “PAST” is displayed, it shows a malfunction
occurred in the past. The trip number of drive without malfunction of concerned DTC can be confirmed with
“IGN counter” inside “FFD”.
• When the DTC at the 1st trip is detected, “1t” is displayed.
DTC deletion method
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left ON after repair, turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 10 seconds or more. Then,
turn the ignition ON again. (Engine stop)
1. Touch “TRANSMISSION” of CONSULT.
2. Touch “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Touch “Erase”. (DTC memorized in TCM is erased.)
IGN counter
The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD” and the number of times of satisfied “Driving condition A” is dis-
played after normal recovery of DTC. Refer to TM-249, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System".
• If malfunction (DTC) is currently detected, “0” is displayed.
• After normal recovery, every time “Driving condition A” is satisfied, the display value increases from 1 → 2 →
3...38 → 39.
• When MIL turns OFF due to the malfunction and the counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased.
NOTE:
The counter display of “40” cannot be checked.
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
Monitored item (Unit) Remarks

VSP SENSOR (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed calculated from the CVT output shaft speed.
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed signal (ABS) received through CAN communication.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (rpm) Displays the input speed calculated from the pulse signal of the input speed sensor.
Displays the primary pulley speed calculated from the pulse signal of the primary
PRI SPEED SEN (rpm)
speed sensor.
Displays the secondary pulley speed calculated from the pulse signal of the output
SEC REV SENSOR (rpm)
speed sensor.
ENG SPEED SIG (rpm) Displays the engine speed received through CAN communication.
SEC PRESSURE SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the secondary pressure sensor.
PRI PRESSURE SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the primary pressure sensor.
ATF TEMP SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the CVT fluid temperature sensor.
G SENSOR (G) Displays the decel G signal received through CAN communication.
VIGN SEN (V) Displays the battery voltage applied to TCM.
PVING VOLT (V) Displays the backup voltage of TCM.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed recognized by TCM.
INPUT REV (rpm) Displays the input shaft speed of CVT recognized by TCM.
PRI SPEED (rpm) Displays the primary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
SEC SPEED (rpm) Displays the secondary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
ENG SPEED (rpm) Displays the engine speed recognized by TCM.
Displays the speed difference between the input shaft speed of CVT and the engine
SLIP REV (rpm)
speed.
TM-252
A
Displays the pulley gear ratio calculated from primary pulley speed/secondary pulley
PULLEY GEAR RATIO
speed.
Displays the acceleration and deceleration speed of the vehicle calculated from ve-
G SPEED (G) B
hicle speed change.
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 (deg) Displays the estimated throttle position received through CAN communication.
VENG TRQ (Nm) Display the engine torque recognized by TCM.
C
PRI TRQ (Nm) Display the input shaft torque of CVT.
TRQ RTO Display the torque ratio of torque converter.
Displays the secondary pressure calculated from the signal voltage of the secondary TM
SEC PRESSURE (MPa)
pressure sensor.
Displays the primary pressure calculated from the signal voltage of the primary pres-
PRI PRESSURE (MPa)
sure sensor. E
Displays the CVT fluid temperature calculated from the signal voltage of the CVT flu-
FLUID TEMP (°C or °F)
id temperature sensor.
Displays the target primary pulley speed calculated from processing of gear shift F
DSR REV (rpm)
control.
TGT PLLY GR RATIO Displays the target gear ratio of the pulley from processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve calcu- G
LU PRS (MPa)
lated from oil pressure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the line pressure solenoid valve calculated from
LINE PRS (MPa)
oil pressure processing of gear shift control. H
Displays the target oil pressure of the primary pressure solenoid valve calculated
TRGT PRI PRESSURE (MPa)
from oil pressure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the select solenoid valve calculated from oil pres- I
TRGT SELECT PRESSURE (MPa)
sure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the secondary pressure solenoid valve calculated
TRGT SEC PRESSURE (MPa)
from oil pressure processing of gear shift control. J
Displays the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid
ISOLT1 (A)
valve.
ISOLT2 (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid valve. K
PRI SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the primary pressure solenoid valve.
SEC SOLENOID CURRENT (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the secondary pressure solenoid valve.
SELECT SOLENOID CUR-
L
(A) Displays the command current from TCM to the select solenoid valve.
RENT
Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid
SOLMON1 (A) M
valve and displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid valve and
SOLMON2 (A)
displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the primary pressure solenoid valve N
PRI SOL MON (A)
and displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the secondary pressure solenoid valve
SEC SOL MON CURRENT (A)
and displays the monitored value. O
Monitors the command current from TCM to the select solenoid valve and displays
SELECT SOL MON CURRENT (A)
the monitored value.
D POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (D position). P
N POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (N position).
R POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (R position).
P POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (P position).
L POSITION SW* (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (L position).
DS RANGE SW* (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (Ds position).
TM-253
Displays the reception status of the stop lamp switch signal received through CAN
BRAKESW (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the closed throttle position signal received through
IDLE SW (On/Off)
CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of the sport mode switch signal received through CAN
SPORT MODE SW* (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ECO mode switch signal received through CAN
ECO MODE SW (On/Off)
communication.
STRDWNSW* (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (down switch).
STRUPSW* (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (up switch).
DOWNLVR (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the selector lever (down switch).
UPLVR (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the selector lever (up switch).
NONMMODE (On/Off) Displays if the selector lever position is not at the manual shift gate.
MMODE (On/Off) Displays if the selector lever position is at the manual shift gate.
Displays the reception status of the TOW mode switch signal received through CAN
TOW MODE SW* (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the transaxle value of shift position signal transmitted via CAN communi-
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
cation.
Displays the transaxle status of the CVT warning lamp signal transmitted through
CVT LAMP* (On/Off)
CAN communication.
Displays the transaxle status of the SPORT indicator lamp signal transmitted
SPORT MODE IND* (On/Off)
through CAN communication.
Displays the transaxle status of the manual mode signal transmitted through CAN
MANU MODE SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the shift position signal status from transmission range switch (Ds posi-
DS RANGE SIGNAL* (On/Off)
tion).
Displays the transaxle status of the ECO mode signal transmitted through CAN
ECO MODE SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the VDC operation signal received through CAN
VDC ON (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the TCS operation signal received through CAN
TCS ON (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ABS malfunction signal received through CAN
ABS FAIL SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ABS operation signal received through CAN
ABS ON (On/Off)
communication.
RANGE Displays the gear position recognized by TCM.
M GEAR POS Display the target gear of manual mode
G SEN SLOPE* (%) Displays the gradient angle calculated from the G sensor signal voltage.
G SEN CALIBRATION* (YET/DONE) Displays the status of “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support”.
N IDLE STATUS* (On/Off) Displays idle neutral status.
ENGBRKLVL (On/Off) Displays the setting of “ENGINE BRAKE ADJ” in “Work Support”.
DRIVE MODE STATS* Displays the drive mode status recognized by TCM.
SNOW MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the SNOW mode.
ECO MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the ECO mode.
NORMAL MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the NORMAL mode.
SPORT MODE* (On/Off) Displays whether it is the SPORT mode.
(INCOMP/
AIR BLDING STATE* Displays the status of “ELECTRIC O.P. AIR BLEEDING” in “Work Support”.
COMP)
TM-254
A
Displays the command signal value (duty) of the electric oil pump transmitted from
ELECTRIC OP DUTY* (%)
TCM.
Monitors the status signal value (duty) transmitted from the electric oil pump and dis-
E-OP DUTY MON* (%) B
plays the monitored value.
ELECTRIC OP RELAY* (On/Off) Displays the command status from TCM to the electric oil pump relay.
Monitors the command status from TCM to the oil pump relay and displays the mon-
E-OP RELAY MON* (On/Off) C
itored value.
• Displays CVT fluid temperature count.
CVT-B
• This monitor item does not use.
TM
CVT-A
G SENSOR* (V) Displays the signal voltage of the G sensor.
E
*: Not applicable but displayed.
WORK SUPPORT
F
Item name Description
CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN Checks the degradation level of the CVT fluid under severe conditions.
G SENSOR CALIBRATION* Compensates the G sensor. G
ERASE LEARNING VALUE Erases learning value memorized by TCM.
Although there is no malfunction on the transaxle and the CVT system, if a cus- H
tomer make a complaint like “I do not feel comfortable with automatic operation of
ENGINE BRAKE ADJ.
the engine brake on downhill”, the engine brake may be cancelled with “engine
brake adjustment”.
WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT Writes IP characteristics when transaxle assembly is replaced. I
READ IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM Reads IP characteristics when TCM is replaced.
WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM Writes IP characteristics when TCM is replaced.
J
*: This item does not use.
Engine brake adjustment
K
ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL
ON : Turn ON the engine brake control.
OFF : Turn OFF the engine brake control. L
Check the degradation level of the CVT fluid.
CVTF degradation level data M

210,000 or more : Replacement of the CVT fluid is required.
Less than 210,000 : Replacement of the CVT fluid is not required.
N
TM-255
TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010589250
CONSULT DATA MONITOR STANDARD VALUE

• In CONSULT, electric shift timing or lock-up timing, i.e. operation timing of each solenoid valve, is displayed.
Therefore, if there is an obvious difference between the shift timing estimated from a shift shock (or engine
speed variations) and that shown on the CONSULT, the mechanism parts (including the hydraulic circuit)
excluding the solenoids and sensors may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the mechanical parts follow-
ing the appropriate diagnosis procedure.
• Shift point (gear position) displayed on CONSULT slightly differs from shift pattern described in Service Man-
ual. This is due to the following reasons.
- Actual shift pattern may vary slightly within specified tolerances.
- While shift pattern described in Service Manual indicates start of each shift, CONSULT shows gear position
at end of shift.
- The solenoid display (ON/OFF) on CONSULT is changed at the start of gear shifting. In contrast, the gear
position display is changed at the time when gear shifting calculated in the control unit is completed.
NOTE:
Monitor item Condition Value/Status (Approx.)

VSP SENSOR While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
ESTM VSP SIG While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
PRI SPEED SEN In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
SEC REV SENSOR While driving VSP SENSOR × 50
ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer
• After engine warm up
SEC PRESSURE SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 1.23 – 1.25 V
• At idle
PRI PRESSURE SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 0.75 – 0.82 V
• At idle
CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C (68°F) 2.01 – 2.05 V
ATF TEMP SEN CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C (122°F) 1.45 – 1.50 V
• Vehicle stopped
0G
• Vehicle is level
The value changes to the positive side
G SENSOR During acceleration
along with acceleration.
During deceleration
along with deceleration.
VIGN SEN Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
PVIGN VOLT Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
VEHICLE SPEED While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
INPUT REV In driving (lock-up ON) Almost same as the engine speed.
PRI SPEED In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
SEC SPEED While driving VSP SENSOR × 50
ENG SPEED Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer
SLIP REV While driving Engine speed − Input speed
TM-256
TCM
A
In driving (forward) 2.70 − 0.38
PULLEY GEAR RATIO
In driving (reverse) 2.70
Vehicle stopped 0.00 G B
During acceleration
G SPEED along with acceleration.
The value changes to the positive side C
During deceleration
Accelerator pedal released 0.00 deg
ACCEL POSI SEN 1
Accelerator pedal fully depressed 80.00 deg TM
The value changes along with acceleration/
VENG TRQ While driving
deceleration.
The value changes along with acceleration/ E
PRI TRQ While driving
deceleration.
TRQ RTO While driving
deceleration. F
SEC PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.1 MPa
• At idle
G
PRI PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 0.4 – 0.45 MPa
• At idle
H
FLUID TEMP Ignition switch ON. Displays the CVT fluid temperature.
DSR REV While driving It varies along with the driving condition.
In driving (forward) 2.70 − 0.38 I
TGT PLLY GR RATIO
• Engine started
−0.500 MPa J
• Vehicle is stopped.
LU PRS • Selector lever: “D” position

• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
0.450 MPa
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or K
more
LINE PRS • Selector lever: “N” position 1.1 MPa
L
• At idle
TRGT PRI PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 0.4 – 0.45 MPa
• At idle M
• Selector lever: “N” position 0 MPa
TARGET SELECT PRESSURE • At idle N
• Selector lever: “D” position
0.3 – 0.5 MPa
• At idle
• After engine warm up O
TARGET SEC PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.1 MPa
• At idle
ISOLT1* — — P
ISOLT2 * — —
PRI SOLENOID* — —
SEC SOLENOID CURRENT* — —
SELECT SOLENOID CURRENT* — —
SOLMON1* — —
TM-257
TCM
SOLMON2* — —
PRI SOL MON* — —
SEC SOL MON CURRENT* — —
SELECT SOL MON CURRENT* — —
Selector lever: “D” position On
D POSITION SW
Other than the above Off
Selector lever: “N” position On
N POSITION SW
Selector lever: “R” position On
R POSITION SW
Selector lever: “P” position On
P POSITION SW
L POSITION SW Always Off
DS RANGE SW Always Off
Brake pedal is depressed On
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is released Off
Accelerator pedal is released On
IDLE SW
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed Off
SPORT MODE SW Always Off
Press the ECO mode switch On
ECO MODE SW
STRDWNSW Always Off
STRUPSW Always Off
Selector lever: −side On
DOWNLVR
Selector lever: +side On
UPLVR
Manual shift gate position (neutral, +side, −
Off
NONMMODE side)
Other than the above On
Manual shift gate position (neutral, +side, −
On
MMODE side)
TOW MODE SW Always Off
TM-258
TCM
A
When the selector lever is positioned in be-
OFF
tween each position.
Selector lever: “P” position P
B
Selector lever: “R” position R
Selector lever: “N” position N
Selector lever: “D” position D C
SHIFT IND SIGNAL Manual mode: 1st M1
Manual mode: 2nd M2
TM
Manual mode: 3rd M3
Manual mode: 4th M4
Manual mode: 5th M5 E
Manual mode: 6th M6
Manual mode: 7th M7
Approx. 2 seconds after ignition switch ON On F
CVT LAMP
SPORT MODE IND Always Off
G
Driving with manual mode On
MANU MODE SIGNAL
DS RANGE SIGNAL Always Off H
ECO MODE SIGNAL Always Off
When VDC malfunction signal is received On
VDC ON I
When TCS malfunction signal is received On
TCS ON
Other than the above Off J
When ABS malfunction signal is received On
ABS FAIL SIGNAL
K
ABS is activated On
ABS ON
Selector lever: “P” and “N” positions N/P L
Selector lever: “R position R
RANGE
Selector lever: “D” position
D M
Selector lever: “M” position
M GEAR POS Manual mode: 1st – 7th 1 to 7
G SEN SLOPE Always 0%
N
When G sensor calibration is completed DONE
G SEN CALIBRATION
When G sensor calibration is not completed YET
N IDLE STATUS Always Off O
When the engine brake level of “ENGINE
On
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is ON
ENGBRKLVL
When the engine brake level of “ENGINE P
Off
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is OFF
While driving in ECO mode ECO
DRIVE MODE STATS
Other than the above NORMAL
SNOW MODE Always Off
ECO MODE Always Off
TM-259
TCM
NORMAL MODE Always Off
SPORT MODE Always Off
AIR BLDING STATE Always INCOMP
ELECTRIC OP DUTY Always 0%
E-OP DUTY MON Always 0%
ELECTRIC OP RELAY Always Off
E-OP RELAY MON Always Off
CVT-B* — —
CVT-A* — —
G SENSOR Always 0V
*: These monitor items do not use.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSDIA2713ZZ
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARD
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
+ − Signal
Output
2*
— — — — —
(SB)
4 Selector lever: “D” position 10 − 16 V

Ground D range switch Input
(Y) Other than the above 0V
5 Selector lever: “N” position 10 − 16 V

Ground N range switch Input
(R) Ignition Other than the above 0V
switch
6 ON Selector lever: “R” position 10 − 16 V
Ground R range switch Input
(G) Other than the above 0V
7 Selector lever: “P” position 10 − 16 V

Ground P range switch Input
(V) Other than the above 0V
11
Ground Sensor ground — Always 0V
(LG)
CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C
2.01 – 2.05 V
(68°F)
Ignition
12 CVT fluid tempera- CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C
Ground Output switch 1.45 – 1.50 V
(BR) ture sensor (122°F)
ON
0.90 – 0.94 V
176°F)
16 Secondary pres-
Ground Input • Selector lever: “N” position 1.23 – 1.25 V
(L) sure sensor
• At idle
TM-260
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
+ − Signal
Output
• After engine warm up B
17 Primary pressure
Ground Input • Selector lever: “N” position 0.75 – 0.82 V
(P) sensor
• At idle
23 Input/ C
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
880 Hz
TM
24 • Shift position: “M1” position
Ground Input speed sensor Input
(LG) • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
E
JSDIA3769GB
26 Sensor power sup- Ignition switch: ON 5.0 V F

Ground Output
(BG) ply Ignition switch: OFF 0V
• After engine warming up

• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle H
JSDIA1897GB
30 Line pressure sole-
(GR)
Ground
noid valve
Output I
• After engine warming up J

• Depress the accelerator pedal fully
K
JSDIA1898GB
33 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
L
200 Hz
34 Output speed sen- • Shift position: “M1” position M

Ground Input
(W) sor • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
N
JSDIA1904GB
700 Hz
O
35 Primary speed sen- • Shift position: “M1” position
Ground Input
(R) sor • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
P
JSDIA1905GB
TM-261
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
+ − Signal
Output
• Engine started
37 Select solenoid
Ground Output • Vehicle is stopped
(SB) valve
JSDIA1897GB

• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or
less
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or
more
Torque converter
38 JSDIA1900GB
Ground clutch solenoid Output
(G)
valve
• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped
JSDIA1903GB
39 Secondary pres- • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Output
(Y) sure solenoid valve • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1897GB
40 Primary pressure • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Output
(V) solenoid valve • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1897GB
41
Ground Ground — Always 0V
(B)
42
Ground Ground — Always 0V
(B)
Battery power sup-
45
Ground ply (Memory back- Input Always 10 − 16 V
(V)
up)
Battery power sup-
46
(V)
up)
47 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch: ON 10 − 16 V

Ground Input
(BR) ply Ignition switch: OFF 0V
TM-262
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
+ − Signal
Output
48 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch: ON 10 − 16 V B

Ground Input
*: This harness does not use.
C
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010589251
TCM has a fail-safe mode. The mode functions so that operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of TM
inspection and repair according to the malfunction diagnosis procedures. E
Fail-safe function
F
P062F Not changed from normal driving —
• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not dis- G
played
P0705 —
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow H
played I
P0706 —
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed J
• Selector shock is large K
• Start is slow
P0712 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
Engine coolant temperature when engine star: L
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
M
• Start is slow
P0713 −35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F) N
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Acceleration is slow O
• Start is slow
P0715 —
P
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
TM-263
TCM
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0746 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0778 —
• Start is slow
P0779 —
P0826 Manual mode is not activated —
P084C Not changed from normal driving —
P084D Not changed from normal driving —
• Start is slow
P0863 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0962 —
• Start is slow
P0963 —
• Start is slow
P0965 • Lock-up is not performed
TM-264
TCM
A
• Start is slow
P0966 —
• Lock-up is not performed B
• Start is slow
P0967 —
C
• Start is slow
P2765 — TM
• Start is slow E
P2813 • Acceleration is slow
Selector shock is large When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
F
• Selector shock is large G
• Start is slow
U0073 —
H
• Start is slow
U0100 —
• Lock-up is not performed I
J
• Selector shock is large K
• Start is slow
U0300 —
L
U110F Not changed from normal driving —
U1111 Not changed from normal driving — M
Protection Control INFOID:0000000010589252

N
The TCM has the following protection control. O
When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased. P
Control
tion
TM-265
TCM
Vehicle behavior in
control
tion
Control
Vehicle behavior in
control
tion
Control
control reverse.
tion engaged.)
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010589253
If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the DTC check pri-
ority list below.
Items
Priority DTC Reference
(CONSULT screen terms)
P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TM-343, "DTC Logic"
U0073 COMM BUS A OFF TM-288, "DTC Logic"
U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-289, "DTC Logic"
U0102 LOST COMM (TRANSFER) TM-290, "DTC Logic"
U0140 LOST COMM (BCM) TM-291, "DTC Logic"
U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A) TM-292, "DTC Logic"
1
U0155 LOST COMM (IPC) TM-293, "DTC Logic"
U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-294, "DTC Logic"
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-295, "DTC Logic"
U110F LOST COMM (ECM) TM-296, "DTC Logic"
U1111 LOST COMM (CHASSIS CONT MDUL) TM-297, "DTC Logic"
U1117 LOST COMM (ABS) TM-298, "DTC Logic"
TM-266
TCM
Items
(CONSULT screen terms) A
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-318, "DTC Logic"
B
P0778 PC SOLENOID B TM-328, "DTC Logic"
P0962 PC SOLENOID A TM-346, "DTC Logic" C
2
P0963 PC SOLENOID A TM-348, "DTC Logic"
TM
P2814 SELECT SOLENOID TM-362, "DTC Logic"
P2815 SELECT SOLENOID TM-364, "DTC Logic" E
P062F EEPROM TM-299, "DTC Logic"
P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A TM-300, "DTC Logic"
P0706 T/M RANGE SENSOR A TM-305, "DTC Logic" F
P0712 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-308, "DTC Logic"
G
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-312, "DTC Logic"
3 P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH TM-331, "DTC Logic" H
P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-334, "DTC Logic"
P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B TM-335, "DTC Logic"
I
P084C FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H TM-339, "DTC Logic"
P084D FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H TM-341, "DTC Logic" J
P0890 TCM TM-344, "DTC Logic"
P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B TM-356, "DTC Logic"
K
4 P0776 PC SOLENOID B TM-326, "DTC Logic" L
M
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010589254
NOTE:
N
• If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the “DTC check
priority list”. Refer to TM-266, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD”. Refer to TM-251, "CONSULT Function".
O
*1, *2
DTC
Items
CONSULT (CONSULT screen terms)
Trip MIL*3 Reference
GST P
(TRANSMISSION)
P062F P062F EEPROM 1 ON TM-299
P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A 2 ON TM-300
P0706 P0706 T/M RANGE SENSOR A 2 ON TM-305
P0712 P0712 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON TM-308
P0713 P0713 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON TM-310
TM-267
TCM
DTC*1, *2
Items
Trip MIL*3 Reference
GST
(TRANSMISSION)
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A 2 ON TM-312
P0717 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A 2 ON TM-315
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER 2 ON TM-318
P0746 P0746 PC SOLENOID A 2 ON TM-324
P0776 P0776 PC SOLENOID B 2 ON TM-326
— P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH 1 — TM-331
P0841 P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A 2 ON TM-334
P0847 P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 2 ON TM-335
P0848 P0848 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 2 ON TM-337
P084C P084C FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H 2 ON TM-339
P084D P084D FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H 2 ON TM-341
P0863 P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 1 ON TM-343
P0890 P0890 TCM 1 ON TM-344
P2765 P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B 2 ON TM-356
P2813 P2813 SELECT SOLENOID 2 ON TM-360
U0073 U0073 COMM BUS A OFF 1 ON TM-288
U0100 U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) 1 ON TM-289
— U0102 LOST COMM (TRANSFER) 1 — TM-290
— U0140 LOST COMM (BCM) 1 — TM-291
— U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A) 1 — TM-292
— U0155 LOST COMM (IPC) 1 — TM-293
— U0300 CAN COMM DATA 1 — TM-294
— U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 — TM-295
— U110F LOST COMM (ECM) 1 — TM-296
— U1111 LOST COMM (CHASSIS CONT MDUL) 1 — TM-297
— U1117 LOST COMM (ABS) 1 — TM-298
*1: These numbers are specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
*2: The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
*3: Refer to TM-249, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
TM-268
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CVT: RE0F10D]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010589255
B
TM
JRDWC2553GB
TM-269
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC2164GB
TM-270
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC2208GB
TM-271
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC2209GB
TM-272
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC2210GB
TM-273
CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
JRDWC2165GB
TM-274
TM
JRDWC2211GB
TM-275
JRDWC2212GB
TM-276
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CVT: RE0F10D]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010589257
B
NOTE:
“DTC” includes DTC at the 1st trip.
C
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Refer to TM-278, "Diagnostic Work Sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information
(conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings TM
in the vehicle.
>> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations. F
- Records the DTCs. (Print out using CONSULT and affix to the Work Order Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relation between the cause found by DTC and the malfunction information from customer. TM- G
373, "Symptom Table" can be used effectively.
3. Check the relevant information including STI, etc.
Do malfunction information and DTC exists? H
Malfunction information and DTC exists.>>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists but no DTC.>>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists.>>GO TO 5.
I
3.REPRODUCE MALFUCTION SYSTEM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-263, "Fail-safe". J
Interview sheet can be used effectively when reproduce malfunction conditions. Refer to TM-278, "Diagnostic
Work Sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus- K
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 5. L
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-263, "Fail-safe". M
Work Sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus- N
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 6. O
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-266, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the P
order for performing the diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Follow GI-41, "Intermittent Incident" to check.
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
TM-277
Use TM-373, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 (DTC is reproduced.)>>GO TO 5.
YES-2 (Malfunction is reproduced.)>>GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000010589258
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop-
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, perception of a problem varies depending on individuals.
Ask the customer about his/her concerns carefully. It is important to
understand the phenomenon or status. To systemize all the informa-
tion for the diagnosis, prepare the question sheet referring to the
question points.
In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may
cause a DTC to be detected.
SEF907L
Worksheet Sample
Question sheet
Registration Initial year Year Month
Customer's number registration day
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type Chassis No.
Year Month
Storage date Engine Mileage km/mile
day
Symptom Vehicle does not start. ( R position D position M position)
Upshifting does not occur. Downshifting does not occur.
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point is too high. Shift point is too low.
Shift shock ( N⇒D Lock-up R, D, and M position)
Slip ( N⇒D Lock-up R, D, and M position)
Noise Vibration
When selector lever position is shifted, shift pattern does not change.
Other
( )
First occurrence Recently (as from month of year )
Frequency of occurrence Always Under certain conditions Sometimes ( time(s)/day)
TM-278
Question sheet
A
MR/MS
name
B
Year Month
day
Climate con-
Irrelevant C
ditions
Weather Clear Cloud Rain Snow Others )
Temperature Hot Warm Cool Cold Temperature (Approx. °C/°F)
TM
Relative humidity High Moderate Low
Transaxle condition In cold-start During warm-up (approx. °C/°F) After warm-up
Engine speed: rpm E
Urban area Suburb area Highway
Road conditions
Mountainous road (uphill or downhill)
Operating condition, etc. Irrelevant F
When engine starts During idling During driving
During acceleration At constant speed driving During deceleration
During cornering (RH curve or LH curve)
G
Other conditions
TM-279
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM
Always perform the following items when the TCM is replaced.

TCM PROGRAMMING
• Since vehicle specifications are not yet written in a new TCM, it is necessary to write them with CONSULT.
CAUTION:
When replacing TCM, save TCM data on CONSULT before removing TCM.
SAVING AND WRITING OF TCM DATA
• TCM performs accurate control by retrieving data (inherent characteristic value) of each solenoid. For this
reason, it is necessary to save data of current TCM in CONSULT before replacing the TCM. After this, the
saved data must be written in new TCM.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010589260
1.SAVE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE)

NOTE:
Save necessary data stored in TCM in CONSULT according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
2. Connect all of disconnected connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
5. Select “READ IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM”.
6. Import data according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
>> GO TO 2.
2.SAVE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS)
NOTE:
With CONSULT
3. Select “Re/programming, Configuration”.
4. Select “AT/CVT”.
NOTE:
If “AT/CVT” is not displayed and TCM data cannot be saved on CONSULT, GO TO 3.
5. Select “Programming”.
6. Save TCM data on CONSULT according to the CONSULT display.
>> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE TCM
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds.
2. Replace TCM. Refer to TM-391, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 4.
4.WRITE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS)
NOTE:
Write data saved in CONSULT into a new TCM according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
2. Perform programming according to the CONSULT display.
TM-280
>> GO TO 5.
5.WRITE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE) A
NOTE:
B
With CONSULT
3. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”. C
4. Select “WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM”.
5. Write data saved in CONSULT in TCM according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
TM
>> WORK END
TM-281
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Perform the following work after the transaxle assembly is replaced.

WRITING TCM DATA
reason, after replacing transaxle assembly, it is necessary to write new data in TCM.
ERASING OF CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
• TCM records the degradation level of the CVT fluid calculated from the vehicle driving status. Therefore, if
the transaxle assembly is replaced, it is necessary to erase the CVT fluid degradation level data recorded by
TCM.
1.CHECK THE SERIAL NUMBER

Write down the serial number of new transaxle assembly.
JSDIA6075GB
>> GO TO 2.
2.WRITE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE)
NOTE:
Write data of new solenoid in TCM according to the following instructions:
With CONSULT
CAUTION:
When the work is interrupted, obtain data again from the supplied CD.
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
4. Insert the supplied CD into CONSULT.
6. Select “WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT”.
7. Check that the serial number displayed on CONSULT screen and those written in the memo agree.
8. Write data in TCM according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
NOTE:
When writing is complete, the shift position indicator of the combination meter displays P.
>> GO TO 3.
3.ERASE CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
TM-282
With CONSULT
1. Select “WORK SUPPORT” in “TRANSMISSION”. A
2. Select “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN”.
3. Touch “Clear”.
B
>> WORK END
TM
TM-283
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEM-
BLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE AS-
SEMBLY
When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, perform the following work.
TCM PROGRAMMING
CAUTION:
WRITING TCM DATA
reason, after replacing TCM and transaxle assembly, it is necessary to write new data in TCM.

With CONSULT
NOTE:
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
2. Replace TCM and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-391, "Removal and Installation" (TCM), TM-415,
"Removal and Installation" (Transaxle assembly).
CAUTION:
JSDIA6075GB
>> GO TO 3.
TM-284
BLY
3.WRITE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS) A

NOTE:
With CONSULT B
C
>> GO TO 4.
NOTE: TM
With CONSULT
CAUTION: E
3. Turn ignition switch ON. F
4. Insert the supplied CD into CONSULT.
6. Select “WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT”. G
NOTE:
H
>> WORK END I
TM-285
STALL TEST
STALL TEST
INSPECTION
1. Check the engine oil level. Replenish if necessary. Refer to LU-22, "Inspection".
2. Check for leak of the CVT fluid. Refer to TM-378, "Inspection".
3. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
4. Be sure to apply the parking brake and block the tires.
5. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal and put the selector lever to the D position.
6. While depressing the brake pedal, depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
7. Read the stall speed quickly. Then, release your foot from the accelerator pedal quickly.
CAUTION:
Do not depress the accelerator pedal for 5 seconds or more during the test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-421, "Stall Speed".

8. Place the selector lever in the N position.
9. Cool the CVT fluid.
CAUTION:
Run the engine with the idle speed for at least 1 minute.
10. Put the selector lever to the R position and perform Step 6 to Step 9 again.
NARROWING-DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Selector lever position

Possible cause
D R
H O • Forward clutch
O H • Reverse brake
• Engine
L L
Stall speed • Torque converter one way clutch
• Line pressure is low.
• Primary pulley
H H
• Secondary pulley
• Steel belt
O: Within the stall speed standard value.
H: Stall speed is higher than the standard value.
L: Stall speed is lower than the standard value.
TM-286
CVT POSITION
CVT POSITION
A
1. Turn ON the ignition switch with the shift selector at the “P” position. B
2. Press the shift selector button with the brake pedal depressed, and confirm that the shift selector can be
moved to positions other than “P”. Also confirm that movement is not allowed from the “P” position to other
position without depressing the brake pedal. C
3. Move the shift selector and check for “excessive effort”, “sticking”, “noise” or “rattle”.
4. Confirm that shift selector stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the shift selector is in matches the position shown TM
by the transaxle body.
5. Make sure that the shift selector is moved to all the shift posi-
tions in the manner shown. E
6. When the shift selector button is pressed without applying for-
ward/backward force to the shift selector at “P”, “R”, “N”, or “D”
positions, there should be no “sticking” on the shift selector but-
ton operation. F
7. The relationship between selector lever, engine starting ability,
and shift position indicator lighting should satisfy the conditions
of the following table. G
JPDIA0344GB
Selector lever Load direction to the se- Applied load to the se- H
Engine starting ability Shift position indicator lighting
position lector lever lector lever
P P (over stroke) ← P → R Start P indicator shall be illuminated
R P←R 30 N (3.1 kg, 6.7 lb) Not start R indicator shall be illuminated I
N R←N Start N indicator shall be illuminated
D — — Not start —
J
8. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the
back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or “N”
position.
K
9. Check that the transaxle is locked when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, make sure that manual mode is displayed on combination
meter. Shift selector lever to “+” and “−” sides, and check that set shift position changes. L
1. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. M

CAUTION:
Rotate the wheels at least a quarter turn and be certain the Park position mechanism is fully
engaged. N
2. Loosen nut and set manual lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never apply force to the manual lever.
O
3. Tighten the nut to the specified torque. Refer to TM-385,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
In tightening, fix the manual lever. P
JSDIA5177ZZ
TM-287
U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10D]
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010589268
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition Possible causes
(Trouble diagnosis content)
COMM BUS A OFF TCM communication blockage lasts for 2 sec-
Harness or connector
U0073 (Control Module Communica- onds or more when turning ON the ignition
(CAN communication line is error)
tion Bus A Off) switch. (Communication not established.)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0073” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-288, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010589269
For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-24, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
TM-288
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is un- • ECM
LOST COMM (ECM A)
able to receive the CAN communications • Harness or connector
U0100 (Lost Communication With
signal from ECM continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
ECM/PCM A) TM
onds or more. shorted)

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK E
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0100” detected? H
I
J
TM-289
U0102 LOST COMMUNICATION (TRANSFER)
U0102 LOST COMMUNICATION (TRANSFER)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

LOST COMM (TRANSFER) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • 4WD control unit
(Lost Communication With to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
U0102
Transfer Case Control Mod- from 4WD control unit continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
ule) onds or more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-290
U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM)
A

• BCM
LOST COMM (BCM) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
• Harness or connector
U0140 (Lost Communication With to receive the CAN communications signal
(CAN communication line is open or
Body Control Module) from BCM continuously for 2 seconds or more. TM
shorted)

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H
NO >> INSPECTION END I
For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-24, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". J
TM-291
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is turned ON, TCM • IPDM E/R
LOST COMM (BCM A)
continues no reception of the CAN communi- • Harness or connector
cation signal from IPDM E/R for 2 seconds or (CAN communication line is open or
Body Control Module A)
more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-292
U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC)
A

[Trouble diagnosis content] C
LOST COMM (IPC) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • Combination meter
[Lost Communication With In- to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
U0155
strument Panel Cluster (IPC) from the combination meter continuously for 2 (CAN communication line is open or
Control Module] seconds or more. shorted) TM

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H
TM-293
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is ON, the data length
CAN COMM DATA
transmitted from each control unit is shorter
U0300 (Internal Control Module Soft- Control unit other than TCM
than the specified length and the status contin-
ware Incompatibility)
ues for 2 seconds or more.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the DTC.
1.CONTROL UNIT CHECK

Check the number of control units replaced before “U0300” is detected.
Is one control unit replaced?
YES >> The specification of the control unit replaced may be incorrect. Check the part number and the
specification.
NO >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
1. Remove one of the control unit replaced.
2. Assemble the old control unit before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300”detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch and check other control units in the same manner.
NO >> The specification of the control unit removed may be incorrect. Check the part number and the
specification.
TM-294
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission C
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM cannot Harness or connector
CAN COMM CIRCUIT F
U1000 send the CAN communication signal continu- (CAN communication line is open or
(CAN Communication Line)
ously for 2 seconds or more. shorted)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds. J
2. Check the DTC.
YES >> Go to TM-295, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
TM-295
U110F LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• ECM
LOST COMM (ECM) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
U110F (Lost Communication With to receive the CAN communications signal
ECM) from ECM continuously for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U110F” detected?
TM-296
U1111 LOST COMMUNICATION (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
A

LOST COMM (CHASSIS When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • Chassis control module
CONT MDUL) to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
U1111
(Lost Communication With from chassis control module continuously for 2 (CAN communication line is open or
Chassis Control Module) seconds or more. shorted) TM

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H
TM-297
U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
LOST COMM (ABS) unit)
to receive the CAN communications signal
U1117 (Lost Communication With • Harness or connector
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
ABS) (CAN communication line is open or
unit) continuously for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-298
P062F EEPROM
P062F EEPROM
A
TCM compares the calculated value stored in the flash ROM with the value stored in TCM. If the calculated B
value does not agree with the stored value, TCM judges this as a malfunction.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms TM

• TCM (Flash ROM)
EEPROM
Flash ROM error is detected when turning ON • Harness or connector E
P062F (Internal Control Module EE-
the ignition switch. [TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
PROM Error)
open or shorted]
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the DTC. I
Is “P062F” detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END J
K
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT
Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-391, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
M
TM-299
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are satis-
T/M RANGE SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 2 seconds:
(Short circuit between transmission
P0705 [Transmission Range Sensor • Two or more range signals simultaneously
range switch and TCM)
A Circuit (PRNDL Input)] stay ON continuously
• Transmission range switch
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

>> GO TO 2.
2. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for
5 seconds or more.)
3. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0705” detected?
1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Select “D POSITION SW”, “N POSITION SW”, “R POSITION SW”, and “P POSITION SW”.
4. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “D” and check ON/OFF of each monitor item.
Monitor item Condition Condition

D POSITION SW
N POSITION SW
R POSITION SW
P POSITION SW
Without CONSULT
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
4. Shift the selector lever from “P” to “D” and check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
TM-300
+ A
TCM − Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
B
Selector lever: “D” position 10 – 16 V
4
Other than the above Approx. 0 V
Selector lever: “N” position 10 – 16 V C
5
F2 Ground
Selector lever: “R” position 10 – 16 V
6 TM
Selector lever: “P” position 10 – 16 V
7
Other than the above Approx. 0 V E
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-1 [“D POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “D” position. (Or connector terminal 4 is at power F
voltage.)]>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 [“N POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “N” position. (Or connector terminal 5 is at power
voltage.)]>>GO TO 4. G
NO-3 [“R POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “R” position. (Or connector terminal 6 is at power
NO-4 [“P POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “P” position. (Or connector terminal 7 is at power
voltage.)]>>GO TO 8. H
2.CHECK D POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.
J
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
2 K
5
F2 4 Not existed
6
L
7
YES >> GO TO 3. M
1. Disconnect transmission range switch connector. N
3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
O
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.) P
Connector Terminal
F2 4 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK N POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
TM-301
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
4
F2 5 Not existed
6
7
YES >> GO TO 5.
1. Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 5 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
4
F2 7 Not existed
5
6
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 7 Ground 0V
TM-302
YES >> GO TO 10. A
8.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART1)
B
C
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
TM
2
4
F2 6 Not existed
5 E
7
F
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2) G
3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground. H
+
Voltage I
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 6 Ground 0V
J
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. K
10.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Check transmission range switch. Refer to TM-303, "Component Inspection".
L
Is the check result normal?
M
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH N

Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals.
Transmission range switch O

Condition Continuity
Terminal
Manual lever: “P” and “N” positions Existed
1–2 P
Other than the above Not existed
Manual lever: “P” position Existed
3–4
Manual lever: “R” position Existed
3–5
TM-303
Transmission range switch
Terminal
Manual lever: “N position Existed
3–6
Manual lever: “D” position Existed
3–7
NO >> There is a malfunction of transmission range switch. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
394, "Removal and Installation".
TM-304
A

When all of the following conditions are satis- (Open circuit between ignition switch
T/M RANGE SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 30 sec- and transmission range switch/open
P0706 (Transmission Range Sensor onds: circuit between transmission range TM
A Circuit Range/Performance) • All range signals stay OFF switch and TCM)
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Transmission range switch
• Control cable
E
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK F
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
40 seconds or more.)
3. Check the first trip DTC. I
NO >> INSPECTION END J
K
1.ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CABLE
Adjust control cable. Refer to TM-287, "Inspection".
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
With CONSULT
N
3. Touch “Erase”.
4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE". Refer to TM-305, "DTC Logic".
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER CIRCUIT P
4. Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector terminal and ground.
TM-305
+
Transmission range switch − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F61 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH AND TCM (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and TCM harness con-
nector terminals.
Transmission range switch TCM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 7
5 6
F61 6 F2 5 Existed
7 4
8 2
YES >> GO TO 5.
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and ground.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
F61 6 Ground Not existed
7
8
YES >> GO TO 6.
7.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and transmission range switch harness
connector terminal.
TM-306
IPDM E/R Transmission range switch A

Continuity
F90 101 F61 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. C
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS
Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-56, "Wiring Dia- TM
gram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 101 and transmission range switch
harness connector terminal 3. E
• 10A fuse (No. 67, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-101, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
F
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010589299 G

Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals. H

Condition Continuity I
Terminal
1–2
Other than the above Not existed J
3–4
K
3–5
Manual lever: “N position Existed L
3–6
3–7 M
YES >> INSPECTION END N
TM-307
P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
(CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
P0712 (Transmission Fluid Tempera- • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
shorted to ground)
ture Sensor A Circuit Low) • Fluid temperature sensor detection voltage:
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
0.15 V or less

>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT

2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2.CHECK CVT UNIT TERMINAL CODE ASSEMBLY
Check continuity between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT unit terminal code assembly. Replace the transaxle assembly.
Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TM-308
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
A
CVT unit Resistance
Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)
B
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 6.5 kΩ
F207 12 – 18 CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) 2.2 kΩ
CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 0.87 kΩ C
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the transaxle assembly. TM
TM-309
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds: • Harness or connector
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V (CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
P0713 (Transmission Fluid Tempera-
• Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (7 MPH) open or shorted to power supply)
ture Sensor A Circuit High)
• Fluid temperature sensor detection voltage: • CVT fluid temperature sensor
2.48 V or more

CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.
>> GO TO 2.
2. Maintain the following condition for 10 seconds or more.
Vehicle speed : 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more

3. Stop the vehicle.
1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 1)

3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and CVT unit harness connector terminals.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
11 18
F2 F58 Existed
12 12
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-310
+ A
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
F2 12 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 3. C
TM
2. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
E
CVT unit Resistance
Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 6.5 kΩ F

G
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace the transaxle assembly.
Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation". H
TM-311
P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC detection condition
DTC (Trouble diagnosis con- Possible causes
tent)
When 1 is satisfied and any of 2, 3 or 4 is satisfied:
1. When the following conditions are satisfied:
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
- After range change completion, it spends 2 sec-
onds or more.
2. When all of the following conditions are satisfied
and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
- Primary pulley speed: Less than 150 rpm
- Secondary pulley speed: 500 rpm or more
and this state is maintained for 0.5 seconds:
- 10-msec-ago primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or
more
INPUT SPEED SEN- - Now primary pulley speed: 0 rpm
(Primary speed sensor circuit is
SOR A 4. When all of the following conditions are satisfied
P0715 open or shorted)
(Input/Turbine Speed and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
• Primary speed sensor
Sensor A Circuit) - Range: D
- Engine speed: 450 rpm or more
- Input peed: 300 rpm or more
- Primary pulley speed: 300 rpm or more
- Secondary pulley seed: 300 rpm or more
- Differences between engine speed and primary
pulley speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between primary pulley speed and in-
put speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between engine speed and input
speed: 1,000 rpm or less
- Lock-up command is being given (except for slip
lock-up)
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not detected.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Drive the vehicle.
3. Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever : “D” POSITION

Engine speed : 1,200 rpm or more
TM-312
NO >> INSPECTION END A
1.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT B

2. Disconnect primary speed sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
4. Check voltage between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TM
Primary speed sensor − Voltage

Connector Terminal E
F38 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2. F
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
G
Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Primary speed sensor H

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F38 1 Ground Existed
I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM connector. K
3. Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
L
Primary speed sensor TCM
Continuity
F38 2 F2 35 Existed M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. N

Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground. O
Primary speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal P
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-313
2. Lift the vehicle.
4. Check frequency of primary speed sensor.
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
700 Hz
• Shift position: “M1” position

F2 35 Ground
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1905GB

NO >> Replace primary speed sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and primary speed sensor harness con-
nector terminal.
IPDM E/R Primary speed sensor

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-56, "Wiring Dia-
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 100 and primary speed sensor har-
ness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.63, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-101, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
TM-314
A

DTC DTC detection condition Possible cause
- After range change completion, it spends 2 TM
seconds or more.
2. When all of the following conditions are satis-
fied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
E
onds:
- Input speed: Less than 150 rpm
- Range: Other than P, N F
- P0715 is not detected
fied and this state is maintained for 0.5 sec-
onds: G
- 10-msec-ago input speed: 1,000 rpm or more
• Harness or connectors
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A - Now input speed: 0 rpm
(Input speed sensor circuit is open
P0717 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor 4. When all of the following conditions are satis-
or shorted.) H
“A” Circuit No Signal) fied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
• Input speed sensor
onds:
- Range: D
- Input peed: 300 rpm or more I
- Differences between engine speed and pri- J
mary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or less
- Differences between primary pulley speed
and input speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between engine speed and input K
speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Lock-up command is being given (except for
slip lock-up)
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not de- L
tected.

CAUTION: M
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK N
O
>> GO TO 2.
P
With CONSULT
Selector lever : “D” position
TM-315
1.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect input speed sensor connector.
4. Check voltage between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Input speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F47 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Input speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN INPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
Input speed sensor TCM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
TM-316
Input speed sensor A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. C
2. Lift the vehicle. TM
4. Check frequency of input speed sensor.
E
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F
880 Hz
G
F2 24 Ground
H
JSDIA3769GB
Is the inspection result normal? I

NO >> Replace input speed sensor. Refer to TM-397, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND INPUT SPEED SENSOR J
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and input speed sensor harness connec- K
tor terminals.
IPDM E/R Input speed sensor L

Continuity
M
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. N
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-56, "Wiring Dia- O
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 100 and input speed sensor harness
connector terminal 3. P
• IPDM E/R
TM-317
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
TORQUE CONVERTER (Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0740 (Torque Converter Clutch Cir- circuit is open or shorted to power sup-
• P0743 is not detected.
cuit/Open) ply)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
open.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION
With CONSULT
3. Select “FLUID TEMP”.
4. Confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is in the following range.
FLUID TEMP : 20°C (68°F) or more
With GST
2. Set the CVT fluid to 20°C (68°F) or more.
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F) with driving in an urban area for approximately 10 minutes.
Is the CVT fluid 20°C (68°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> 1. Warm the transaxle.
2. GO TO 3.

TM-318
A
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. B
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM CVT unit C

Continuity
F2 38 F58 5 Existed
TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. E
2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CVT UNIT AND GROUND
Check resistance between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
F
CVT unit
— Condition Resistance
Connector Terminal G
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.5 – 7.0 Ω
F207 5 Ground CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) 6.0 – 8.0 Ω
CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 6.5 – 8.5 Ω H

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO >> There is malfunction of torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer
to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".
TM-319
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

fied and this state is maintained for 0.48 sec- • Harness or connector
TORQUE CONVERTER
onds: (Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0743 (Torque Converter Clutch Cir-
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V circuit is shorted to ground)
cuit Electrical)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
With GST
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. GO TO 3.

TM-320
A
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. B
TCM C
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. E
F
CVT unit
Connector Terminal G
CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 6.5 – 8.5 Ω H

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". I
TM-321
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

onds:
TORQUE CONVERTER • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0744 (Torque converter clutch cir- • P0717 is not detected. • Control valve assembly
cuit intermittent) • CAN communication is normal • Torque converter
• Torque converter slip speed: (40+vihicle
speed/2) rpm
• LU pressure: More than 0.2 MPa

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
With GST
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. GO TO 3.

Accelerator pedal position : 0.5/8 or more
TM-322
A
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT B

YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation". C
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunction items.
TM
TM-323
P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The detecting condition A or detection condi-
tion B is detected twice or more (1 second or
more later after detection of the first) in the
same DC under the following diagnosis condi-
tions:
• Diagnosis conditions
- Engine speed: More than 600 rpm
- Primary pulley speed: More than 450 rpm
- Idle is not being detected.
- Acceleration/deceleration speed: −0.49 m/
s2 (−0.05 G) or more
PC SOLENOID A - The primary pulley speed experienced 300
rpm or more and the secondary pulley • Line pressure solenoid valve
P0746 (Pressure Control Solenoid A
speed experienced 250 rpm or more at least • Control valve assembly
Performance/Stuck Off)
once.
- Secondary pulley speed: More than 150
rpm
• Detection condition A
- Status with the shifting ratio of the primary
pulley speed/secondary pulley ratio exceed-
ing 2.981 is 0.2 sec. or more continuously.
• Detection condition B
NOTE:
DC stands for "DRIVING CYCLE" and indicates a series of driving cycle of "Ignition switch OFF → ON → driv-
ing → OFF".
CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.

Is “P0746”detected?
TM-324
A
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT B

YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation". C
TM
TM-325
P0776 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied and this state
is maintained for 10 seconds:
1. When all of the following conditions are
satisfied:
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is
not detected.
- Selector lever: Other than P/N position
- CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
- TCM power supply: More than 11 V
- The difference between instruction
pressure of secondary pressure and
10-msec-ago instruction secondary
pressure is 0 MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of secondary
pressure: 0 MPa or more
pressure - secondary pressure: More
than 1.2 MPa
- When all of the following conditions are
satisfied and this state is maintained
for 1.52 seconds:
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is
not detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
PC SOLENOID B • Selector lever: Other than P/N position
P0776 (Pressure Control Solenoid • Instruction pressure of secondary Secondary pressure solenoid valve
“B” Performance/Stuck Off) pressure − secondary pressure: 0.25
MPa or more
satisfied:
not detected.
20°C (-4°F)
for 5.5 seconds:
not detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -
20°C (-4°F)
• Selector lever: Other than P/N position
• Secondary pressure - instruction pres-
sure of secondary pressure: 1.2 MPa
or more
- Secondary pressure - instruction pres-
sure of secondary pressure: More than
1.2 MPa
TM-326
CAUTION: A
B
C
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start the engine. TM
E
F
Is “P0776” detected? G
H

I
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation". J
TM-327
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are satisfied
PC SOLENOID B and this state is maintained for 0.48 seconds:
(Secondary pressure solenoid valve
P0778 (Pressure Control Solenoid • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
circuit is shorted to ground.)
“B” Electrical) • TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is short-
• Secondary pressure solenoid valve
ed to ground.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
NO >> There is malfunction of secondary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-415, "Removal and Installation".
TM-328
A
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible causes

When all of the following conditions are satis- C
onds:
Pressure control solenoid B (Secondary pressure solenoid valve
P0779 • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
Intermittent circuit open or shorted to power supply) TM
• P0778 is not detected
open or shorted to power supply.
E
CAUTION:
F
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. G
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION H

3. Maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. I

Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more J
Is “P0779” detected? K
L
1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT M

3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal. N
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
F2 39 F58 3 Existed
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-329
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-330
P0826 UP AND DOWN SHIFT SW
A

TCM monitors manual mode, non-manual • Manual mode switch C
Up and Down Shift Switch Cir- mode, up or down switch signal, and detects • Harness or connectors
P0826
cuit as irregular when impossible input pattern oc- (Manual mode switch circuit are open
curs 1 second or more. or shorted.)
TM
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 1)
G
With CONSULT
2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position and wait for 1 second or more.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. H
NO >> GO TO 3. I
With CONSULT J
1. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate and wait for 1 second or more.
Is “P0826” detected? K
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 3) L
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “UP side (+ side)” and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. M
NO >> GO TO 5. N
With CONSULT O
1. Shift the selector lever to “DOWN side (− side)” and wait for 1 second or more.
Is “P0826” detected? P
1.CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER)

With CONSULT
TM-331
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-39, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
4. Check voltage between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Voltage
CVT shift selector – Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch: ON 12 V
7
Ignition switch: OFF 0V
8
M9 Ground
9
11
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-333, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CVT SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER
2. Disconnect combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and combination meter harness
connector terminals.
CVT shift selector Combination meter

Continuity
7 30
8 33
M9 M51 Existed
9 32
11 31
4. Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and ground.
TM-332
CVT shift selector A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B
8
M9 Ground Not existed
9
11 C
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground. E
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal F
M9 10 Ground Existed
G
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010589324 H
1.MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check continuity between CVT shift selector connector terminals. I
CVT shift selector

Condition Continuity J
Terminal
Manual shift gate position (neutral) Existed
7 – 10
Other than the above Not existed K
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) Existed
8 – 10
L
Selector lever: UP (+ side) Existed
9 – 10
Manual shift gate position Not existed M
10 – 11
Other than the above Existed
NO >> Replace the CVT shift selector assembly due to malfunction in manual mode switch. Refer to TM-
O
TM-333
P0841 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are sat-
isfied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
onds:
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 • Harness or connectors
V (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is not open or shorted.)
(Transmission Fluid Pres-
P0841 detected. • Harness or connectors
sure Sensor/Switch “A” Cir-
• Primary pulley speed: 300 rpm or more (Primary pressure sensor circuit is open
cuit Range/Performance)
• Secondary pulley speed: 250 rpm or more or shorted.)
• Target speed for shifting: Less than 0.1 • Secondary pressure sensor
seconds
• Primary pulley pressure is outside the
specified value.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.

Vehicle speed : Constant speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH)
CAUTION:
Also keep the accelerator pedal position constant.
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

YES >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".
TM-334
P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
A

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B • CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
P0847 (Transmission Fluid Pressure 4°F) open or shorted to ground) TM
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low) • TCM power supply voltage: 11 V or more • Secondary pressure sensor
• Secondary pressure sensor voltage: 0.09 V • Control valve assembly
or less
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT
3. Select “FLUID TEMP”. I
FLUID TEMP : −20°C (−4°F) J

With GST
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 10 seconds. K
CAUTION:
When the ambient temperature is less than −20°C (−4°F) and the engine is cold, warm up the
engine for approximately 5 minutes. L
YES >> Go to TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
N
2. Start the engine. O
3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals.
+ P
Connector Terminal
F2 16 Ground • Selector lever: “N” position 1.23 – 1.25 V
• At idle
TM-335
NO >> GO TO 2.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
11 13
26 22
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
16
F2 Ground Not existed
26
YES >> There is malfunction of secondary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
TM-336
A

• CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− • Harness or connector
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 4°F) (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is TM
P0848 (Transmission Fluid Pressure • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V shorted to power supply)
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low) • Instruction secondary pressure: 5.7 MPa or • Secondary pressure sensor
less • Control valve assembly
E
• Secondary pressure sensor voltage: 4.7 V
or more

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, the ignition switch OFF and wait for at
G
>> GO TO 2. H
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. I
4. Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. J
FLUID TEMP : More than −20°C (−4°F)

5. Check the first trip DTC. K
With GST
CAUTION:
L
engine for approximately 5 minutes.
Is “P0848”detected? M
N
1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS O

P
TM-337
+
Connector Terminal
• At idle
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
2. Connect TCM connector.
3. Disconnect CVT unit connector.
5. Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 22 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 14 Ground 0V
TM-338
P084C TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW H
A

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H • CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Primary pressure sensor circuit is
P084C (Transmission Fluid Pressure 4°F) open or shorted to ground) TM
Sensor/Switch H Circuit Low) • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Primary pressure sensor
• Primary pressure sensor voltage: 0.09 V or • Control valve assembly
less
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT
FLUID TEMP : More than −20°C (−4°F) J

With GST
CAUTION:
Is “P084C”detected?
N
+ P
Connector Terminal
• At idle
TM-339
NO >> GO TO 2.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
11 18
26 22
YES >> GO TO 3.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
17
26
YES >> There is malfunction of primary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415,
TM-340
P084D TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW H
A

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H
• CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Primary pressure sensor circuit is
(Transmission Fluid Pressure TM
P084D 4°F) open or shorted to ground)
Sensor/Switch “H” Circuit
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Primary pressure sensor
High)
more
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT

With GST
CAUTION:
Is “P084D”detected?
N
+ P
Connector Terminal
• At idle
TM-341
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 22 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 13 Ground 0V
TM-342
P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION
A

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) An error is detected at the initial CAN diagnosis of
P0863 TCM
(TCM Communication Circuit) TCM.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE TM

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at E
>> GO TO 2. F
1. Start the engine. G
2. Check the DTC.
YES >> Go to TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
J
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-391, "Removal and Installation".
K
TM-343
P0890 TCM
P0890 TCM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TCM • Harness or connector
(Transmission Control Module (TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
P0890 onds:
Power Relay Sense Circuit open or shorted.)
Low) • TCM
• Battery voltage: Less than 8.4 V

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY (BACK-UP) CIRCUIT

3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
45
F2 Ground 10 – 16 V
46
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connector terminals 45,
and 46.
• 10A fuse (No.42, located in the fuse and fusible link block). Refer to PG-99, "Fuse and Fusible Link Arrange-
ment (Gasilone Engine)".
TM-344
P0890 TCM
Is the inspection result normal? A
B
TM
TM-345
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID A
onds: (Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V shorted to ground)
Control Circuit Low)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Line pressure solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-346
NO >> There is malfunction of line pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-
415, "Removal and Installation". A
TM
TM-347
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID A onds:
(Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
P0963 (Pressure Control Solenoid A • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
open or shorted to power supply)
Control Circuit High) • P0962 is not detected
open.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F2 30 F58 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-348
TM
TM-349
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied and this state is
maintained for 10 seconds:
satisfied:
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
detected.
- CVT fluid temperature: More than -20°C
(-4°F)
- The difference between instruction pres-
sure of primary pressure and 10-msec-
ago instruction primary pressure is 0
MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of primary pressure:
0.86 MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of primary pressure
- primary pressure: More than 1.2 MPa
satisfied and this state is maintained for
1 second:
• DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than -20°C
(-4°F)
PC SOLENOID B • Harness or connector
(Pressure Control Solenoid B (Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0965 • Engine speed: More than 625 rpm
Control Circuit Range Perfor- cuit is open or shorted.)
• Instruction pressure of primary pressure:
mance) • Primary pressure solenoid valve
More than 2 MPa
• Primary pressure: 0.4 MPa or less
satisfied:
detected.
(-4°F)
5.5 seconds:
detected.
(-4°F)
• Primary pressure - instruction pressure
of primary pressure: 1.2 MPa or more
MPa or more
- Primary pressure - instruction pressure
of primary pressure: More than 1.2 MPa
TM-350
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed. A
B
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. Drive the vehicle. TM
Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more E

Is “P0965”detected? F
G

H
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation". I
TM-351
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID B
onds: (Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0966 (Pressure Control Solenoid B
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V cuit shorted to ground)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Primary pressure solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-352
NO >> There is malfunction of primary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-415, "Removal and Installation". A
TM
TM-353
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID B onds:
(Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0967 (Pressure Control Solenoid B • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
cuit open or shorted to power supply)
open.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F2 40 F58 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-354
TM
TM-355
P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When 1 is satisfied and any of 2, 3 or 4 is sat-
onds:
satisfied:
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11
V
- After range change completion, it spends
2 seconds or more.
5 seconds:
- Secondary pulley speed: Less than 149
rpm
- Primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or more
0.5 seconds:
- 10-msec-ago secondary pulley speed:
1000 rpm or more
- Now secondary pulley speed: 0 rpm
INPUT SPEED SENSOR B (Output speed sensor circuit is open or
5 seconds:
P2765 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor shorted)
- Range: D
B Circuit) • Output speed sensor
- Secondary pulley speed: 300 rpm or
more
- Input speed: 300 rpm or more
- The difference between engine speed
and primary pulley speed is 1,000 rpm or
less
and input speed is 1,000 rpm or less
- The difference between primary pulley
speed and input speed is 1,000 rpm or
less
- Lock-up command is being given (except
for slip lock-up)
detected.
- When any of following items are satis-
fied:
• Primary pulley speed/secondary pulley
speed: More than 2.9
speed: Less than 0.3

CAUTION:
TM-356
>> GO TO 2. A
1. Start the engine. B
Selector lever : “D” position C

TM
E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010589350 F
1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect output speed sensor connector.
4. Check voltage between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground. H
+
Output speed sensor − Voltage I
Connector Terminal
F41 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6. K
2.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
L
Output speed sensor
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 3. N
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
O
3. Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal. P
Output speed sensor TCM

Continuity
F41 2 F2 34 Existed
TM-357
YES >> GO TO 4.
Output speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
4. Check frequency of output speed sensor.
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
200 Hz

F2 34 Ground
JSDIA1904GB

NO >> Replace output speed sensor. Refer to TM-401, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and output speed sensor harness con-
nector terminals.
IPDM E/R Output speed sensor

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 7.
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 100 and output speed sensor har-
ness connector terminal 3.
• IPDM E/R
TM-358
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". A
TM
TM-359
P2813 SELECT SOLENOID
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1, or 2 is satisfied:
1. When all the following conditions are es-
tablished three times in 1DC
- Precondition
detected.
• Throttle position: More than 6.27 deg.
• Vehicle speed: Less than 3 km/h (1
MPH)
• CVT fluid temperature: More than 20°C
(68°F)
• Selector lever: Other than P, N
• Turbine speed when performed N → D,
N (P) → R: More than 500 rpm
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11
V
- Detection time
• N → D: 0.4 seconds
• N → R: 0.3 seconds
• P → R: 0.3 seconds
SELECT SOLENOID 30 seconds:
P2813 Select solenoid valve
(Select solenoid) - The counting of time continues while all
of the following conditions are satisfied
and stops when the conditions become
unsatisfied (the count is maintained).
When accumulated time reaches 30 sec-
onds (Clutch is judged as engaged and
the count is reset.)
MPH)
• Differences between primary pulley
speed and secondary speed: Less than
120 rpm
• Clutch instructions pressure: 0.95 MPa
or more
• Differences between turbine speed and
input speed: Less than 200 rpm
• Turbine speed – speed: More than 450
rpm
not detected.
V
NOTE:
DC stands for “DRIVING CYCLE” and indicates a series of driving cycle of “Ignition switch OFF → ON → driv-
ing → OFF”.
TM-360
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION 1 A

2. Maintain the following conditions. (Keep 30 seconds or more after the selector lever shifted.)
B
Selector lever : N→ D, N → R, P→ R
C
TM
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".
TM-361
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SELECT SOLENOID onds: (Select solenoid valve circuit shorted to
P2814
(Select solenoid) • TCM power supply voltage: 11 V or more ground)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Select solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

>> GO TO 2.
Selector lever : N → D, N → R, P → R

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-362
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". A
NO >> There is malfunction of select solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415,
B
TM
TM-363
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

onds:
SELECT SOLENOID (Select solenoid valve circuit open or
(Select solenoid) shorted to power supply)
open.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F2 37 F58 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-364
CVT unit A
Connector Terminal
B
Is the inspection result normal? C
"Removal and Installation". TM
TM-365
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT (PART 1)

+
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
45
46
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
47
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F2 Ground
48
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
41
F2 Ground Existed
42
4.DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS (PART 1)
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connector terminal 45,
and 46.
TM-366
5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TCM A

3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector terminals.
B
IPDM E/R TCM harness connector

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
47
F90 100 F23 Existed
48
TM
YES >> GO TO 6.
E
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS (PART 2)
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-56, "Wiring Dia- F
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 100 and TCM harness connector ter-
minals 47, and 48.
• 10A fuse (No.63, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-101, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". G
• IPDM E/R
H
TM-367
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Component Parts Function Inspection INFOID:0000000010589358
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

2. Shift selector lever.
3. Check that the selector lever position and the shift position indicator on the combination meter are identi-
cal.
NO >> Go to TM-368, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK TCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
3. Select “RANGE”.
5. Check that selector lever position, “RANGE” on CONSULT screen, and shift position indicator display on
combination meter are identical.
NO-1 (“RANGE” is changed but is not displayed on shift position indicator.>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result”
in “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-2 (“RANGE” and shift position indicator are different.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in “TRANSMIS-
SION”.
NO-3 (Specific “RANGE” is not displayed on shift position indicator.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in
“METER/M&A”.
TM-368
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010668271
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1) B

1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal released. C
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
NO >> GO TO 2. TM
2.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal depressed. E
NO >> Go to TM-369, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) G

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector
3. Turn ignition switch ON. H
4. Check the voltage between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.
+ I
Stop lamp switch − Voltage
Connector Terminal
J
E50 3 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2. K
NO >> GO TO 8.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1)
L
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-370, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 9.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
1. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector N
2. Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and the CVT shift selector
harness connector terminal.
O
Stop lamp switch CVT shift selector
Continuity
E50 4 M9 3 Existed P
3. Also check short circuit in harness.

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHCK GROUND CIRCUIT
TM-369
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Check the continuity between the CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M9 4 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PART POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect park position switch connector.
2. Check park position switch. Refer to TM-371, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
1. Disconnect shift lock solenoid connector.
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-371, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR HARNESS
Check CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-371, "Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness)".
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and stop lamp switch connector. Refer to PG-
56, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.4, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
9.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD), BR-52, "Inspection and
Adjustment" (RHD).
>> GO TO 10.
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000010668273
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between the stop lamp switch connector terminals.
TM-370
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Stop lamp switch A

Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Yes
3–4 B
Released brake pedal No
YES >> INSPECTION END C
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-17, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-61, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) INFOID:0000000010668274
TM
1.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH

E
Check continuity between park position switch connector terminals.
CAUTION:
• Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
• Never cause shorting between terminals. F
Park position switch

Condition Continuity G
Terminal
Shift selector lever to “P” position. Existed
1–2
Other than above Not existed H
NO >> Replace park position switch. Refer to TM-619, "Disassembly and Assembly". I
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000010668275
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID J
Apply voltage to terminals of shift lock solenoid connector and check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
• Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. K
• Never cause shorting between terminals.
L
Shift lock solenoid
+ (fuse) − Condition Status
Terminal M
Apply battery voltage be-
1 2 Shift lock solenoid operates
tween terminals 1 and 2.
Is the inspection result normal? N
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-619, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness) INFOID:0000000010668276
O
1.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR HARNESS (PART 1)

P
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and shift lock solenoid harness con-
nector terminal.
CVT shift selector Shift lock solenoid

Continuity
M9 3 M326 1 Existed
TM-371
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace CVT shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-617, "Removal and Installation".
Check continuity between shift lock solenoid harness connector terminal and park position switch harness
connector terminal.
Shift lock solenoid Park position switch

Continuity
M326 2 M325 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between park switch harness connector terminal and CVT shift selector harness connector
terminal.
Park switch CVT shift selector

Continuity
M325 2 M9 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-617, "Removal and Installation".
Check harness cladding CVT shift selector harness for damage.
TM-372
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10D]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010589364
B
• The diagnosis item number indicates the order of check. Start checking in the order from 1.
• Perform diagnoses of symptom table 1 before symptom table 2.
C
Symptom Table 1
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (P0740, P0743, P0744)

TM
Secondary pressure sensor (P0841, P0847, P0848)

E
CVT fluid temperature sensor (P0712, P0713)

Transmission range switch (P0705, P0706)
Primary pressure sensor (P084C, P084D)

F
Primary speed sensor (P0715)

G
Output speed sensor (P2765)

Input speed sensor (P0717)
Ignition switch and starter

CAN communication line
CVT fluid level and state

Symptom
Manual mode switch

H
Engine system
Power supply
Control valve
CVT position
I
Stall test
J
PG-56, STR-18
ECM-120
TM-286
TM-287
TM-366
TM-394
TM-380
TM-267
K
Large shock (N→D position) 1 4 7 3 6 2 8 5

Shift Shock Large shock (N→R position) 1 4 7 3 6 2 8 5
L
Shock is too large for lock-up. 2 3 6 1 5 4
Vehicle cannot be started from D
8 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 4 2 12 13 1 M
position.
Vehicle cannot be started from R
8 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 4 2 12 13 1
position.
N
Does not lock-up. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1
Slips/Will Not Does not hold lock-up condition. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1

Engage Lock-up is not released. 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 1 O
With selector lever in D position,
3 4 5 7 8 9 12 10 11 2 6 13 14 1
acceleration is extremely poor.
With selector lever in R position, P
3 4 5 7 8 9 12 10 11 2 6 13 14 1
Slips at lock-up. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1
TM-373
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM





Symptom
Manual mode switch

Engine system
Power supply
Control valve
CVT position
Stall test
PG-56, STR-18
ECM-120
TM-286
TM-287
TM-366
TM-394
TM-380
TM-267
No creep at all. 2 4 3 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 13 14 1
Vehicle cannot run in any posi-
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
tion.
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
driving is not possible.
With selector lever in R position,
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
Judder occurs during lock-up. 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 1
Strange noise in D position. 2 3 4 1
Strange noise in R position. 2 3 4 1
Strange noise in N position. 2 3 4 1
Vehicle does not decelerate by
7 3 4 5 6 2 8 1
engine brake.
Other Maximum speed low. 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 4 10 1
With selector lever in P position,
vehicle does not enter parking
condition or, with selector lever in 1 2
another position, parking condi-
tion is not cancelled.
Vehicle runs with CVT in P posi-
1 3 4 2
tion.
Vehicle runs with CVT in N posi-
1 3 4 2
tion.
Engine stall. 2 6 3 4 8 9 5 7 10 1
Engine stalls when selector lever
2 6 3 4 5 7 1
shifted N → D or R.
Engine speed does not return to
2 4 3 5 1
idle.
TM-374
Other
Shift Shock
sition.
mode.
Symptom Table 2
than N or P.
Symptom
Symptom
Does not shift.

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Large shock (N→R position)

Large shock (N→D position)
Shock is too large for lock-up.

Cannot be changed to manual
Engine starts in positions other

Engine does not start in N or P po-
TM-418 Torque converter
1
ECM-120 Engine system
3
4
2
2
3
2
3
5
Oil pump
TM-375
6
Forward clutch
1
6
TM-267
Reverse brake
1
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM-415
Planetary gear Secondary pressure sensor (P0841, P0847, P0848)

Bearings
Manual mode switch
1
Parking mechanism TM-286 Stall test
TM-287 CVT position

2
2
3
2
TM-370 Stop lamp switch

TM-366 Power supply
5
TM-394 Control valve

8
TM-371 Shift lock solenoid

TM-380 CVT fluid level and state
1
TM-382 CVT shift selector

PG-56, STR-18 Ignition switch and starter
1
1
[CVT: RE0F10D]
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Parking mechanism
Shift lock solenoid
CVT shift selector

Stop lamp switch
Torque converter
Forward clutch
Reverse brake
Planetary gear
Symptom
Oil pump
Bearings
TM-418
TM-370
TM-371
TM-382
TM-415

3 1 2
position.
4 1 2 3
position.
Does not lock-up. 1 3 2
Slips/Will Does not hold lock-up condition. 1 3 2

Not Engage Lock-up is not released. 1 2
1 3 2
1 4 2 3
Slips at lock-up. 1 2
TM-376
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM

A
Parking mechanism
Shift lock solenoid
CVT shift selector

Stop lamp switch
Torque converter
Forward clutch
Reverse brake
Planetary gear
B
Symptom
Oil pump
Bearings
C
TM-418
TM-370
TM-371
TM-382
TM-415
TM
No creep at all. 1 6 2 4 5 3
Vehicle cannot run in all posi-
tions.
1 2 4 5 3 6 E

1 2 4 3 5
F
1 2 4 3 5
Judder occurs during lock-up. 1
G
Strange noise in D position. 1 2 4 3 5
Strange noise in N position. 1 2 3 H
Maximum speed low. 1 5 2 4 3
vehicle does not enter parking I
condition or, with selector lever in 1
another position, parking condi-
Other J
2 1
tion.
tion.
2 3 1 K
Engine stall. 1
Engine stalls when selector lever L
1
Does not shift. 1
Cannot be changed to manual M
1
mode.
When brake pedal is depressed
with ignition switch ON, selector
lever cannot be shifted from P po-
1 2 3 N
sition to other position.
When brake pedal is not de-
pressed with ignition switch ON, O
1 2 3
selector lever can be shifted from
P position to other position.
TM-377
CVT FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F10D]
CVT FLUID
FLUID LEAKAGE
• Check transaxle surrounding area (oil seal and plug etc.)for fluid
leakage.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts and adjust
CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-380, "Adjustment".
SMA146B
Replacement INFOID:0000000010589366
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Always use shop paper. Never use shop cloth.
• Replace a drain plug gasket with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
• After replacement, always perform CVT fluid leakage check.
1. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” using CONSULT.
2. Select “FLUID TEMP” and confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
3. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
4. Lift up the vehicle.
5. Remove the drain plug and drain the CVT fluid from the oil pan. Refer to TM-394, "Exploded View".
6. Install the drain plug to oil pan.
CAUTION:
Drain plug gasket use the old one.
7. Remove the overflow plug from converter housing.
: Vehicle front
JSDIA3714ZZ
TM-378
CVT FLUID
8. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the overflow
plug hole. A
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
9. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe. B
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
C
10. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
11. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
the overflow plug. JSDIA3713ZZ
NOTE: TM
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
12. Lift down the vehicle.
E
14. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “Ds”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE: F
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
15. Check that the CONSULT “Data Monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
16. Stop the engine. G
18. Remove the drain plug, and then drain CVT fluid from oil pan.
H
19. Repeat steps 6 to 18 (one time).
20. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-394, "Exploded View".
21. Remove the overflow plug. I
22. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) into the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
J
23. Install the ATF changer hose to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging pipe until it stops.
K
25. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install the overflow plug.
NOTE:
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks. L
M
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds. N
O
31. Remove the overflow plug and confirm that the CVT fluid is drained from the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling.
NOTE: P
If the CVT fluid is not drained, refer to “Adjustment” and refill with the CVT fluid.
32. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, tighten the overflow plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
394, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
TM-379
CVT FLUID
36. Select “Erase”.
37. Stop the engine.
CAUTION:
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check CONSULT so that the oil temperature may be main-
tained from 35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F).
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check that the engine speed is maintaining 500 rpm.
3. Adjust the CVT fluid temperature to be approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The CVT fluid is largely affected by temperature. Therefore be sure to use CONSULT and check the
“FLUID TEMP” under “TRANSMISSION” in “Data Monitor” while adjusting.
NOTE:
6. Check that there is no CVT fluid leakage.
: Vehicle front
JSDIA3714ZZ
plug hole.
CAUTION:
9. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
10. Fill approximately 0.5 liter (1/2 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
11. Remove the ATF changer hose from the charging pipe, and
check that the CVT fluid drains out from the charging pipe. If it JSDIA3713ZZ
does not drain out, perform charging again.

CAUTION:
12. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, remove the charging pipe from the converter housing.
13. Tighten the overflow plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-394, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
TM-380
CVT FLUID
A
TM
TM-381
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
JSDIA5217GB
Selector lever knob Lock pin Selector lever knob cover

Position indication panel CVT shift selector assembly Park position switch
Shift lock unit Detent switch* Position indicator bulb
*: With push engine starter
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Apply the parking brake.
CAUTION:
Make sure the vehicle cannot move with the parking brake applied.
3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
5. Remove the shift selector knob with the following procedure.
TM-382
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
a. Slide the selector lever knob cover down.
CAUTION: A
Never damage the knob cover.
b. Pull out the lock pin from the selector lever knob .
c. Pull the selector lever knob and the selector lever knob cover B
upwards to remove them.
6. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and
Installation". C
JSDIA2778ZZ
TM
8. Disconnect the tip of control cable and remove socket from
the CVT shift selector assembly.
E
G
JSDIA4220ZZ
9. Disconnect the CVT shift selector connector . H

10. Remove the CVT shift selector assembly from the vehicle.
JSDIA5384ZZ
K
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector assembly. L
1. When connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector
assembly , face the grooved surface of the rib up and insert
the control cable until it stops. M
NOTE:
Apply multi-purpose grease to control cable eye before installa-
tion.
N
O
JSDIA1624ZZ
TM-383
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
2. Install the socket onto the CVT shift selector assembly.
CAUTION:
• Place the socket onto the CVT shift selector assembly,
then fasten it in place from above.
• Check that the pulling on the socket does not disconnect
it.
JSDIA1810ZZ
• Follow the procedure below and place the selector lever knob onto the CVT shift selector.
1. Install the lock pin onto the selector lever knob .
2. Install the knob cover onto the selector lever knob.
4. Press the selector lever knob onto the selector lever until it
clicks.
CAUTION:
• When install, never press selector button.
• Never strike the selector lever knob to press it into place.
5. After installing selector lever knob, pull the knob to check that it
does not become disconnected.
JSDIA2778ZZ
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010668188
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the position lamp.
2. Disengage the hooks (4 locations), and lift up the position indication panel to separate it from the CVT shift
selector assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage the CVT shift selector assembly.
3. Remove shift lock unit mounting screws.
4. Remove the shift lock unit from the CVT shift selector assembly.
5. Disconnect the park position switch connector, detent switch connector and shift lock solenoid connector
from the shift lock unit.
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

• Check the CVT shift selector position. Refer to TM-287, "Inspection".
• Check that shift lock can be forcible release. Refer to TM-234, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion".
• The key can be removed only when the selector lever is in the “P” position. (Without push engine starter)
• It must not be possible to turn the ignition switch to LOCK when the selector lever is not in the “P” position.
(Without push engine starter)
TM-384
CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
A
TM
I
JSDIA5630GB
Control cable Lock plate Transaxle assembly J

Manual lever Bracket Bracket
Grommet CVT shift selector assembly
K

L
CAUTION: M
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Apply the parking brake. N
CAUTION:
2. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation". O
TM-385
CONTROL CABLE
4. Disengage the hooks (4 locations), and lift up the position
indication panel to separate it from the CVT shift selector.
CAUTION:
JSDIA4229ZZ

JSDIA4220ZZ
6. Disengage the pawls ( ) of the grommet and pull down-

wards to remove.
7. Remove the battery mounting bracket assembly. Refer to PG-
8. Remove the harness bracket from battery mounting bracket.
JSDIA5182ZZ
9. Remove the control cable nut ( ) and remove the control cable
from the manual lever .
: Vehicle front
JSDIA6039ZZ
10. Remove the lock plate and remove the control cable from
bracket .
: Vehicle front
11. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-11, "Exploded

View"
12. Remove heat plate.
JSDIA5184ZZ
TM-386
CONTROL CABLE
13. Remove the control cable from bracket .
A
: Vehicle front
14. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.

B
JPDIA0107ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
• From below the vehicle, press the grommet into place until the
E
pawls ( ) make a click sound.
CAUTION:
• Place the grommet on the floor, then fasten it in place from
below the vehicle. F
• Check that pulling down on the grommet does not discon-
nect it.
G
JSDIA5182ZZ
H
• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector.
1. Shift the selector lever and Manual lever to “P” position.
2. When connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector I
the control cable until it stops.
J
JSDIA1624ZZ
L

CAUTION: M
• Check that the pulling on the socket does not disconnect N
it.
JSDIA1810ZZ
P
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010668192
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

Adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-287, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER ADJUSTMENT
TM-387
CONTROL CABLE
Check the CVT shift selector position after the adjustment. Refer to TM-287, "Inspection".
TM-388
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
A
TM
G
JSDIA5227ZZ
Shift selector assembly Clip Key interlock cable

H
Clip Key cylinder

I
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation. J
1. Remove the lower instrument panel (driver side) and steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation". K
3. Press the pawls of the key interlock cable slider while slid-
ing it in the direction of the casing cap , and separate the
adjusting holder and slider. L
:Key interlock rod

M
4. Remove the key interlock cable from the shift selector.
N
JSDIA1797ZZ
5. Lift the clip in the direction of the arrow ( ) and remove in O

the direction of the arrow ( ).
: Key interlock cable P

: Key cylinder
6. Remove the key interlock cable from the key cylinder.

7. Disengage the clip and disconnect the key interlock cable from
the vehicle.
JSDIA1798ZZ
TM-389
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
INSTALLATION
1. Move the shift selector to "P" position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON position.
3. Install the holder of key interlock cable to key cylinder.
4. Install the clip in the direction of the arrow ( ) and push it
in the direction of the arrow ( ).
: Key interlock cable

: Key cylinder
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
JSDIA3589ZZ
6. Install the adjusting holder onto the key interlock rod , then
install the casing cap onto the shift selector cable bracket .
CAUTION:
• When installing the key interlock cable, do not bend or
twist the cable forcefully.
• After connecting the key interlock cable to the shift selec-
tor cable bracket, be sure to check that the casing cap is
completely fastened to the cable bracket. If the casing cap
is easily displaced, replace the key interlock cable.
JSDIA1799ZZ
7. Slide the key interlock cable slider toward the key interlock
rod side and install the adjusting holder and key interlock
rod.
CAUTION:
• Never squeeze the pawls on the key interlock cable slider
when holding the slider.
• Never apply force in a perpendicular direction to the key
interlock rod when sliding the slider.
8. Install the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
9. Install the lower instrument panel (driver side) and steering col- JSDIA2644ZZ
umn cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".


• Check the CVT position. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-287, "Inspection".
• The key can be removed only when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
TM-390
TCM
TCM
A
TM
G
JSDIA6040GB
Battery mounting bracket assembly TCM bracket TCM

H
: Vehicle front
I
CAUTION:
J
• Never impact the tool when removing or installing TCM.
• Before replacing TCM, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM”. Refer to TM-280,
"Work Procedure".
• Before replacing TCM and transaxle assembly, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING K
TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY”. Refer to TM-284, "Work Procedure".
REMOVAL
L
3. Disconnect TCM connector . M
JSDIA5189ZZ
P
TM-391
TCM
4. Remove bolts ( ) and remove TCM bracket from battery
mounting bracket assembly .
5. Disconnect harness clips from TCM bracket.
JSDIA5190ZZ
6. Remove TCM mounting nut and bolt , and remove TCM

from TCM bracket .
JSDIA5191ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

When replaced TCM, perform "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM". Refer to TM-280, "Work
Procedure".
TM-392
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JSDIA5130ZZ
Air breather cap Air breather hose Air breather tube

H
Transaxle assembly

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove air resonator. Refer to EM-147, "Exploded View".
J
2. Remove air breather hose from transaxle assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and installation is in the reverse order of removal. K
CAUTION:
• Never bend the air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Insert air breather hose to the end of air breather.
L
• Insert air breather hose to air breather tube all the way to
the curve of the tube.
• Insert air breather hose to air breather tube so that the paint
mark is facing upward. M
O
JSDIA5229ZZ
TM-393
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
JSDIA4194GB
Transaxle assembly Oil pan gasket Oil pan

Drain plug Drain plug gasket Magnet
Overflow plug O-ring
: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain plug from oil pan and then drain the CVT fluid.
JSDIA5205ZZ
TM-394
OIL PAN
2. Remove drain plug gasket .
A
JSDIA5206ZZ
TM
3. Remove oil pan bolts ( ).
: Vehicle front E
4. Remove oil pan from transaxle case.
G
JSDIA5207ZZ
5. Remove oil pan gasket from oil pan. H
JSDIA5208ZZ
K
6. Remove magnets from oil pan.
L
N
JSDIA5209ZZ
INSTALLATION O
Note the followings and installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket. P
• Never reuse drain plug gasket.
• Never reuse O-ring.
• Completely clean the iron powder from the magnet area of oil pan and the magnets.
• Install the oil pan to the transaxle case with the following procedure.
1. Install the oil pan gasket to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
TM-395
OIL PAN
Completely wipe out any moisture, oil, and old gasket from the oil pan gasket surface and bolt
hole of oil pan and transaxle case.
2. Install the oil pan assembly to the transaxle case, and then temporarily tighten the oil pan bolt.
3. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the order shown to the specified
torque.
: Vehicle front
4. Tighten the oil pan bolts again clockwise from (1) shown to the
specified torque.
• Fill with CVT fluid after installation. Refer to TM-378, "Replace-
ment".
JSDIA5211ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check oil pan for foreign material.
• If a large amount of worn material is found, clutch plate may be worn.
• If iron powder is found, bearings, gears, or clutch plates may be worn.
• If aluminum powder is found, bushing may be worn, or chips or burrs of aluminum casting parts may enter.
Check points where wear is found in all cases.
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid.
TM-396
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
G
JSDIA5264GB
Transaxle assembly O-ring Input speed sensor

H
: Apply CVT fluid I

J
REMOVAL
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill- K
ing.
2. Remove air duct inlet. Refer to EM-147, "Exploded View". L
3. Pull out fluid cooler hose A from CVT oil warmer. Refer to TM-408, "Exploded View".
M
5. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove input speed sensor
from transaxle assembly.
N
P
JSDIA5195ZZ
TM-397
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
6. Remove O-ring from input speed sensor.
JSDIA5196ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to the O-ring.

If CVT fluid leaks during work, adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-380, "Adjustment".
TM-398
PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
G
JSDIA5141GB
Transaxle assembly Primary speed sensor O-ring

H
: Apply CVT fluid I

J
REMOVAL
K
2. Remove hoodledge splashguard (LH). Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect primary speed sensor.
4. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove primary speed sensor L
from transaxle assembly.
JSDIA5198ZZ O
TM-399
5. Remove O-ring from primary speed sensor.
JSDIA5199ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

TM-400
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
G
JSDIA5033GB
Transaxle assembly Output speed sensor O-ring

H
: Apply CVT fluid I

J
REMOVAL
K
3. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove output speed sensor
from transaxle assembly. L
JSDIA5201ZZ
O
4. Remove O-ring from output speed sensor.
JSDIA5199ZZ
TM-401
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

TM-402
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL
A
TM
G
JSDIA3729GB
Transaxle assembly Differential side oil seal (left side) Differential side oil seal (right side)
(2WD models only) H
: Apply CVT fluid
I
NOTE: J
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
REMOVAL K
Differential Side Oil Seal (Left Side)

1. Remove front drive shaft (left side). Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)" (2WD), FAX-60, L
"Removal and Installation (LH)" (4WD).
2. Remove differential side oil seal using an oil seal remover
(commercial service tool) (A). M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and converter
housing.
N
JPDIA0118ZZ
Differential Side Oil Seal (Right Side) (2WD Models Only) P

1. Remove front drive shaft (right side). Refer to FAX-26, "Removal and Installation (RH)" (2WD), FAX-63,
"Removal and Installation (RH)" (4WD).
TM-403
(commercial service tool) (A).
CAUTION:
housing.
JPDIA0118ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to differential side oil seals.
• When inserting the drive shaft, be sure to use Tool.
Tool number : KV38107900
Install each differential side oil seal evenly using Tool so that differ-
ential side oil seal protrudes by the dimension (C) and (D) respect-
fully.
: Differential side oil seal (left side)

: Differential side oil seal (right side) (2WD models only)
JPDIA0520ZZ
Dimension (C) :Height difference from case end surface is within 1.8 ± 0.5 mm (0.071 ±
0.020 in).
Dimension (D) :Height difference from case end surface is within 2.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.087 ±
0.020 in).
NOTE:
The reference is the installation direction of the differential side oil seal.
Drift to be used:
Location Commercial Service Tools
Transaxle case side Commercial service tool with outer dia. 56 mm (2.20 in) and in-
Converter housing side ner dia. 50 mm (1.97 in)

Drive the vehicle and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid.
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-380, "Adjustment".
TM-404
WATER HOSE
WATER HOSE
A
TM
I
JSDIA5317GB
Water outlet Transaxle assembly Heater thermostat assembly J

Hose clamp CVT oil warmer Water hose
To thermostat housing To engine oil cooler
K
L
REMOVAL M
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to N
allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
NOTE: O
ing.
1. Remove air duct inlet. Refer to EM-147, "Exploded View". P
2. Remove water hose and heater thermostat assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse hose clamps.
• Securely install the water hose clip to the converter housing.
TM-405
WATER HOSE
• Refer to the following when installing water hoses.
Water hose Installation side tube Direction of paint mark Hose insertion depth (L)
Heater thermostat assembly CVT oil warmer Frontward Hose end reaches the 2-stage
CVT oil warmer Frontward bulge.
Water hose Hose end reaches the end of
Water outlet Frontward
tube.
JSDIA3579ZZ
• Refer to the followings when installing hose clamp.

CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of tube.
Hose clamp
Installation side tube
Water hose Clamping position
Direction of tab
(A)
5 – 9 mm (0.20 –
Heater thermo-
CVT oil warmer Frontward 0.35 in) from hose
stat assembly
end
Upward and 30° 5 – 7 mm (0.20 –
CVT oil warmer
Water hose frontward 0.28 in) from hose
Water outlet Frontward end
JSDIA2424ZZ

Heater Thermostat
1. Fully immerse the heater thermostat in a container (A) filled
with water. Continue heating the water while stirring.
2. Continue heating the heater thermostat for 5 minutes or more
after bringing the water to a boil.
JSDIA3661ZZ
3. Quickly take the heater thermostat out of the hot water, measure the heater thermostat within 10 seconds.
TM-406
WATER HOSE
- Place dial indicator (A) on the pellet and measure the elonga-
tion from the initial state. A
Standard : Refer to TM-421, "Heater Thermostat".

4. If out of standard, replace heater thermostat. B
JSDIA3662ZZ
TM
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
E
TM-407
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Transaxle side
JSDIA5320GB
Transaxle assembly Copper washer Fluid cooler tube A

Fluid cooler tube B Hose clamp Fluid cooler hose A
CVT oil warmer
Vehicle side
JSDIA5319GB
TM-408
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Bumper reinforcement Bracket Bracket A

CVT fluid cooler Hose clamp Fluid cooler hose D
Fluid cooler tube assembly B Bumper reinforcement lower Fluid cooler hose E
Fluid cooler hose C Bracket Fluid cooler tube assembly A
B
Fluid cooler hose B Fluid cooler hose F Front side member LH

Transaxle assembly CVT oil warmer Fluid cooler tube A C
TM
REMOVAL E
NOTE:
ing. F
1. Remove front bumper. Refer to EXT-19, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-35, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the battery mounting bracket assembly and battery mounting bracket. Refer to PG-154, G
"Exploded View".
4. Remove the harness bracket mounting nuts ( ) and remove
the harness bracket from the vehicle. H
: Vehicle front
I
5. Remove hose clamps of CVT cooler hose F and B to remove the
hose on the CVT oil warmer side.
J
JSDIA6041ZZ
K
6. Remove hose clamp ( ) of CVT fluid cooler to remove the
hose on the CVT fluid cooler side.
L
N
JSDIA5412ZZ
7. Remove bracket mounting nut ( ) to remove fluid cooler hose O

B, C, E, and F together with fluid cooler tube assembly A.
JSDIA5413ZZ
TM-409
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
8. Remove the bracket mounting bolts ( ) and remove the CVT
fluid cooler from the vehicle.
9. Remove fluid cooler hose D.
10. Remove the fluid cooler tube assembly B from CVT fluid cooler.
11. Remove hose clamp of fluid cooler hose A to remove the hose
on the CVT oil warmer side.
12. Remove fluid cooler tube A and fluid cooler tube B.
JSDIA5414ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage CVT fluid cooler.
• Never reuse hose clamps.
Transaxle side
Refer to the followings when installing CVT fluid cooler tubes.
• When installing fluid cooler tube A and fluid cooler tube B to
transaxle assembly, contact fluid cooler tubes stopper and to
transaxle case.
JSDIA5321ZZ
• Refer to the followings when installing fluid cooler hose.
Installation side Hose insertion depth

Hose Direction of paint mark
tube (A)
CVT oil warmer Frontward
Fluid cooler Align with the paint Hose end reaches the
hose A CVT fluid cooler end of tube.
marks on the CVT fluid
tube B
cooler tube B
SCIA7203E

CAUTION:
Installation side Hose clamp

Hose
tube Direction of tab Clamping position
CVT oil warmer
Fluid cooler 5 - 9 MM. (0.20 - 0.35
CVT fluid cooler Frontward
hose A in) (A) from hose end
tube B
JSDIA2424ZZ
Vehicle side
TM-410
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
• Refer to the followings when installing fluid cooler hose.
A
Installation side Direction of paint Hose insertion
Hose mark depth (A)
tube
Fluid cooler tube A Frontward B
Fluid cooler hose B Fluid cooler tube
Hose end reaches
assembly A
Leftward the 2-stage bulge.
Fluid cooler tube C
Fluid cooler hose C assembly A
CVT fluid cooler Hose end reaches
CVT fluid cooler the end of tube SCIA7203E
TM
Fluid cooler hose D Fluid cooler tube Frontward
assembly B
E
Fluid cooler tube
assembly B
Fluid cooler hose E Hose end reaches
Fluid cooler tube
the 2-stage bulge. F
assembly A
Leftward
Fluid cooler tube
Fluid cooler hose F assembly A
CVT oil warmer Upward G
•
H
CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
I
Hose clamp
Installation side
Hose Clamping position
tube Direction of tab J
(A)
Fluid cooler tube A Upward
Fluid cooler hose B Fluid cooler tube K
assembly A
Leftward
Fluid cooler tube
Fluid cooler hose C
assembly A
L
JSDIA2424ZZ
CVT fluid cooler
CVT fluid cooler
5 – 9 mm (0.20 –
Fluid cooler hose D Fluid cooler tube Upward 0.35 in) from hose
M
assembly B end
Fluid cooler tube
assembly B N
Fluid cooler hose E
Fluid cooler tube
assembly A
Leftward
Fluid cooler tube O
Fluid cooler hose F assembly A
CVT oil warmer Upward
P

TM-411
CVT OIL WARMER
CVT OIL WARMER
JSDIA4994GB
Transaxle assembly CVT oil warmer

REMOVAL
WARNING:
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to
CAUTION:
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid/coolant
from spilling.
1. Remove the battery mounting bracket assembly and battery mounting bracket. Refer to PG-154,
"Exploded View".
the harness bracket from the vehicle.
: Vehicle front
3. Pull out water hoses from CVT oil warmer. Refer to TM-405,
4. Pull out fluid cooler hoses from CVT oil warmer. Refer to TM-
JSDIA6041ZZ
TM-412
CVT OIL WARMER
5. Remove mounting bolt ( ) and remove CVT oil warmer from
transaxle assembly. A
JSDIA6042ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
Inspection INFOID:0000000010589402 E

Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid and engine coolant. F
G
TM-413
PLUG
PLUG
Replace the O-ring if oil leakage or exudes from the plug.

JSDIA3622GB
Transaxle assembly O-ring Plug

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
1. Remove front fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-32, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the plug and O-ring.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to O-ring.

TM-414
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10D]

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
TM
JSDIA5327GB J
Transaxle assembly O-ring CVT fluid charging pipe

CVT fluid charging pipe cap K
: For the tightening torque, refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".
L
: Apply petroleum jelly

M
N
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure O
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn a quarter turn to
CAUTION: P
• Perform when the engine is cold.
• When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly simultaneously, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE
WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY” before work. Refer to TM-284, "Work Proce-
dure".
NOTE:
ing.
TM-415
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
1. Remove engine and transaxle assembly from the vehicle. Refer to EM-173, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-25, "MR20DD : Exploded View".
3. Remove transfer assembly. Refer to DLN-76, "Removal and Installation". (4WD models only)
4. Remove the CVT water hoses from engine side. Refer to TM-405, "Exploded View".
5. Turn crankshaft, and remove the tightening nuts for drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the crankshaft pulley side).
6. Remove the bolts that fasten the transaxle assembly and engine assembly.
7. Separate the engine from the transaxle assembly.
NOTE:
Using paint, put matching marks on the drive plate and torque converter when removing the torque con-
verter to drive plate nuts.
8. Remove following parts from transaxle assembly.
• Control cable bracket (Refer to TM-385, "Exploded View".)
• Air breather hose (Refer to TM-393, "Exploded View".)
• CVT water hoses and heater thermostat (Refer to TM-405, "Exploded View".)
• CVT fluid cooler hose and tube (Refer to TM-408, "Exploded View".)
• Charging pipe and O-ring
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Write down the serial number of the new transaxle assembly.
JSDIA6075GB
• When replacing an engine or transaxle you must make sure any dowels are installed correctly during
re-assembly
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive
train components.
• Never reuse O-rings or copper sealing washers.
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the nuts for the torque converter while securing the crankshaft pulley bolt, be sure
to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley bolt. Refer to EM-183, "Exploded View".
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that CVT rotates
freely without binding.
• When installing the CVT to the engine, align the matching mark on the drive plate with the matching
mark on the torque converter.
• When installing the drive plate to torque converter nuts, tighten them temporarily. Then, tighten the nuts to
• Install the transaxle assembly and engine assembly mounting bolts according to the following standards.
TM-416
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Bolt No. A
Insertion direction Transaxle to engine Engine to transaxle
Number of bolts 1 7
B
Bolt length
55 (2.17) 50 (1.97)
mm (in)
Tightening torque C
62 (6.3, 46)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
JSDIA5265ZZ
TM
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION E

After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
with in the reference value limit.
B : Scale F
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-421, "Torque Converter". G
H
JPDIA0115ZZ

Check the following items: I
• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid and engine coolant.
• For CVT position, refer to TM-287, "Inspection".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION J
• Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-380, "Adjustment".
• When replaced transaxle assembly, perform "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE
ASSEMBLY". Refer to TM-282, "Work Procedure". K
TM-417
TORQUE CONVERTER AND CONVERTER HOUSING OIL SEAL
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10D]

JSDIA4173ZZ
Torque converter O-ring Converter housing oil seal

Transaxle assembly
: Apply CVT fluid
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".

2. Remove torque converter from transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage the bushing on the inside of torque converter sleeve when removing torque con-
verter.
3. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
4. Remove converter housing oil seal using an oil seal remover (commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
Note the followings and assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:
• Never reuse converter housing oil seal.
• Apply CVT fluid to converter housing oil seal.
TM-418
• Drive converter housing oil seal evenly using a drift (A) (com-
mercial service tool) so that converter housing oil seal protrudes by A
the dimension (B) respectively.
Unit: mm (in)
Outer diameter: 65 (2.56) B
Commercial service tool: (A)
Inner diameter: 60 (2.36)
: Transaxle assembly C
SCIA7908J
TM
Dimension (B) : 1.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.039 ± 0.020 in)

NOTE: E
Converter housing oil seal pulling direction is used as the refer-
ence.
F
G
SCIA7909J
• Attach the pawl of the torque converter to the drive sprocket H

hole on the transaxle assembly side.
CAUTION:
• Rotate the torque converter for installing torque converter. I
• Never damage the bushing inside the torque converter
sleeve when installing the converter housing oil seal.
J
SCIA7907J
O
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION P
TM-419
• After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-421, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0115ZZ
TM-420
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10D]

B
Engine MR20DE
Applied model C
Axle 2WD/4WD
Transaxle model RE0F10D
D position 2.631 – 0.378 TM
Transaxle gear ratio R position 1.960
Final drive 6.386
E
Recommended fluid MA-59, "Fluids and Lubricants"
Fluid capacity litter (Imp qt) Approx. 7.9 (7)
Shift Characteristics INFOID:0000000010589415 F
Unit: rpm
CVT input speed G

Throttle position Shift pattern
At 40 km/h (25 MPH) At 60 km/h (37 MPH)
“D” position (Normal) 1,720 – 3,400 1,780 – 3,800
2/8 H
“D” position (ECO mode*) 1,720 – 3,400 1,780 – 3,800
“D” position (Normal) 3,200 – 4,250 3,780 – 5,920
8/8
“D” position (ECO mode*) 3,200 – 4,250 3,780 – 5,920 I
*: With ECO mode switch
NOTE:
Lock-up is engaged at the vehicle speed of approximately 14 km/h (8 MPH) to 130 km/h (81 MPH). J
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000010589416
Unit: rpm K
Stall speed 2,520 – 2,980
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000010589417 L
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “A” between the converter housing and torque converter 14.4 (0.567) M
Heater Thermostat INFOID:0000000010589418
Standard
N
Valve lift More than 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
Reference value O
Valve opening temperature 69 – 73°C (156 – 163°F)
Minimum valve lift 5.0 mm/85°C (0.197 in/185°F)
P
TM-421
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [CVT: RE0F10G]
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

APPLICATION NOTICE
Information INFOID:0000000010497498
• Both “VDC” and “ESP” are used in this manual. These indicate the same system.
• In this manual, “Idling Stop System” is referred to as “Stop/Start System”.
TM-422
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010335370
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: TM
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000010497493
K
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables. L
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing M
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Open driver door. P
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open.
5. Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open.
NOTE:
• Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed.
TM-423
PRECAUTIONS
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
windshield.
PIIB3706J
NOTE:
NOTE:
SEF289H
NOTE:
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

TM-424
PRECAUTIONS
M9R engine : 4 minutes A
B
CAUTION:
5. Remove 12V battery terminal. C
CAUTION:
TM
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied. E
3. Open the hood.
F
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of G
CAUTION: H
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Replacement INFOID:0000000010245512
I
CAUTION:
• To replace TCM, refer to TM-500, "Description".
• To replace transaxle assembly, refer to TM-502, "Description". J
General Precautions INFOID:0000000010245513
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable K

from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the CVT assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned L
OFF.
SEF289H
N
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from TCM, do not damage pin terminals (bend or break). O
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
P
AAT470A
TM-425
PRECAUTIONS
• Perform TCM input/output signal inspection and check
whether TCM functions normally or not before replacing TCM.
Refer to TM-471, "Reference Value".
MEF040DA
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE”.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
JSBIA1315ZZ
• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the CVT fluid.
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine INFOID:0000000010245514
The TCM and ECM have an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to
warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid
valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector INFOID:0000000010245515
REMOVAL
TM-426
PRECAUTIONS
• Rotate bayonet ring counterclockwise. Pull out CVT unit har-
ness connector upward and remove it. A
SCIA6685J
TM
INSTALLATION
1. Align marking on CVT unit harness connector terminal with
marking on bayonet ring. Insert CVT unit harness connector.
2. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise. E
JPDIA0294ZZ
H
3. Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until marking on CVT unit har-
ness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit on bayo-
net ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition).
I
K
JPDIA0295ZZ
CAUTION: L
• Securely align marking on CVT unit harness connector
terminal body with bayonet ring slit . Then, be careful
not to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Never mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent por- M
tion.
O
JPDIA0296ZZ
TM-427
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name
1. KV311039S0 CVT fluid changing and adjustment
Charging pipe set
2. KV31103920*
O-ring
JSDIA1844ZZ
KV38107900 Installing drive shaft

Protector
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
PDIA1183J
*: The O-ring as a unit part is set as a SST.

Tool number
Description
Tool name
Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts
PBIC0190E
Lint-free paper Cleaning transaxle
JSDIA4746ZZ
Oil seal remover Removing each oil seal
JSDIA4998ZZ
TM-428
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
Tool number
Description
Tool name A
Drift Installing differential side oil seal
a: 56 mm (2.20 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. B
C
NT115
Drift Installing converter housing oil

a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. seal TM
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
NT115
F
TM-429
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010245518
JSDIA5354GB
TM-430
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT shift selector assembly Center console, under Engine room A

Engine room, LH Transaxle assembly
B
• Manual mode downshift signal
• Manual mode upshift signal C
• Manual mode signal
• Non-manual mode signal
Combination meter • ECO mode switch signal*3 TM
• Shift position signal
• Manual mode shift refusal signal
Refer to MWI-6, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca- E
tion.
Shift position indicator
TM-438, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator"
(On the combination meter)
F
Stop/start indicator lamp
EC9-24, "Stop/Start Indicator Lamp"
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) G
EC9-23, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp"
ECO mode switch*3 DMS-5, "ECO Mode Switch"

Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication. H
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
Refer to BCS-7, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
I
• Engine and CVT integrated control signal
NOTE:
General term for the communication (torque-down permission, torque- J
down request, etc.) exchanged between the ECM and TCM.
• Engine speed signal
• Engine coolant temperature signal
• Accelerator pedal position signal K
ECM • Closed throttle position signal
• Idle signal
• Stop/start readiness signal*1 L
• Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal
• Stop/start enable OK signal*1
• ECO mode signal*3 M
Refer to EC9-12, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion.
Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication. N
• ABS operation signal
• TCS operation signal
• VDC operation signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • ABS malfunction signal O
• Vehicle speed signal
• Decel G signal
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion. P
Manual mode switch TM-438, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch"
G sensor TM-437, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : G SENSOR"
TCM TM-432, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"
Electric oil pump relay TM-438, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Electric Oil Pump Relay"
TM-431
COMPONENT PARTS
Transmission range switch TM-432, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"
Input speed sensor TM-434, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"
Electric oil pump TM-438, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Electric Oil Pump"
Primary speed sensor TM-433, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor"
CVT unit connector —
Output speed sensor TM-433, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"
CVT fluid temperature sensor*2 TM-434, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor"
Primary pressure sensor*2 TM-435, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Sensor"
Secondary pressure sensor*2 TM-435, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor"
Line pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-437, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Control
valve Primary pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-436, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Secondary pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-436, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid TM-437, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
valve*2 Valve"
Select solenoid valve*2 TM-436, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve"
*1: With stop/start system

*2: These components are included in control valve assembly.
*3: For Europe (LHD), Russia, Ukraine, Kazakhstan, and Australia.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000010245519
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply.
• The vehicle driving status is judged based on the signals from the
sensors, switches, and other control units, and the optimal tran-
saxle control is performed.
• For TCM control items, refer to TM-448, "CVT CONTROL SYS-
TEM : System Description".
JSDIA4183ZZ
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000010245520
• The transmission range switch is installed to upper part of tran-

saxle case.
• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position.
JSDIA4184ZZ
TM-432
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000010245521
A
• The primary speed sensor is installed to side cover of transaxle.
• The primary speed sensor detects primary pulley speed.
B
TM
JSDIA3073ZZ
• The primary speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM E
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000010245522

K
• The output speed sensor is installed to back side of transaxle.

• The output speed sensor detects final gear speed. L
JSDIA3073ZZ
TM-433
COMPONENT PARTS
• The output speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000010245523
• The input speed sensor is installed to the front side of transaxle

case.
• The input speed sensor detects input shaft speed.
JSDIA3074ZZ
• The input speed sensor generates an ON-OFF pulse signal according to the rotating body speed. TCM
JSDIA1824GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000010245524
• The CVT fluid temperature sensor is installed to control valve.

• The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects CVT fluid temperature in oil pan.
TM-434
COMPONENT PARTS
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor, and changes the signal voltage by converting changes in the
CVT fluid temperature to a resistance value. TCM evaluates the CVT fluid temperature from the signal volt- A
age value.
TM
JSDIA1825GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000010245525 G
• The primary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.

• The primary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the primary pulley. H
• When pressure is applied to the ceramic device in the primary pressure sensor, the ceramic device is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the primary pressure from its voltage change. Voltage
is increased along with pressure increase.
I
M
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000010245526 N
• The secondary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the secondary pulley.
O
TM-435
COMPONENT PARTS
• When pressure is applied to the metal diaphragm in the secondary pressure sensor, the metal diaphragm is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the secondary pressure from its voltage change. Volt-
age is increased along with pressure increase.
JSDIA1831GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010245527
• The primary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The primary pressure solenoid valve controls the primary reducing valve. For information about the primary
reducing valve, refer to TM-444, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The primary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve
[N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
is not energized.
JSDIA3647GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010245528
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The secondary pressure solenoid valve controls the secondary reducing valve. For information about the
secondary reducing valve, refer to TM-444, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The secondary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid
valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
is not energized.
JSDIA3647GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Select Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010245529
• The select solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The select solenoid valve adjusts the forward clutch engaging pressure and the reverse brake engaging
pressure. For information about the forward clutch and reverse brake, refer to TM-444, "TRANSAXLE :
Component Description".
TM-436
COMPONENT PARTS
• The select solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (nor-
mal high) type]. A
NOTE:
B
• The N/H (normal high) type produces hydraulic control when the
coil is not energized. C
JSDIA3647GB
TM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010245530
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the torque converter clutch control valve. For information E
about the torque converter clutch control valve, refer to TM-444, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve utilizes a linear sole-
noid valve [N/L (normal low) type]. F
NOTE:
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro- G
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized. H
JSDIA3648GB
I
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000010245531
• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.

• The line pressure solenoid valve controls the pressure regulator valve. For information about the pressure J
regulator valve, refer to TM-444, "TRANSAXLE : Component Description".
• The line pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/
H (normal high) type].
K
NOTE:
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro- L
is not energized. M
JSDIA3647GB
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : G SENSOR INFOID:0000000010304575

N
• G sensor detects front/rear G and inclination applied to the vehicle.

• G sensor converts front/rear G and inclination applied to the vehi- O
cle to voltage signal. TCM evaluates front/rear G and inclination
angle of the vehicle from the voltage signal.
P
JSDIA3076ZZ
TM-437
COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Electric Oil Pump INFOID:0000000010304576
• It is operated with the signal from TCM during stop/start operation.

Oil pressure required for restart of the engine is obtained instead of
the mechanical oil pump.
: Electric oil pump
• During operation, the status signal (Duty) is sent to TCM.
JSDIA5233ZZ
Electric oil pump status signal characteristics

Status signal (Duty) Condition
0% Electric oil pump power OFF
10 % —
20 % Overheat protection
30 % In normal stop
40 % In activation
50 % In normal operation
60 – 100 % Possible malfunction
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Electric Oil Pump Relay INFOID:0000000010304577
• The electric oil pump relay is deactivated when the vehicle speed reaches 11 km/h (7 MPH) or more and
becomes activated when it reaches 6 km/h (4 MPH) or less.
• It is ON with the signal from TCM. It is ready for operation of the electric oil pump by TCM.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000010497871
• The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position

select switch (upshift/downshift)] is installed in the CVT shift selec-
tor assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate
side or manual shift gate side) of the selector lever and transmits a
manual mode signal or a not manual mode signal to the combina-
tion meter. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-
manual mode signal from the combination meter.
• The position select switch (upshift) detects that the selector lever is
shifted to the upshift side of the manual shift gate and transmits a
manual mode upshift signal to the combination meter. Then, the JSDIA5308ZZ
TCM receives a manual mode upshift signal from the combination
meter.
• The position select switch (downshift) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the downshift side of the
manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode downshift signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM
receives a manual mode downshift signal from the combination meter.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator INFOID:0000000010245533
TCM transmits shift position signal to combination meter via CAN communication. The actual shift position is
displayed on combination meter according to the signal.
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM-438
COMPONENT PARTS
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010245534
TM
JSDIA5309ZZ
J
CVT shift selector assembly Brake pedal, upper
K
Shift lock solenoid TM-439, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Solenoid"
Park position switch TM-439, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Park Position Switch"
L
Stop lamp switch TM-439, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch"
M
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Park Position Switch INFOID:0000000010245535
The park position switch detects that the selector lever is in “P” position.
N
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Solenoid INFOID:0000000010245536
The shift lock solenoid operates according to the signal from the BCM and moves the lock lever. For shift lock
operation, refer to TM-445, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description". O
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch INFOID:0000000010245537
• The stop lamp switch turns ON when the brake pedal is depressed. P
• When the stop lamp switch turns ON, the BCM is energized.
TM-439
TRANSAXLE
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000010245538
JSDIA3719ZZ
Converter housing Oil pump Planetary gear

Control valve Oil pan Chain belt
Primary pulley Secondary pulley Side cover
Transaxle case Differential case Final gear
Reduction gear Idler gear Output gear
Drive sprocket Torque converter Driven sprocket
Oil pump chain
TM-440
TRANSAXLE : Operation Status INFOID:0000000010245539
A
×: Engaged or applied.
Selector lever Parking mech- Forward Secondary
Reverse brake Primary pulley Steel belt Final drive
position anism clutch pulley B
P ×
R × × × × ×
N C
D × × × × ×
Ds × × × × ×
TM
TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism INFOID:0000000010245540
TORQUE CONVERTER (WITH LOCK-UP FUNCTION) E

In the same way as a conventional A/T, the torque converter is a system that increases the engine torque and
transmits the torque to the transaxle. A symmetrical 3-element, 1-stage, 2-phase type is used here.
F
OIL PUMP
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to increase
efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume in high-speed
zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of primary and second- G
ary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
PLANETARY GEAR
H
• A planetary gear type of forward/reverse selector mechanism is installed between the torque converter and
primary pulley.
• The power from the torque converter is input via the input shaft, operating a wet multi-plate clutch by means
of hydraulic pressure to switch between forward and reverse driving. I
Operation of Planetary gear
JSDIA2426GB
O
BELT & PULLEY
It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the chain belt
.The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of chain belt and pulley from low status to overdrive
status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pulley. P
Chain belt
TM-441
The chain belt consists of approximately 150 locker pins and
1,000 link plates . Chains are rotated by locker pins sandwiched by
pulleys. This produces tension difference in chains among pulleys.
Accordingly, the power is transferred by the tension.
JSDIA3643ZZ
Pulley
The primary pulley (input shaft side) and the secondary pulley (output shaft side) have the shaft with slope
(fixed cone surface), movable sheave (movable cone surface that can move in the axial direction) and oil pres-
sure chamber at the back of the movable sheave.
The movable sheave slides on the shaft to change the groove width of the pulley. Input signals of engine load
(accelerator pedal opening), primary pulley speed and secondary pulley speed change the operation pres-
sures of the primary pulley and the secondary pulley, and controls the pulley groove width.
JSDIA2429GB
FINAL DRIVE AND DIFFERENTIAL
TM-442
The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and sec-
ondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears. A
The lubrication oil is the same as the CVT fluid which lubricates the entire transaxle.
TM
JSDIA2427GB
TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System INFOID:0000000010245541 G
Oil pressure required for operation of the transaxle transmission mechanism is generated by oil pump, oil
pressure control valve, solenoid valve, etc. During idling stop, the electric oil pump is activated to generate oil H
pressure required for restarting the engine.
JSDIA5339GB
TM-443
TRANSAXLE : Component Description INFOID:0000000010245542
Part name Function

Torque converter Increases engine torque and transmits it to the transaxle.
Utilizes a vane-type oil pump that is driven by the engine through the oil pump drive chain in order to
increase efficiency of pump discharge volume in low-speed zone and optimize pump discharge volume
Oil pump
in high-speed zone. Discharged oil from oil pump is transmitted to control valve. It is used as the oil of
primary and secondary pulley operation, the oil of clutch operation, and the lubricant for each part.
The forward clutch is wet and multiple plate type clutch that consists of clutch drum, piston, drive plate,
Forward clutch and driven plate. It is a clutch to move the vehicle forward by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and directly connecting sun gear and input shaft.
The reverse brake is a wet multiple-plate type brake that consists of transaxle case, piston, drive plate,
Reverse brake and driven plate. It is a brake to move the vehicle in reverse by activating piston hydraulically, engaging
plates, and fixing planetary gear.
The internal gear is directly connected to forward clutch drum. It is a gear that moves the outer edge of
Internal gear pinion planet of planet carrier. It transmits power to move the vehicle in reverse when the planet carrier
is fixed.
Composed of a carrier, pinion planet, and pinion shaft. This gear fixes and releases the planet carrier in
Planet carrier
order to switch between forward and reverse driving.
Sun gear is a set part with planet carrier and internal gear. It transmits transmitted force to primary fixed
Sun gear sheave. It rotates in forward or reverse direction according to activation of either forward clutch or re-
verse brake.
The input shaft is directly connected to forward clutch drum and transmits traction force from torque con-
Input shaft verter. In shaft center, there are holes for hydraulic distribution to primary pulley and hydraulic distribution
for lockup ON/OFF.
Primary pulley It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the chain
belt. The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to
Secondary pulley
overdrive status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and
Chain belt secondary pulley.
Manual shaft
Parking rod When the manual shaft is in the P position, the parking rod that is linked to the manual shaft rotates the
parking pole. When the parking pole rotates, it engages with the parking gear, fixing the parking gear. As
Parking pawl a result, the secondary pulley that is integrated with the parking gear is fixed.
Parking gear
Output gear
Idler gear The deceleration gears are composed of 2 stages: primary deceleration (output gear, idler gear pair) and
Reduction gear secondary deceleration (reduction gear, final gear pair). All of these gears are helical gears.
Differential
Torque converter regulator Adjusts the feed pressure to the torque converter to the optimum pressure corresponding to the driving
valve condition.
Adjusts the discharge pressure from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) corresponding
Pressure regulator valve
to the driving condition.
Torque converter clutch
Adjusts the torque converter engage and disengage pressures.
control valve
Manual valve Distributes the clutch operation pressure to each circuit according to the selector lever position.
Secondary reducing valve Reduces line pressure and adjusts secondary pressure.
Primary reducing valve Reduces line pressure and adjusts primary pressure.
Reduces line pressure and adjusts pilot pressure to the solenoid valves listed below.
Pilot valve A • Secondary pressure solenoid valve
Pilot valve B Reduces pilot pressure and adjusts pilot pressure to the torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM

TM-444
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010245543
A
CVT FLUID COOLER SCHEMATIC
TM
F
JSDIA5444GB
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
G
CVT Oil Warmer
• The CVT oil warmer is installed on the front part of transaxle
assembly. H
• When engine is started while engine and CVT are cold, engine
coolant temperature rises more quickly than CVT fluid tempera-
ture. CVT oil warmer is provided with two circuits for CVT and
engine coolant respectively so that warmed engine coolant warms I
CVT quickly. This helps shorten CVT warming up time, improving
fuel economy.
• A cooling effect is obtained when CVT fluid temperature is high. J
JSDIA5170ZZ
CVT Fluid Cooler K

• The CVT fluid cooler is installed to the vehicle front.
• CVT fluid is cooled by driving blast while driving the vehicle.
L
N
JSDIA5255ZZ
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

O
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010245544
• The shift lock system prevents the select lever from being moved from “P” position to other positions due to
P
a driver's improper operation and prevents the occurrence of an abrupt start.
• Shift lock can be released when the following conditions are satisfied.
- Ignition switch is ON.
- Brake pedal is depressed. (Stop lamp switch is ON)
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT P POSITION
When brake pedal is not depressed (no selector operation allowed)
TM-445
When the brake pedal is not depressed with the ignition switch ON,
the shift lock solenoid is OFF (not energized) and the solenoid rod
is extended with spring.
The connecting lock lever is located at the position shown in the
figure when the solenoid rod is extended. It prevents the movement
of the detent rod . The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P”
position for this reason.
JSDIA2817ZZ
When brake pedal is depressed (selector lever operation allowed)

The shift lock solenoid is turned ON (energized) when the brake
pedal is depressed with the ignition switch ON. The solenoid rod
is compressed with the electromagnetic force. The connecting lock
lever rotates when the solenoid rod is compressed. Therefore, the
detent rod can be moved. The selector lever can be shifted to
other positions for this reason.
JSDIA2818ZZ
FORCIBLE RELEASE OF SHIFT LOCK

• When battery voltage decreases or an electrical/mechanical mal-
function occurs in the shift lock system, the selector lever cannot
be operated in “P” position. When shift lock release rod is
pressed in this state, lock lever is forcibly rotated, and then it
becomes possible to release shift lock.
: Shift lock solenoid

: Detent rod
JSDIA2819ZZ
• To release the shift lock forcibly and shift the selector lever from “P” position to other positions, follow the
steps below.
2. Apply parking brake.
3. Press the shift lock release button with suitable tool.
4. Press and hold the selector lever knob button and move the
selector lever from “P” position to other positions while press the
shift lock release button.
JSDIA5409ZZ
KEY LOCK SYSTEM

KEY LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010360483
KEY LOCK MECHANISM

The key is not set to LOCK when the selector lever is not selected to P position. This prevents the key from
being removed from the key cylinder.
TM-446
Key lock status
The slider in the key cylinder is moved to the left side of the fig- A
ure when the selector lever is in any position other than P position.
The rotator that rotates together with the key cannot be rotated
for this reason. The key cannot be removed from the key cylinder B
because it cannot be turned to LOCK .
JPDIA0108ZZ TM
Key unlock status
The slider in the key cylinder is moved to the right side of the
figure when the selector lever is in P position and the finger is E
removed from the selector button. The rotator can be rotated for
this reason. The key can be removed from the key cylinder
because it can be turned to LOCK . F
JPDIA0109ZZ
H
TM-447
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010245545
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSDIA5340GB
MAIN CONTROL CONTENTS OF TCM
Controls Reference
Line pressure control TM-455, "LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description"
Shift control TM-455, "SHIFT CONTROL : System Description"
Select control TM-459, "SELECT CONTROL : System Description"
Lock-up control TM-459, "LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description"
ECO mode control DMS-6, "ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description"
Stop/start system TM-461, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description"
Fail-safe TM-478, "Fail-safe"
Self-diagnosis function TM-466, "CONSULT Function"
Communication function with CONSULT TM-466, "CONSULT Function"
TM-448
SYSTEM
LIST OF CONTROL ITEMS AND INPUT/OUTPUT
A
Line pressure Lock-up con- Fail-safe func-
Control Item Shift control Select control
control trol tion*
Engine torque signal B
× × × × ×
(CAN communication)
Engine speed signal
× × × × ×
(CAN communication) C
Accelerator pedal position signal
× × × ×
(CAN communication)
Idle signal TM
× × ×
(CAN communication)
Closed throttle position signal
× × ×
(CAN communication) E
Input
Stop lamp switch signal
× × × ×
(CAN communication)
Primary pressure sensor × F
Secondary pressure sensor × × ×
CVT fluid temperature sensor × × × × ×
G
Primary speed sensor × × × × ×
Output speed sensor × × × ×
Input speed sensor × × × × × H
Transmission range switch × × × × ×
Line pressure solenoid valve × × × ×
Primary pressure solenoid valve × × × I
Torque converter clutch solenoid
× ×
valve
Output J
Secondary pressure solenoid valve × × ×
Select solenoid valve × × ×
Shift position indicator K
×
(CAN communication)
*: If these input/output signals show errors, TCM activates the fail-safe function.
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010354549
L
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged. M
N
Fail-safe function
TM-449
SYSTEM

• Stop/start system prohibited
P062F • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation —
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay
played
• Start is slow
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation
played
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
−35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
P0712 • Selector shock is large
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation —
• Start is slow
−35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Start is slow
P0715 —
• Start is slow
P0717 —
TM-450
SYSTEM
A
• Start is slow
P0740 —
• Stop/start system prohibited B
• Start is slow
C
P0743 —
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation TM
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed E
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow F
P0746 • Lock-up is not performed —
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay G
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side H
I
• Start is slow
• Selector shock is large J
• Start is slow
P0778 —
K
• Start is slow
P0779 —
• Lock-up is not performed L
P0826 Manual mode is not activated
P0841 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation — M
P0847 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation — N
P0848 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation — O
P084C • Not changed from normal driving
P084D • Not changed from normal driving P
• Start is slow
TM-451
SYSTEM
• Start is slow
P0890
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P0965 • Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay
• Stop/start system prohibited When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P1586 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation —
P188E —
• When the vehicle is in stop/start system operation and
the engine stops, restart the engine immediately
TM-452
SYSTEM
A
P188F —
the engine stops, restart the engine immediately B
P1890 —
C
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed TM
P2765 —
E
• Start is slow
• Vehicle speed is not increased When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side F
P2813 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation
G
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay H
P2814 —
I
P2815 — J
• Start is slow K
U0073 • Lock-up is not performed —
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation L
• Start is slow M
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation N
U0140 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation — O
U0141 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation —
P

TM-453
SYSTEM
• Start is slow
U110F • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation —
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000010354550
The TCM has the following protection control.
When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased.
Control
tion
Vehicle behavior in
control
tion
Control
Vehicle behavior in
control
tion
Control
TM-454
SYSTEM
control reverse. A
tion engaged.)
B
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010245549
C
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TM
L
JSDIA4122GB
DESCRIPTION
Highly accurate line pressure control and secondary pressure control reduces friction for improvement of fuel M
economy.
Normal Oil Pressure Control
Appropriate line pressure and secondary pressure suitable for driving condition are determined based on the N
accelerator pedal position, engine speed, primary pulley (input) speed, secondary pulley (output) speed, vehi-
cle speed, input torque, stop lamp switch signal, transmission range switch signal, lock-up signal, power volt-
age, target shift ratio, oil temperature, oil pressure, and manual mode signal. O
Secondary Pressure Feedback Control
In normal oil pressure control and oil pressure control in shifting, highly accurate secondary pressure is deter-
mined by detecting the secondary pressure using an oil pressure sensor and by feedback control. P
SHIFT CONTROL
SHIFT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010245550
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TM-455
SYSTEM
JSDIA4101GB
DESCRIPTION
To select the gear ratio that can give the driving force to meet driver's intent or vehicle situation, the vehicle
driving condition such as vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position is detected and the most appropriate
gear ratio is selected and the shifting method before reaching the speed is determined. The information is out-
put to the primary pressure solenoid valve and secondary pressure solenoid valve to control the line pressure
input/output to the pulley, to determine the pulley (movable pulley) position and to control the gear position.
Shift Position Function
• D Position (Normal)
TM-456
SYSTEM
Gear shifting is performed in all shifting ranges from the lowest to
the highest gear ratio. A
SCIA1953E
TM
• Ds Position
Pressing down the accelerator pedal allows to drive the vehicle
with a feeling of A/T-like gear shifting.. E
JSDIA3708GB
• M Position (Manual Mode)

When the selector lever is put in the manual shift gate side, the I
fixed changing gear line is set. By moving the selector lever to +
side or .side, the manual mode switch is changed over, and shift
change like M/T becomes possible following the changing gear set
line step by step. J
JSDIA4104GB L
- Manual Mode Information

The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the combination meter if the TCM refuses the M
transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever shifts to UP side (+ side) or DOWN
side (−side). The combination meter blinks shift indicator on the combination meter and sounds the buzzer to
indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the TCM does not
transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following. N
• When the selector lever shifts to DOWN side (−side) while driving in M1.
• When the selector lever shifts to UP (+ side) side while driving in M7.
Blipping Control O
Using engine torque, the blipping control enables a faster and more responsive gear shifting by compensating
inertia torque generated from the rotational change during gear shifting in real time.
P
Operation
• The blipping control is activated when shifting up/down in manual mode or when shifting up/down in “Ds”
position.
NOTE:
The blipping control is not activated when the vehicle is in the following conditions:
• When CAN communication is abnormal.
• During the retard inhibit signal transmission from ECM within the engine-CVT integrated control.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 20°C (68°F).
TM-457
SYSTEM
• CVT fluid temperature is more than 120°C (248°F).
• Vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h (13 MPH).
• When ABS, TCS or VDC is active.
• During wheel spin.
• ECM selects blipping control or normal shift control according to the gear position, the selector lever posi-
tion, etc.
• The blipping control is activated when ECM judges it controllable after receiving a control permit signal from
TCM.
• ECM controls engine torque, based on generated inertia torque.
JSDIA2841GB
Hill Climbing And Descending Control

If a downhill is detected with the accelerator pedal is released, the system performs downshift to increase the
engine brake force so that vehicle may not be accelerated more than necessary. If a climbing hill is detected,
the system improves the acceleration performance in re-acceleration by limiting the gear shift range on the
high side.
NOTE:
For engine brake control on a downhill, the control can be stopped with CONSULT.
JSDIA2060GB
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed 4/8 or more in D position, CVT performs step shifting to allow the
vehicle speed and engine speed to increase simultaneously. This improves the feel of acceleration and
enables the fuel economy by preventing unnecessary rise in engine speed, compared to the conventional
shifting.
TM-458
SYSTEM
TM
E
JSDIA5273GB
SELECT CONTROL
F
SELECT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010245551
SYSTEM DIAGRAM G
JSDIA3711GB
O
DESCRIPTION
Based on accelerator pedal angle, engine speed, primary pulley speed, and the input speed, the optimum
operating pressure is set to reduce impact of a selector lever operation while shifting from “N” (“P”) to “D” (“R”)
position. P
LOCK-UP CONTROL
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010245552
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TM-459
SYSTEM
JSDIA4123GB
DESCRIPTION
• Controls for improvement of the transmission efficiency by engaging the torque converter clutch in the
torque converter and eliminating slip of the converter. Achieves comfortable driving with slip control of the
torque converter clutch.
• The oil pressure feed circuit for the torque converter clutch piston chamber is connected to the torque con-
verter clutch control valve. The torque converter clutch control valve is switched by the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve with the signal from TCM. This controls the oil pressure circuit, which is supplied to the
torque converter clutch piston chamber, to the release side or engagement side.
• If the CVT fluid temperature is low or the vehicle is in fail-safe mode due to malfunction, lock-up control is
prohibited.
Lock-up engagement
In lock-up engagement, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control
valve locked up to generate the lock-up apply pressure. This pushes the torque converter clutch piston for
engagement.
Lock-up release condition
In lock-up release, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control valve
non-locked up to drain the lock-up apply pressure. This does not engage the torque converter clutch piston.
ECO MODE CONTROL
ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000010380737
• Driving mode that selects the shift schedule with priority on fuel economy which gives low engine revolution.
• For details on ECO mode control, refer to DMS-6, "ECO MODE CONTROL : System Description".
• The gear shift line is not changed with the control mode change for the following conditions:
- When the selector lever is in “M” position.
- When the selector lever is in “Ds” position.
FAIL-SAFE
TM-460
SYSTEM
If a malfunction occurs in the system of CVT during ECO mode, the ECO mode indicator turns OFF and the
control switches to the normal mode control. A
STOP/START SYSTEM
STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010304582
B
• In the stop/start system, ECM performs integrated control based on the information from control units, sen-
sors and switches. For information, refer to EC9-39, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description (M/T
models)". C
• stop/start system operation OK is evaluated based on signals from sensors and switches.
• When stop/start system operation OK is determined, stop/start enable OK signal is sent to ECM through
CAN communication. TM
• stop/start readiness signal is received from ECM through CAN communication and the electric oil pump is
driven based on the signal.
• The electric oil pump relay is turned ON to prepare operation of the electric oil pump.
• The electric oil pump is driven in duty control. E
STOP/START OPERATION PERMISSION CONDITION EVALUATED BY TCM

When TCM detects the vehicle status and stop/start system operation OK is determined, stop/start enable sig-
nal is sent to ECM through CAN communication. F
Item Description Permission conditions

Transmission range switch Selector lever position “P”, “N”, or “D” position
G
G sensor Gradient ±14%

CVT fluid temperature sensor CVT fluid temperature 25 – 110°C H
Malfunction Normal
Electric oil pump 5 seconds or more from cancellation of previous stop/
Interval time
start system operation I
Secondary pressure Control oil pressure 0.03 MPa or more
TCM INDICATION CHARACTERISTICS J
TCM indication signal (Duty) Condition

0 – 5% Disconnection or battery short-circuit K
5 – 15% Indicating stop of electric oil pump
15 – 85% Indicating operation of electric oil pump
L
85 – 95% Indicating operation of electric oil pump (Maximum power)
95 – 100% Short to ground
M
TM-461
SYSTEM
TIME CHART
JSDIA5443GB
TM-462
A
This is an on board diagnosis system which records diagnosis information related to the exhaust gases. It B
detects malfunctions related to sensors and actuators. The malfunctions are indicated by means of the mal-
function indicator lamp (MIL) and are stored as DTC in the ECU memory. The diagnosis information can be
checked using a diagnosis tool (GST: Generic Scan Tool).
C
Function of OBD INFOID:0000000010245557
The GST is connected to the diagnosis connector on the vehicle and communicates with the on-board control
units to perform diagnosis. The diagnosis connector is the same as for CONSULT. Refer to GI-49, "Descrip- TM
tion".
TM-463
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Diagnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagno-
sis INFOID:0000000010245558
NOTE:
“Start the engine and turn OFF the ignition switch after warm-up.” This is defined as 1 trip.
When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC. In these diagnoses, some illuminate MIL and
some do not. Refer to TM-485, "DTC Index".
When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage. <1
trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again in next driving, TCM memorizes DTC. When DTC is memorized, MIL
lights. <2 trip>
“Trip” of the “2 trip detection diagnosis” indicates the driving mode that executes self-diagnosis during driving.
×: Check possible —: Check not possible
DTC at the 1st trip DTC MIL

Item Display at the Display at the Display at the Display at the Illumination at Illumination at
1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip the 1st trip the 2nd trip
— — × — × —
× — — × — ×
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of 1st Trip INFOID:0000000010245559
2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL

• The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
• When a malfunction is detected at the 1st trip, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this
stage. If the same malfunction is not detected at the 2nd trip (conforming to necessary driving conditions),
DTC at the 1st trip is erased from TCM. If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes
DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• The DTC of the 1st trip is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. Since detection of DTC at the
1st trip does not illuminate MIL, warning for a problem is not given to a driver.
• For procedure to delete DTC and 1st trip DTC from TCM, refer to TM-466, "CONSULT Function".
• If DTC of the 1st trip is detected, it is necessary to check the cause according to the “Diagnosis flow”. Refer
to TM-497, "Work Flow".
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000010245560
• TCM not only detects DTC, but also sends the MIL signal to ECM through CAN communication. ECM sends
the MIL signal to the combination meter through CAN communication according to the signal, and illumi-
nates MIL.
• For malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) description, refer to EC9-23, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp".
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System INFOID:0000000010245561
RELATION BETWEEN DTC AT 1ST TRIP/DTC/MIL AND DRIVING CONDITIONS (FOR 2 TRIP DE-
TECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL)
• When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage.
• If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• Then, MIL goes after driving the vehicle for 3 trips under “Driving condition B” without malfunction.
• DTC is displayed until 40 trips of “Driving condition A” are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction.
DTC is erased when 40 trips are satisfied.
TM-464
• When the self-diagnosis result is acceptable at the 2nd trip (conforming to driving condition B), DTC of the
1st trip is erased. A
COUNTER SYSTEM LIST
Item Driving condition Trip B

MIL (OFF) B 3
DTC (clear) A 40
C
DTC at 1st trip (clear) B 1
DRIVING CONDITION
TM
Driving condition A
Driving condition A is the driving condition that provides warm-up.
• Engine speed is 400 rpm or more. E
• After start of the engine, the water temperature increased by 20°C (36°F) or more.
• The ignition switch was changed from ON to OFF. F
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the A counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the A counter.
• When MIL goes off due to the malfunction and the A counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased. G
Driving condition B
Driving condition B is the driving condition that performs all diagnoses once. H
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (43 – 75 MPH) continued for 60 seconds or more. I
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less and idle determination ON continued for 12
seconds or more. J
• After start of the engine, 22 minutes or more have passed.
• The condition that the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more continued for 10 seconds or more in total.
NOTE: K
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the B counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the B counter.
• When the B counter reaches 3 without malfunction, MIL goes off. L
• When the B counter is counted once without detecting the same malfunction after TCM memorizes DTC of
the 1st trip, DTC of the 1st trip is erased.
M
TM-465
TIME CHART
JSDIA1868GB
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010245562
APPLICABLE ITEM
Conditions Function
Work Support The settings for ECU functions can be changed.
Self Diagnostic Results The ECU self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The ECU input/output data is displayed in real time.
CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
TM-466
Conditions Function
A
ECU Identification The ECU part number is displayed.
CALIB DATA The calibration data status of TCM can be checked.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B

Refer to TM-485, "DTC Index".
DTC at 1st trip and method to read DTC
• DTC (P0705, P0712, P0720, etc.) is specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6. C
• DTC and DTC at 1st trip are displayed on “Self Diagnostic results” of CONSULT.
When DTC is currently detected, “CRNT” is displayed. If “PAST” is displayed, it shows a malfunction
occurred in the past. The trip number of drive without malfunction of concerned DTC can be confirmed with TM
“IGN counter” inside “FFD”.
• When the DTC at the 1st trip is detected, “1t” is displayed.
DTC deletion method E
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left ON after repair, turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 10 seconds or more. Then,
turn the ignition ON again. (Engine stop)
F
1. Touch “TRANSMISSION” of CONSULT.
2. Touch “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Touch “Erase”. (DTC memorized in TCM is erased.)
G
IGN counter
The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD” and the number of times of satisfied “Driving condition A” is dis-
played after normal recovery of DTC. Refer to TM-464, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System".
• If malfunction (DTC) is currently detected, “0” is displayed. H
• After normal recovery, every time “Driving condition A” is satisfied, the display value increases from 1 → 2 →
3...38 → 39.
• When MIL turns OFF due to the malfunction and the counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased. I
NOTE:
The counter display of “40” cannot be checked.
DATA MONITOR J
NOTE:
K
VSP SENSOR (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed calculated from the CVT output shaft speed.
L
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed signal (ABS) received through CAN communication.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR (rpm) Displays the input speed calculated from the pulse signal of the input speed sensor.
Displays the primary pulley speed calculated from the pulse signal of the primary M
PRI SPEED SEN (rpm)
speed sensor.
Displays the secondary pulley speed calculated from the pulse signal of the output
SEC REV SENSOR (rpm)
speed sensor. N
ENG SPEED SIG (rpm) Displays the engine speed received through CAN communication.
SEC PRESSURE SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the secondary pressure sensor.
PRI PRESSURE SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the primary pressure sensor.
O
ATF TEMP SEN (V) Displays the signal voltage of the CVT fluid temperature sensor.
G SENSOR (G) Displays the signal voltage of the G sensor.
P
VIGN SEN (V) Displays the battery voltage applied to TCM.
PVING VOLT (V) Displays the backup voltage of TCM.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed recognized by TCM.
INPUT REV (rpm) Displays the input shaft speed of CVT recognized by TCM.
PRI SPEED (rpm) Displays the primary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
TM-467
SEC SPEED (rpm) Displays the secondary pulley speed recognized by TCM.
ENG SPEED (rpm) Displays the engine speed recognized by TCM.
Displays the speed difference between the input shaft speed of CVT and the engine
SLIP REV (rpm)
speed.
Displays the pulley gear ratio calculated from primary pulley speed/secondary pulley
PULLEY GEAR RATIO
speed.
Displays the acceleration and deceleration speed of the vehicle calculated from ve-
G SPEED (G)
hicle speed change.
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 (deg) Displays the estimated throttle position received through CAN communication.
VENG TRQ (Nm) Display the engine torque recognized by TCM.
PRI TRQ (Nm) Display the input shaft torque of CVT.
TRQ RTO Display the torque ratio of torque converter.
Displays the secondary pressure calculated from the signal voltage of the secondary
SEC PRESSURE (MPa)
pressure sensor.
Displays the primary pressure calculated from the signal voltage of the primary pres-
PRI PRESSURE (MPa)
sure sensor.
Displays the CVT fluid temperature calculated from the signal voltage of the CVT flu-
FLUID TEMP (°C or °F)
id temperature sensor.
Displays the target primary pulley speed calculated from processing of gear shift
DSR REV (rpm)
control.
TGT PLLY GR RATIO Displays the target gear ratio of the pulley from processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve calcu-
LU PRS (MPa)
lated from oil pressure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the line pressure solenoid valve calculated from
LINE PRS (MPa)
oil pressure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the primary pressure solenoid valve calculated
TRGT PRI PRESSURE (MPa)
Displays the target oil pressure of the select solenoid valve calculated from oil pres-
TRGT SELECT PRESSURE (MPa)
sure processing of gear shift control.
Displays the target oil pressure of the secondary pressure solenoid valve calculated
TRGT SEC PRESSURE (MPa)
Displays the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid
ISOLT1 (A)
valve.
ISOLT2 (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid valve.
PRI SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the primary pressure solenoid valve.
SEC SOLENOID CURRENT (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the secondary pressure solenoid valve.
SELECT SOLENOID CUR-
(A) Displays the command current from TCM to the select solenoid valve.
RENT
Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid
SOLMON1 (A)
valve and displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid valve and
SOLMON2 (A)
displays the monitored value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the primary pressure solenoid valve
PRI SOL MON (A)
Monitors the command current from TCM to the secondary pressure solenoid valve
SEC SOL MON CURRENT (A)
Monitors the command current from TCM to the select solenoid valve and displays
SELECT SOL MON CURRENT (A)
the monitored value.
D POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (D position).
N POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (N position).
TM-468
A
R POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (R position).
P POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (P position).
L POSITION SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (L position). B
DS RANGE SW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the transmission range switch (Ds position).
Displays the reception status of the stop lamp switch signal received through CAN
BRAKESW (On/Off)
communication. C
Displays the reception status of the closed throttle position signal received through
IDLE SW (On/Off)
CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of the sport mode switch signal received through CAN TM
SPORT MODE SW (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ECO mode switch signal received through CAN
ECO MODE SW (On/Off)
communication. E
STRDWNSW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (down switch).
STRUPSW (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (up switch).
DOWNLVR (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the selector lever (down switch). F
UPLVR (On/Off) Displays the operation status of the selector lever (up switch).
NONMMODE (On/Off) Displays if the selector lever position is not at the manual shift gate.
G
MMODE (On/Off) Displays if the selector lever position is at the manual shift gate.
Displays the reception status of the TOW mode switch signal received through CAN
TOW MODE SW (On/Off)
communication. H
Displays the transaxle value of shift position signal transmitted via CAN communi-
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
cation.
Displays the transaxle status of the CVT warning lamp signal transmitted through I
CVT LAMP (On/Off)
CAN communication.
Displays the transaxle status of the SPORT indicator lamp signal transmitted
SPORT MODE IND (On/Off)
through CAN communication.
J
Displays the transaxle status of the manual mode signal transmitted through CAN
MANU MODE SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the shift position signal status from transmission range switch (Ds posi- K
DS RANGE SIGNAL (On/Off)
tion).
Displays the transaxle status of the ECO mode signal transmitted through CAN
ECO MODE SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
L
Displays the reception status of the VDC operation signal received through CAN
VDC ON (On/Off)
communication.
Displays the reception status of the TCS operation signal received through CAN
TCS ON (On/Off) M
communication.
Displays the reception status of the ABS malfunction signal received through CAN
ABS FAIL SIGNAL (On/Off)
communication.
N
Displays the reception status of the ABS operation signal received through CAN
ABS ON (On/Off)
communication.
RANGE Displays the gear position recognized by TCM.
O
M GEAR POS Display the target gear of manual mode
G SEN SLOPE (%) Displays the gradient angle calculated from the G sensor signal voltage.
G SEN CALIBRATION (YET/DONE) Displays the status of “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support”. P
N IDLE STATUS (On/Off) Displays idle neutral status.
ENGBRKLVL (On/Off) Displays the setting of “ENGINE BRAKE ADJ” in “Work Support”.
DRIVE MODE STATS Displays the drive mode status recognized by TCM.
SNOW MODE (On/Off) Displays whether it is the SNOW mode.
ECO MODE (On/Off) Displays whether it is the ECO mode.
TM-469
NORMAL MODE (On/Off) Displays whether it is the NORMAL mode.
SPORT MODE (On/Off) Displays whether it is the SPORT mode.
(INCOMP/
AIR BLDING STATE Displays the status of “ELECTRIC O.P. AIR BLEEDING” in “Work Support”.
COMP)
Displays the command signal value (duty) of the electric oil pump transmitted from
ELECTRIC OP DUTY (%)
TCM.
Monitors the status signal value (duty) transmitted from the electric oil pump and dis-
E-OP DUTY MON (%)
plays the monitored value.
ELECTRIC OP RELAY (On/Off) Displays the command status from TCM to the electric oil pump relay.
Monitors the command status from TCM to the oil pump relay and displays the mon-
E-OP RELAY MON (On/Off)
itored value.
CVT-B
CVT-A
WORK SUPPORT
Item name Description

CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN Checks the degradation level of the CVT fluid under severe conditions.
Performs “erasing of the calibration data” and “erasing of the learned value” at the
ERASE MEMORY DATA
same time.
G SENSOR CALIBRATION Compensates the G sensor.
ERASE LEARNING VALUE Erases learning value memorized by TCM.
Although there is no malfunction on the transaxle and the CVT system, if a cus-
tomer make a complaint like “I do not feel comfortable with automatic operation of
ENGINE BRAKE ADJ.
the engine brake on downhill”, the engine brake may be cancelled with “engine
brake adjustment”.
ERASE CALIBRATION DATA Erases calibration data memorized by TCM.
WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT AT/CVT Writes IP characteristics when transaxle assembly is replaced.
READ IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM Reads IP characteristics when TCM is replaced.
WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM Writes IP characteristics when TCM is replaced.
Engine brake adjustment
ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL

ON : Turn ON the engine brake control.
OFF : Turn OFF the engine brake control.
Check the degradation level of the CVT fluid.
CVTF degradation level data

210,000 or more : Replacement of the CVT fluid is required.
Less than 210,000 : Replacement of the CVT fluid is not required.
TM-470
TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010245563
B
CONSULT DATA MONITOR STANDARD VALUE

• In CONSULT, electric shift timing or lock-up timing, i.e. operation timing of each solenoid valve, is displayed. C
Therefore, if there is an obvious difference between the shift timing estimated from a shift shock (or engine
speed variations) and that shown on the CONSULT, the mechanism parts (including the hydraulic circuit)
excluding the solenoids and sensors may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the mechanical parts follow-
ing the appropriate diagnosis procedure. TM
• Shift point (gear position) displayed on CONSULT slightly differs from shift pattern described in Service Man-
ual. This is due to the following reasons.
- Actual shift pattern may vary slightly within specified tolerances. E
- While shift pattern described in Service Manual indicates start of each shift, CONSULT shows gear position
at end of shift.
- The solenoid display (ON/OFF) on CONSULT is changed at the start of gear shifting. In contrast, the gear
position display is changed at the time when gear shifting calculated in the control unit is completed. F
NOTE:
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. G

VSP SENSOR While driving Almost same as the speedometer display. H
ESTM VSP SIG While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
PRI SPEED SEN In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
I
SEC REV SENSOR While driving VSP SENSOR × 45

ENG SPEED SIG Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer J
SEC PRESSURE SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 1.65 – 1.75 V
• At idle
K
PRI PRESSURE SEN • Selector lever: “N” position 1.25 – 1.3 V
• At idle
L
ATF TEMP SEN CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C (122°F) 1.45 – 1.50 V
CVT fluid: Approx. 80°C (176°F) 0.90 – 0.94 V M
G SENSOR Vehicle is level 0G
VIGN SEN Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V
PVIGN VOLT Ignition switch: ON 10 – 16 V N
VEHICLE SPEED While driving Almost same as the speedometer display.
INPUT REV In driving (lock-up ON) Almost same as the engine speed.
O
PRI SPEED In driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed.
SEC SPEED While driving VSP SENSOR × 45
ENG SPEED Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer P
SLIP REV While driving Engine speed − Input speed
PULLEY GEAR RATIO
TM-471
TCM
Vehicle stopped 0.00 G
During acceleration
G SPEED along with acceleration.
During deceleration
Accelerator pedal released 0.00 deg
ACCEL POSI SEN 1
Accelerator pedal fully depressed 80.00 deg
VENG TRQ While driving
deceleration.
PRI TRQ While driving
deceleration.
TRQ RTO While driving
deceleration.
SEC PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.8 MPa
• At idle
PRI PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.2 MPa
• At idle
FLUID TEMP Ignition switch ON. Displays the CVT fluid temperature.
DSR REV While driving It varies along with the driving condition.
TGT PLLY GR RATIO
• Engine started
−0.500 MPa
• Vehicle is stopped.
LU PRS • Selector lever: “D” position

• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
0.550 MPa
more
LINE PRS • Selector lever: “N” position 1.8 MPa
• At idle
TRGT PRI PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.2 MPa
• At idle
• Selector lever: “N” position 0 MPa
TARGET SELECT PRESSURE • At idle
0.3 – 0.5 MPa
• At idle
TARGET SEC PRESSURE • Selector lever: “N” position 1.8 MPa
• At idle
ISOLT1 — —
ISOLT2 — —
PRI SOLENOID — —
SEC SOLENOID CURRENT — —
SELECT SOLENOID CURRENT — —
SOLMON1 — —
SOLMON2 — —
PRI SOL MON — —
TM-472
TCM
A
SEC SOL MON CURRENT — —
SELECT SOL MON CURRENT — —
Selector lever: “D” position On B
D POSITION SW
N POSITION SW
Other than the above Off C
R POSITION SW
TM
P POSITION SW
L POSITION SW Always Off E
Selector lever: “DS” position On
DS RANGE SW
F
Brake pedal is depressed On
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is released Off
Accelerator pedal is released On G
IDLE SW
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed Off
SPORT MODE SW Always Off
H
ECO MODE SW
Release the ECO mode switch Off
STRDWNSW Always Off I
STRUPSW Always Off
Selector lever is shifted to − side On
DOWNLVR J
Selector lever is shifted to + side On
UPLVR
K
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate
Off
NONMMODE side
Other than the above On L
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate
On
MMODE side
Other than the above Off M
TOW MODE SW Always Off
TM-473
TCM
When the selector lever is positioned in be-
OFF
tween each position.
Selector lever: “P” position P
Selector lever: “R” position R
Selector lever: “N” position N
Selector lever: “D” position D
SHIFT IND SIGNAL Manual mode: 1st M1

Manual mode: 2nd M2
Manual mode: 3rd M3
Manual mode: 4th M4
Manual mode: 5th M5
Manual mode: 6th M6
Manual mode: 7th M7
Approx. 2 seconds after ignition switch ON On
CVT LAMP
SPORT MODE IND Always Off
Driving with manual mode On
MANU MODE SIGNAL
Selector lever: “DS” position On
DS RANGE SIGNAL
ECO MODE SIGNAL
Release the ECO mode switch Off
When VDC malfunction signal is received On
VDC ON
When TCS malfunction signal is received On
TCS ON
When ABS malfunction signal is received On
ABS FAIL SIGNAL
ABS is activated On
ABS ON
Selector lever: “P” and “N” positions N/P
RANGE Selector lever: “R position R
Selector lever: “D” position D
M GEAR POS Manual mode: 1st – 7th 1 to 7
Flat road 0%
Uphill gradient along with uphill gradient. (Maximum
G SEN SLOPE 40.45%)
The value changes to the negative side
Downhill gradient along with downhill gradient. (Minimum −
40.45%)
When G sensor calibration is completed DONE
G SEN CALIBRATION
When G sensor calibration is not completed YET
N IDLE STATUS Always Off
TM-474
TCM
A
On
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is ON
ENGBRKLVL
Off B
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is OFF
DRIVE MODE STATS Always Off
SNOW MODE Always Off
C
ECO MODE Always Off
NORMAL MODE Always Off
SPORT MODE Always Off TM
When air bleeding of the electric oil pump is
COMP
completed
AIR BLDING STATE
When air bleeding of the electric oil pump is E
INCOMP
not completed
Ignition switch: ON 5 – 15%
• Selector lever: D position F
ELECTRIC OP DUTY 5 – 15%
• Vehicle speed: 11 km/h (7 MPH) or more
During the stop/start system operation 55 – 85%
G
Ignition switch: ON 25 – 35%
• Selector lever: D position
E-OP DUTY MON 0%
H
During the stop/start system operation 45 – 55%
On
• Vehicle speed: 6 km/h (4 MPH) or less
ELECTRIC OP RELAY I
Off
On J
E-OP RELAY MON
Off
K
G SENSOR Vehicle is level 0V
CVT-B* — —
CVT-A* — — L
*: These monitor items do not use.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
M
P
JSDIA2713ZZ
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARD
TM-475
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
+ − Signal
Output
• Vehicle speed: 6 km/h (3 MPH) or 0V
1 Electric oil pump re- less
Ground Output
(GR) lay • Selector lever: “D” position
• Vehicle speed: 11 km/h (7 MPH) or 10 − 16 V
more
2*
— — — — —
(SB)
4 Selector lever: “D” position 10 − 16 V

Ground D range switch Input
(Y) Other than the above 0V
5 Selector lever: “N” position 10 − 16 V

Ground N range switch Input
(P) Ignition Other than the above 0V
switch
6 ON Selector lever: “R” position 10 − 16 V
Ground R range switch Input
(G) Other than the above 0V
7 Selector lever: “P” position 10 − 16 V

Ground P range switch Input
(V) Other than the above 0V
11
Ground Sensor ground — Always 0V
(LG)
2.01 – 2.05 V
(68°F)
Ignition
12 CVT fluid tempera- CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C
Ground Input switch 1.45 – 1.50 V
(BR) ture sensor (122°F)
ON
0.90 – 0.94 V
176°F)
Ignition
14 When the vehicle stops on
Ground G sensor Input switch 2.5 V
(P) flat road
ON
16 Secondary pres- • Selector lever: “N” position
Ground Input 1.65 – 1.75 V
(L) sure sensor • At idle
17 Primary pressure • Selector lever: “N” position
Ground Input 1.25 – 1.35 V
(P) sensor • At idle
23 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
880 Hz
24 • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Input speed sensor Input
(LG) • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA3769GB
25 Electric oil pump During the stop/start system operation 100 Hz

Ground Output
(GR) command signal Ignition switch: OFF 0 Hz
26 Sensor power sup- Ignition switch: ON 5.0 V

Ground Output
TM-476
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
+ − Signal
Output
B

• Selector lever: “N” position C
• At idle
30 Line pressure sole- JSDIA1897GB TM

Ground Output
(GR) noid valve
E
• Depress the accelerator pedal fully
F
JSDIA1898GB
32 Electric oil pump During the stop/start system operation 100 Hz

Ground Input G
(SB) status signal Ignition switch: OFF 0 Hz
33 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
H
200 Hz
I
34 Output speed sen- • Shift position: “M1” position
Ground Input
(W) sor • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
J
JSDIA1904GB
700 Hz
K
35 Primary speed sen- • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Input
(R) sor • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
L
JSDIA1905GB
• Engine started
37 Select solenoid N
Ground Output • Vehicle is stopped
(SB) valve
JSDIA1897GB O
TM-477
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
+ − Signal
Output

• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or
less
more
Torque converter
38 JSDIA1900GB
Ground clutch solenoid Output
(G)
valve
• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped
JSDIA1903GB
39 Secondary pres- • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Output
(Y) sure solenoid valve • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1897GB
40 Primary pressure • Shift position: “M1” position

Ground Output
(V) solenoid valve • Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)
JSDIA1897GB
41
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
42
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)
Battery power sup-
45
(V)
up)
Battery power sup-
46
(P)
up)

Ground Input

Ground Input
*: This harness does not use.
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010245564
TM-478
TCM
is detected by TCM and the vehicle may be in a fail-safe mode. At this time, check the DTC code and perform A
Fail-safe function
B
P062F • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation — C
played TM
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed E
F
played
• Start is slow G
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation H
• Acceleration is slow Temp. ≥ 10°C (50°F) I
• Start is slow
−35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
J
• Start is slow
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
K
• Start is slow Engine coolant temperature when engine start: L
• Start is slow M
−35°C (−31°F) ≤ Temp. < 10°C (50°F)
• Start is slow N
Temp. < −35°C (−31°F)
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay O
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed P
P0715 —
TM-479
TCM
• Start is slow
P0717 —
• Start is slow
P0740 —
• Start is slow
P0743 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
P0778 —
• Start is slow
P0779 —
P0826 Manual mode is not activated
P084C • Not changed from normal driving
P084D • Not changed from normal driving
TM-480
TCM
A
• Start is slow
P0863 • Lock-up is not performed — B
C
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed TM
P0890
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay E
• Start is slow
F
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay G
• Start is slow
H
• Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay I
• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side J
P0965 • Turn OFF the electric oil pump relay
K
• Stop/start system prohibited When a malfunction occurs on the high oil pressure side
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation L
• Start is slow M
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation N
• Start is slow O
• Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation P
TM-481
TCM
P188E —
P188F —
P1890 —
• Start is slow
P2765 —
• Start is slow
• Vehicle speed is not increased When a malfunction occurs on the low oil pressure side
P2813 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation
P2814 —
P2815 —
• Start is slow
• Start is slow
TM-482
TCM
A
• Selector shock is large B
• Start is slow
C
• Stop/start system prohibited TM
• Stop/start system prohibited E
U110F • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation —
F
U1117 • Restart the engine during the stop/start system operation — G
Protection Control INFOID:0000000010245565

H
The TCM has the following protection control. I
When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased. J
Control
control a certain degree. K
tion
L
M
Vehicle behavior in
control
Torque returns to normal by positioning the selector lever in a range other than “R” position. N
tion

O
Control
Vehicle behavior in
Power performance may be lowered, compared to normal control. P
control
tion
TM-483
TCM
Control
control reverse.
tion engaged.)
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010245566
If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the DTC check pri-
ority list below.
Items
(CONSULT screen terms)
P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TM-565, "DTC Logic"
U0073 COMM BUS A OFF TM-510, "DTC Logic"
U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-511, "DTC Logic"
U0140 LOST COMM (BCM) TM-512, "DTC Logic"
U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A) TM-513, "DTC Logic"
1 U0155 LOST COMM (IPC) TM-514, "DTC Logic"
U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-515, "DTC Logic"
U1000 CAN COMM CIRC TM-516, "DTC Logic"
U110F LOST COMM (ECM) TM-517, "DTC Logic"
U1111 LOST COMM (CHASSIS CONT MDUL) TM-518, "DTC Logic"
U1117 LOST COMM (ABS) TM-519, "DTC Logic"
2
TM-484
TCM
Items
(CONSULT screen terms) A
P062F EEPROM TM-520, "DTC Logic"
B
P0713 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-531, "DTC Logic" C
TM
P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH TM-553, "DTC Logic"
P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A TM-556, "DTC Logic"
3
P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B TM-557, "DTC Logic" E
P084C FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H TM-561, "DTC Logic"
P084D FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H TM-563, "DTC Logic" F
P0890 TCM TM-566, "DTC Logic"
P1586 G SENSOR TM-578, "DTC Logic"
G
P188E ELECTRIC OIL PUMP TM-583, "DTC Logic"
P1890 ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY TM-590, "DTC Logic"
P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B TM-593, "DTC Logic" H
I
4 P0965 PC SOLENOID B TM-572, "DTC Logic"
P1588 G SENSOR TM-581, "DTC Logic" J
P188F ELECTRIC OIL PUMP TM-588, "DTC Logic"
K
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010245567
NOTE: L
• If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the “DTC check
priority list”. Refer to TM-484, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD”. Refer to TM-466, "CONSULT Function".
M
*1, *2
DTC Stop/start
Items
Trip MIL*3 indicator Reference
GST lamp N
(TRANSMISSION)
P062F P062F EEPROM 1 ON Blinking TM-520
P0705 P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A 2 ON Blinking TM-521
O
P0706 P0706 T/M RANGE SENSOR A 2 ON Blinking TM-526
P0712 P0712 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON Blinking TM-529
P0713 P0713 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A 2 ON Blinking TM-531 P
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A 2 ON Blinking TM-533
P0717 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A 2 ON Blinking TM-536
P0740 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER 2 ON Blinking TM-539
P0743 P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER 2 ON Blinking TM-541
P0744 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER 2 ON — TM-543
TM-485
TCM
DTC*1, *2 Stop/start
Items
Trip MIL*3 indicator Reference
GST lamp
(TRANSMISSION)
P0746 P0746 PC SOLENOID A 2 ON Blinking TM-545
P0776 P0776 PC SOLENOID B 2 ON — TM-547
— P0826 UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH 1 — — TM-553
P0841 P0841 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A 2 ON Blinking TM-556
P0847 P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 2 ON Blinking TM-557
P0848 P0848 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 2 ON Blinking TM-559
P084C P084C FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H 2 ON — TM-561
P084D P084D FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H 2 ON — TM-563
P0863 P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 1 ON Blinking TM-565
P0890 P0890 TCM 1 ON Blinking TM-566
P0965 P0965 PC SOLENOID B 2 ON Blinking TM-572
— P1586 G SENSOR 1 — Blinking TM-578
— P1588 G SENSOR 1 — Blinking TM-581
— P188E ELECTRIC OIL PUMP 1 — — TM-583
— P188F ELECTRIC OIL PUMP 1 — — TM-588
— P1890 ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY 1 — — TM-590
P2765 P2765 INPUT SPEED SENSOR B 2 ON Blinking TM-593
P2813 P2813 SELECT SOLENOID 2 ON Blinking TM-596
U0073 U0073 COMM BUS A OFF 1 ON Blinking TM-510
U0100 U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) 1 ON Blinking TM-511
— U0140 LOST COMM (BCM) 1 — Blinking TM-512
— U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A) 1 — Blinking TM-513
— U0155 LOST COMM (IPC) 1 — Blinking TM-514
— U0300 CAN COMM DATA 1 — Blinking TM-515
— U1000 CAN COMM CIRC 1 — Blinking TM-516
— U110F LOST COMM (ECM) 1 — — TM-517
— U1111 LOST COMM (CHASSIS CONT MDUL) 1 — — TM-518
— U1117 LOST COMM (ABS) 1 — Blinking TM-519
*1: These numbers are specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
*2: The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
*3: Refer to TM-464, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".
TM-486
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CVT: RE0F10G]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
B
TM
JRDWC2552GB
TM-487
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC2162GB
TM-488
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC2203GB
TM-489
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC2204GB
TM-490
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC2205GB
TM-491
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
JRDWC2206GB
TM-492
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
TM
JRDWC2207GB
TM-493
JRDWC2165GB
TM-494
TM
JRDWC2211GB
TM-495
JRDWC2212GB
TM-496
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010245570
B
NOTE:
“DTC” includes DTC at the 1st trip.
C
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Refer to TM-498, "Diagnostic Work Sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information
(conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings TM
in the vehicle.
>> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations. F
- Records the DTCs. (Print out using CONSULT and affix to the Work Order Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relation between the cause found by DTC and the malfunction information from customer. TM- G
609, "Symptom Table" can be used effectively.
3. Check the relevant information including STI, etc.
Do malfunction information and DTC exists? H
Malfunction information and DTC exists.>>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists but no DTC.>>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists.>>GO TO 5.
I
3.REPRODUCE MALFUCTION SYSTEM
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-478, "Fail-safe". J
Work Sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus- K
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 5. L
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-478, "Fail-safe". M
Work Sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus- N
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 6. O
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-484, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the P
order for performing the diagnosis.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Follow GI-41, "Intermittent Incident" to check.
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
TM-497
Use TM-609, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 (DTC is reproduced.)>>GO TO 5.
YES-2 (Malfunction is reproduced.)>>GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000010245571
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop-
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, perception of a problem varies depending on individuals.
Ask the customer about his/her concerns carefully. It is important to
understand the phenomenon or status. To systemize all the informa-
tion for the diagnosis, prepare the question sheet referring to the
question points.
In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may
cause a DTC to be detected.
SEF907L
Worksheet Sample
Question sheet
MR/MS
name
Year Month
day
Symptom Vehicle does not start. ( R position D position Ds position M position)
Upshifting does not occur. Downshifting does not occur.
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point is too high. Shift point is too low.
Shift shock ( N⇒D Lock-up R, D, Ds and M position)
Slip ( N⇒D Lock-up R, D, Ds and M position)
Noise Vibration
When selector lever position is shifted, shift pattern does not change.
Other
( )
First occurrence Recently (as from month of year )
Frequency of occurrence Always Under certain conditions Sometimes ( time(s)/day)
TM-498
Question sheet
A
MR/MS
name
B
Year Month
day
Climate con-
Irrelevant C
ditions
Weather Clear Cloud Rain Snow Others )
Temperature Hot Warm Cool Cold Temperature (Approx. °C/°F)
TM
Relative humidity High Moderate Low
Transaxle condition In cold-start During warm-up (approx. °C/°F) After warm-up
Engine speed: rpm E
Urban area Suburb area Highway
Road conditions
Mountainous road (uphill or downhill)
Operating condition, etc. Irrelevant F
When engine starts During idling During driving
During acceleration At constant speed driving During deceleration
During cornering (RH curve or LH curve)
G
Other conditions
TM-499
Always perform the following items when the TCM is replaced.

TCM PROGRAMMING
CAUTION:
SAVING AND WRITING OF TCM DATA
reason, it is necessary to save data of current TCM in CONSULT before replacing the TCM. After this, the
saved data must be written in new TCM.
CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR
• TCM stores calibration data (inherent characteristic value) of G sensor to provide accurate control. There-
fore, it is required to perform calibration of G sensor after the replacement of TCM.
BLEEDING OF ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
• If TCM is replaced, air bleeding of the electric oil pump memorized in TCM is reset. The data monitor dis-
plays “INCOMP”. It is necessary to bleed air to “COMP” the value.
1.SAVE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE)

NOTE:
With CONSULT
4. Select “READ IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM”.
5. Import data according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
>> GO TO 2.
2.SAVING TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS)
With CONSULT
NOTE:
>> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE TCM
2. Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 4.
4.WRITE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS)
With CONSULT
TM-500
A
>> GO TO 5.
5.WRITE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE) B
NOTE:
With CONSULT C
4. Select “WRITE IP CHARA - REPLACEMENT TCM”. TM
5. Write data saved in CONSULT in TCM according to the instructions on the CONSULT screen.
>> GO TO 6. E
6.CALIBRATE G SENSOR
Refer to TM-506, "Work Procedure". F
>> GO TO 7.
7.BLEED ELECTRIC OIL PUMP G
Refer to TM-507, "Work Procedure".

H
>> WORK END
TM-501
Perform the following work after the transaxle assembly is replaced.

ERASING AND WRITING TCM DATA
reason, after replacing transaxle assembly, it is necessary to erase data stored in TCM and write new data.
ERASING OF CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
• TCM records the degradation level of the CVT fluid calculated from the vehicle driving status. Therefore, if
the transaxle assembly is replaced, it is necessary to erase the CVT fluid degradation level data recorded by
TCM.
• The electric oil pump suctions oil from the oil pan through the sub-strainer. If air is contained in the sub-
strainer, oil pressure cannot be generated and it is necessary to bleed air.
1.CHECK THE SERIAL NUMBER (PART 1)

JSDIA4208GB
>> GO TO 2.
NOTE:
With CONSULT
CAUTION:
4. Insert the supplied CD into CONSULT. Refer to CONSULT operation manual.
NOTE:
TM-502
>> GO TO 3.
3.ERASE CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA A
With CONSULT
1. Select “WORK SUPPORT” in “TRANSMISSION”. B
3. Touch “Clear”.
C
>> GO TO 4.
4.BLEED ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
Refer to TM-507, "Work Procedure". TM
>> WORK END

E
TM-503
BLY
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE AS-
SEMBLY
When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, perform the following work.
TCM PROGRAMMING
CAUTION:
WRITING TCM DATA
reason, after replacing TCM and transaxle assembly, it is necessary to write new data in TCM.
• TCM stores calibration data (inherent characteristic value) of G sensor to provide accurate control. There-
fore, it is required to perform calibration of G sensor after the replacement of TCM.
• The electric oil pump suctions oil from the oil pan through the sub-strainer. If air is contained in the sub-

With CONSULT
NOTE:
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Replace TCM and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation" (TCM), TM-653,
"Removal and Installation" (Transaxle assembly).
CAUTION:
TM-504
BLY
A
TM
JSDIA4208GB F
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITE TCM DATA (VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS) G
NOTE:
Write data of vehicle specifications in TCM according to the following instructions:
H
With CONSULT
I
>> GO TO 4.
4.WRITE TCM DATA (IP CHARACTERISTICS VALUE) J
NOTE:
With CONSULT K
2. Insert the supplied CD into CONSULT. Refer to CONSULT operation manual.
L
NOTE: M
>> GO TO 5. N
O
>> GO TO 6.
6.BLEED ELECTRIC OIL PUMP P
>> WORK END
TM-505
TCM stores calibration data (inherent characteristic value) of G sensor to provide accurate control. Therefore,
it is required to perform calibration of G sensor after the following work is performed.
• Removal/installation or replacement of G sensor
• Replacement of TCM
1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Adjust air pressure of all tires to the specified pressure. Refer to WT-66, "Tire Air Pressure".
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
3. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION”.
4. Touch “Start”.
CAUTION:
Never swing the vehicle during “G sensor calibration”.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform steps 1 and 2 again.
3.CHECK DTC
With CONSULT
Is “P1586” or “P1588” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-485, "DTC Index".
NO >> Calibration end
TM-506
BLEEDING ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
BLEEDING ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
A
The electric oil pump suctions oil from the oil pan through the sub-strainer. If air is contained in the sub- B
C
1. Start the engine and warm it up.
2. After warm-up, stop the engine and wait for 60 seconds or more. TM
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.BLEED ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. F
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
3. Select “WORK SUPPORT” in “TRANSMISSION”. G
4. Select “ELECTRIC O.P. AIR BLEEDING”.
5. Touch “Start”.
CAUTION: H
Never start the engine during air bleeding.
NOTE:
It may take approximately 20 seconds until completion.
I
Is “COMPLETED” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 10 seconds or more. Then, start the work again. J
3.CHECK THE COMPLETION OF BLEEDING ELECTRIC OIL PUMP (PART 1)
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. K
2. Wait for 10 seconds.
4. Wait for 10 seconds. L
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
6. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. M
7. Select “AIR BLDING STATE”.
Is “COMP” displayed?
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 10 seconds or more. Then, start the work again.
4.CHECK THE COMPLETION OF BLEEDING ELECTRIC OIL PUMP (PART 2) O
2. Activate stop/start system. Refer to EC9-39, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description (M/T mod-
els)".
P
Does the stop/start system start?
YES >> WORK END
NO >> Check DTC “P188F”. Refer to TM-588, "DTC Logic".
TM-507
STALL TEST
STALL TEST
INSPECTION
1. Check the engine oil level. Replenish if necessary. Refer to LU-48, "Inspection".
2. Check for leak of the CVT fluid. Refer to TM-613, "Inspection".
3. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
4. Be sure to apply the parking brake and block the tires.
5. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal and put the selector lever to the D position.
6. While depressing the brake pedal, depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
7. Read the stall speed quickly. Then, release your foot from the accelerator pedal quickly.
CAUTION:
Do not depress the accelerator pedal for 5 seconds or more during the test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-659, "Stall Speed".

8. Place the selector lever in the N position.
9. Cool the CVT fluid.
CAUTION:
Run the engine with the idle speed for at least 1 minute.
10. Put the selector lever to the R position and perform Step 6 to Step 9 again.
NARROWING-DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Selector lever position

Possible cause
D R
H O • Forward clutch
O H • Reverse brake
• Engine
L L
Stall speed • Torque converter one way clutch
• Line pressure is low.
• Primary pulley
H H
• Secondary pulley
• Steel belt
O: Within the stall speed standard value.
H: Stall speed is higher than the standard value.
L: Stall speed is lower than the standard value.
TM-508
CVT POSITION
CVT POSITION
A
1. Turn ON the ignition switch with the shift selector at the “P” position. B
2. Press the shift selector button with the brake pedal depressed, and confirm that the shift selector can be
moved to positions other than “P”. Also confirm that movement is not allowed from the “P” position to other
position without depressing the brake pedal. C
3. Move the shift selector and check for “excessive effort”, “sticking”, “noise” or “rattle”.
4. Confirm that shift selector stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the shift selector is in matches the position shown TM
by the transaxle body.
5. Make sure that the shift selector is moved to all the shift posi-
tions in the manner shown. E
6. When the shift selector button is pressed without applying for-
ward/backward force to the shift selector at “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”
positions, there should be no “sticking” on the shift selector but-
ton operation. F
7. The relationship between selector lever, engine starting ability,
and shift position indicator lighting should satisfy the conditions
of the following table. G
JPDIA0344GB
Selector lever Load direction to the se- Applied load to the se- H
Engine starting ability Shift position indicator lighting
position lector lever lector lever
P P (over stroke) ← P → R Start P indicator shall be illuminated
R P←R 30 N (3.1 kg, 6.7 lb) Not start R indicator shall be illuminated I
N R←N Start N indicator shall be illuminated
D — — Not start —
J
8. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the
back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or “N”
position.
K
9. Check that the transaxle is locked when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, make sure that manual mode is displayed on combination
meter. L
Shift selector lever to “+” and “−” sides, and check that set shift position changes.
M
1. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Rotate the wheels at least a quarter turn and be certain the Park position mechanism is fully N
engaged.
2. Loosen nut and set manual lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION:
O
Never apply force to the manual lever.
3. Hold the control cable and push it to direction of the arrow
with a specified force.
P
Specified force : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)
4. Temporarily tighten the nut with the control cable loose.
5. Tighten the nut to the specified torque. Refer to TM-620,
"Exploded View". JSDIA4171ZZ
CAUTION:
In tightening, fix the manual lever.
TM-509
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10G]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

COMM BUS A OFF TCM communication blockage lasts for 2 sec-
Harness or connector
U0073 (Control Module Communica- onds or more when turning ON the ignition
(CAN communication line is error)
tion Bus A Off) switch. (Communication not established.)

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.
TM-510
A

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is un- • ECM
LOST COMM (ECM A)
able to receive the CAN communications • Harness or connector
signal from ECM continuously for 2 sec- (CAN communication line is open or
ECM/PCM A) TM
onds or more. shorted)

F
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0100” detected? H
I
J
TM-511
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• BCM
LOST COMM (BCM) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
U0140 (Lost Communication With to receive the CAN communications signal
Body Control Module) from BCM continuously for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-512
A

When the ignition switch is turned ON, TCM • IPDM E/R
LOST COMM (BCM A)
continues no reception of the CAN communi- • Harness or connector
cation signal from IPDM E/R for 2 seconds or (CAN communication line is open or
Body Control Module A) TM
more. shorted)

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H
TM-513
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

[Trouble diagnosis content]
LOST COMM (IPC) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable • Combination meter
[Lost Communication With In- to receive the CAN communications signal • Harness or connector
U0155
strument Panel Cluster (IPC) from the combination meter continuously for 2 (CAN communication line is open or
Control Module] seconds or more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-514
A

When the ignition switch is ON, the data length
CAN COMM DATA
transmitted from each control unit is shorter
U0300 (Internal Control Module Soft- Control unit other than TCM
than the specified length and the status contin-
ware Incompatibility) TM
ues for 2 seconds or more.

F
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION G
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H
J
Check the number of control units replaced before “U0300” is detected.
Is one control unit replaced? K
YES >> The specification of the control unit replaced may be incorrect. Check the part number and the
specification.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT
1. Remove one of the control unit replaced. M
2. Assemble the old control unit before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. N
Is “U0300”detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch and check other control units in the same manner.
NO >> The specification of the control unit removed may be incorrect. Check the part number and the O
specification.
TM-515
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM cannot Harness or connector
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 send the CAN communication signal continu- (CAN communication line is open or
(CAN Communication Line)
ously for 2 seconds or more. shorted)

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-516
A

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is un-
LOST COMM (ECM) • ECM
able to receive the CAN communications sig-
U110F (Lost Communication With • Harness or connector (CAN communi-
nal from ECM continuously for 2 seconds or
ECM) cation line is open or shorted) TM
more.

F
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC. H
Is “U110F” detected?
TM-517
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

LOST COMM (CHASSIS CONT When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is un-
• Chassis control module
MDUL) able to receive the CAN communications
U1111 • Harness or connector (CAN communi-
(Lost Communication With signal from chassis control module contin-
cation line is open or shorted)
Chassis Control Module) uously for 2 seconds or more.

>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Check the DTC.
TM-518
A

• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
LOST COMM (ABS) unit)
to receive the CAN communications signal
U1117 (Lost Communication With • Harness or connector
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control TM
ABS) (CAN communication line is open or
unit) continuously for 2 seconds or more.
shorted)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. F
>> GO TO 2.
G
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more. H
2. Check the DTC.
YES >> Go to TM-519, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
TM-519
P062F EEPROM
P062F EEPROM
TCM compares the calculated value stored in the flash ROM with the value stored in TCM. If the calculated
value does not agree with the stored value, TCM judges this as a malfunction.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• TCM (Flash ROM)
EEPROM
Flash ROM error is detected when turning ON • Harness or connector
P062F (Internal Control Module EE-
the ignition switch. [TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
PROM Error)
open or shorted]

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “P062F” detected?

YES >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation".
TM-520
A

T/M RANGE SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 2 seconds:
(Short circuit between transmission
P0705 [Transmission Range Sensor • Two or more range signals simultaneously
range switch and TCM) TM
A Circuit (PRNDL Input)] stay ON continuously
• Transmission range switch

>> GO TO 2.
G
2. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “Ds”. (Hold the selector lever at each position H
for 5 seconds or more.)
Is “P0705” detected? I
J

K
With CONSULT
3. Select “D POSITION SW”, “N POSITION SW”, “R POSITION SW” and “P POSITION SW” . L
4. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “Ds” and check ON/OFF of each monitor item.
Monitor item Condition Condition M

D POSITION SW
N
N POSITION SW
Selector lever: “R” position On O
R POSITION SW
P POSITION SW P
Without CONSULT
4. Shift the selector lever from “P” to “D” and check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
TM-521
+
Connector Terminal
Selector lever: “D” position 10 – 16 V
4
Selector lever: “N” position 10 – 16 V
5
F1 Ground
Selector lever: “R” position 10 – 16 V
6
Selector lever: “P” position 10 – 16 V
7
NO-1 [“D POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “D” position. (Or connector terminal 4 is at power
NO-2 [“N POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “N” position. (Or connector terminal 5 is at power
NO-3 [“R POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “R” position. (Or connector terminal 6 is at power
NO-4 [“P POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “P” position. (Or connector terminal 7 is at power
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
5
F1 4 6 Not existed
7
YES >> GO TO 3.
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F1 4 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.
TM-522
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals. A
TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal B
4
F1 5 6 Not existed
C
7
YES >> GO TO 5. TM
E
F
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.) G
Connector Terminal
F1 5 Ground 0V
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1) I

2. Disconnect TCM connector. J
TCM
Continuity K
Connector Terminal
4
F1 7 5 Not existed L
6
M
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2) N
3. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground. O
+
Voltage P
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F1 7 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.
TM-523
8.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART1)

TCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
F1 6 5 Not existed
7
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F1 6 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 10.


Terminal
1–2
3–4
3–5
3–6
3–7
TM-524
YES >> INSPECTION END A
B
TM
TM-525
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are satis- (Open circuit between ignition switch
T/M RANGE SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 30 sec- and transmission range switch/open
P0706 (Transmission Range Sensor onds: circuit between transmission range
A Circuit Range/Performance) • All range signals stay OFF switch and TCM)
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Transmission range switch
• Control cable

>> GO TO 2.
40 seconds or more.)
1.ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CABLE

Adjust control cable. Refer to TM-619, "Inspection".
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE". Refer to TM-526, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER CIRCUIT
4. Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector terminal and ground.
TM-526
+ A
Transmission range switch − Voltage
Connector Terminal
B
F61 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 4. C
NO >> GO TO 7.
TM
3. Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and TCM harness con-
nector terminals. E
Transmission range switch TCM

Continuity F
4 7
5 6 G
F61 F1 Existed
6 5
7 4
H
YES >> GO TO 5.
I
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and ground.
J
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
K
4
5
6 L
7
YES >> GO TO 6. M
6.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH N
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". O
7.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and transmission range switch harness
connector terminal.
TM-527
IPDM E/R Transmission range switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 101 and transmission range switch
harness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No. 67, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-101, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R


Terminal
1–2
3–4
3–5
3–6
3–7
TM-528
A

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A fied and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
(CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
P0712 (Transmission Fluid Tempera- • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
shorted to ground) TM
ture Sensor A Circuit Low) • Fluid temperature sensor detection voltage:
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
0.15 V or less

>> GO TO 2.
G
2. Check the first trip DTC. H
1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT J

K
TCM
— Continuity L
Connector Terminal
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2.CHECK CVT UNIT TERMINAL CODE ASSEMBLY N
Check continuity between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.

O
CVT unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F58 12 Ground Not existed P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> There is a malfunction of the CVT unit terminal code assembly. Replace the transaxle assembly.
TM-529
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
CVT unit Resistance

Condition

TM-530
A

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V (CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
P0713 (Transmission Fluid Tempera- TM
• Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (7 MPH) open or shorted to power supply)
ture Sensor A Circuit High)
• Fluid temperature sensor detection voltage: • CVT fluid temperature sensor
2.48 V or more
E
If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at F
>> GO TO 2. G
1. Start the engine. H

I
Is “P0713” detected? J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010245608 K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
M
TCM CVT unit
Continuity
N
11 18
F1 F58 Existed
12 12
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 2) P
TM-531
+
Voltage
TCM −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F1 12 Ground 0V
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
CVT unit Resistance

Condition

TM-532
A

DTC detection condition
DTC (Trouble diagnosis con- Possible causes C
tent)
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V TM
- After range change completion, it spends 2 sec-
onds or more.
E
and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
- Primary pulley speed: Less than 150 rpm
- Secondary pulley speed: 500 rpm or more
3. When all of the following conditions are satisfied F
and this state is maintained for 0.5 seconds:
- 10-msec-ago primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or
more
INPUT SPEED SEN- - Now primary pulley speed: 0 rpm
(Primary speed sensor circuit is
G
SOR A 4. When all of the following conditions are satisfied
P0715 open or shorted)
(Input/Turbine Speed and this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
• Primary speed sensor
Sensor A Circuit) - Range: D or Ds
- Engine speed: 450 rpm or more H
- Differences between engine speed and primary I
pulley speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Differences between primary pulley speed and in-
put speed: More than 1,000 rpm J
speed: 1,000 rpm or less
- Lock-up command is being given (except for slip
lock-up) K
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not detected.

CAUTION: L
M
N
>> GO TO 2.
P
Selector lever : “D” POSITION
TM-533
1.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect primary speed sensor connector.
4. Check voltage between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Primary speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F38 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
Primary speed sensor TCM

Continuity
F38 2 F1 35 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-534
2. Lift the vehicle. A
4. Check frequency of primary speed sensor.
B
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal C
700 Hz
TM
F1 35 Ground
E
JSDIA1905GB

F
NO >> Replace primary speed sensor. Refer to TM-634, "Removal and Installation".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS G
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and primary speed sensor. Refer to PG-56,
"Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". H
• 10A fuse [No.74, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
Is the check result normal? I
J
TM-535
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

- After range change completion, it spends 2
seconds or more.
onds:
- Input speed: Less than 150 rpm
- Range: Other than P, N
- P0705, P0706, or P0715 is not detected.
onds:
- 10-msec-ago input speed: 1,000 rpm or more
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A - Now input speed: 0 rpm
(Input speed sensor circuit is open
P0717 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor 4. When all of the following conditions are satis-
or shorted.)
“A” Circuit No Signal) fied and this state is maintained for 5 sec-
• Input speed sensor
onds:
- Range: D or Ds
- Differences between engine speed and pri-
mary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or less
- Differences between primary pulley speed
and input speed: More than 1,000 rpm
speed: More than 1,000 rpm
- Lock-up command is being given (except for
slip lock-up)
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is not de-
tected.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
TM-536
Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more A
B
C
1.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT TM

3. Turn ignition switch ON. E
4. Check voltage between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+ F
Input speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F47 3 Ground 10 – 16 V G

YES >> GO TO 2. H
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground. I
Input speed sensor

— Continuity J
Connector Terminal
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN INPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1) L
3. Check continuity between input speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector M
terminal.
Input speed sensor TCM N

Continuity
F47 2 F1 24 Existed
O
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. P
TM-537
Input speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
4. Check frequency of input speed sensor.
+
Frequency
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
880 Hz

F1 24 Ground
JSDIA3769GB

NO >> Replace input speed sensor. Refer to TM-632, "Removal and Installation".
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and input speed sensor. Refer to PG-56, "Wir-
ing Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• 10A fuse [No.74, located in the fuse block (J/B]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrange-
ment".
• IPDM E/R
TM-538
A

TORQUE CONVERTER (Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0740 (Torque Converter Clutch Cir- circuit is open or shorted to power sup- TM
cuit/Open) ply)
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
open.
E
CAUTION:
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION H
With CONSULT
I
J
With GST
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to L
YES >> GO TO 3. M
2. GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC DETECTION N
O
3. Stop the vehicle. P
TM-539

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F1 38 F58 5 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-540
A

TORQUE CONVERTER
onds: (Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
P0743 (Torque Converter Clutch Cir- TM
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V circuit is shorted to ground)
cuit Electrical)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
shorted to ground.
E
CAUTION:
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION H
With CONSULT
I
J
With GST
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to L
YES >> GO TO 3. M
2. GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC DETECTION N
O
3. Stop the vehicle. P
TM-541

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-542
A

onds:
TORQUE CONVERTER • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM
P0744 (Torque converter clutch cir- • P0717 is not detected. • Control valve assembly
cuit intermittent) • CAN communication is normal • Torque converter
• Torque converter slip speed: (40+vihicle
E
speed/2) rpm
• LU pressure: More than 0.2 MPa

CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK G
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION I
With CONSULT
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. J
FLUID TEMP : 20°C (68°F) or more K
With GST
L
NOTE:
176°F) with driving in an urban area for approximately 10 minutes. M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> 1. Warm the transaxle. N
2. GO TO 3.
O
Selector lever : “D” position P

TM-543

TM-544
A

The detecting condition A or detection condi-
tion B is detected twice or more (1 second or
more later after detection of the first) in the
same DC under the following diagnosis condi- TM
tions:
• Diagnosis conditions
E
- Primary pulley speed: More than 450 rpm
- Idle is not being detected.
- Acceleration/deceleration speed: −0.49 m/
s2 (−0.05 G) or more F
- The primary pulley speed experienced 300
PC SOLENOID A rpm or more and the secondary pulley
speed experienced 250 rpm or more at least • Line pressure solenoid valve
once. • Control valve assembly G
Performance/Stuck Off)
- Secondary pulley speed: More than 150
rpm
H
detected.
• Detection condition A
I
• Detection condition B
- Status with the shifting ratio of the primary J
NOTE: K
DC stands for "DRIVING CYCLE" and indicates a series of driving cycle of "Ignition switch OFF → ON → driv-
ing → OFF".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L
CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK M
N
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION O
3. Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. P
TM-545

TM-546
A

When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied and this state
is maintained for 10 seconds:
satisfied: TM
not detected.
E
20°C (-4°F)
- TCM power supply: More than 11 V F
pressure is 0 MPa or more G
pressure: 0 MPa or more
pressure - secondary pressure: More H
than 1.2 MPa
for 1.52 seconds: I
not detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than - J
20°C (-4°F)
PC SOLENOID B • Selector lever: Other than P/N position
P0776 (Pressure Control Solenoid • Instruction pressure of secondary Secondary pressure solenoid valve
“B” Performance/Stuck Off) pressure - secondary pressure: 0.25 K
MPa or more
satisfied:
- DTC other than the applicable DTC is L
not detected.
20°C (-4°F)
- Selector lever: Other than P/N position M
for 5.5 seconds:
N
not detected.
• CVT fluid temperature: More than - O
20°C (-4°F)
• Secondary pressure - instruction pres-
sure of secondary pressure: 1.2 MPa P
or more
- Secondary pressure - instruction pres-
sure of secondary pressure: More than
1.2 MPa
TM-547
CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.


TM-548
A

When all of the following conditions are satisfied
PC SOLENOID B and this state is maintained for 0.48 seconds:
(Secondary pressure solenoid valve
P0778 (Pressure Control Solenoid • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
circuit is shorted to ground.) TM
“B” Electrical) • TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is short-
ed to ground.

E
CAUTION:
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010245624 J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
L
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
Check continuity between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground. O
CVT unit
— Condition Resistance P
Connector Terminal
TM-549
TM-550
A

When all of the following conditions are satis- C
onds:
Pressure control solenoid B (Secondary pressure solenoid valve
Intermittent circuit open or shorted to power supply) TM
• P0778 is not detected
open or shorted to power supply.
E
If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at F
>> GO TO 2. G
1. Start the engine. H
Selector lever : “D” position I

4. Stop the vehicle. J
YES >> Go to TM-551, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
2. Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector. M
TCM CVT unit N

Continuity
F1 39 F58 3 Existed
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P
TM-551
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-552
A

TCM monitors manual mode, non-manual • Manual mode switch
UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH
mode, up or down switch signal, and detects • Harness or connectors
P0826 (Up and Down Shift Switch
as irregular when impossible input pattern oc- (Manual mode switch circuit are open
Circuit) TM
curs 1 second or more. or shorted.)

F
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 1) G
With CONSULT
2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position and wait for 1 second or more. H
YES >> Go to TM-553, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO >> GO TO 3.
J
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate and wait for 1 second or more.
K
NO >> GO TO 4.
L
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “UP side (+ side)” and wait for 1 second or more. M
YES >> Go to TM-553, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
NO >> GO TO 5.
O
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “DOWN side (− side)” and wait for 1 second or more.
P
1.CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER)

TM-553
With CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-485, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
4. Check voltage between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Voltage
CVT shift selector – Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
7
8
M9 Ground
9
11
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-555, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CVT SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER
2. Disconnect combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and combination meter harness
connector terminals.
CVT shift selector Combination meter

Continuity
7 30
8 33
M9 M51 Existed
9 32
11 31
4. Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals and ground.
TM-554
CVT shift selector A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B
8
M9 Ground Not existed
9
11 C
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground. E
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal F
M9 10 Ground Existed
G
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010438741 H
1.MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check continuity between CVT shift selector connector terminals. I
CVT shift selector

Condition Continuity J
Terminal
Manual shift gate position (neutral) Existed
7 – 10
Other than the above Not existed K
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) Existed
8 – 10
L
Selector lever: UP (+ side) Existed
9 – 10
Manual shift gate position Not existed M
11 – 10
Other than the above Existed
NO >> Replace the CVT shift selector assembly due to malfunction in manual mode switch. Refer to TM-
O
TM-555
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When all of the following conditions are sat-
onds:
V
(Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW A • DTC other than the applicable DTC is not
open or shorted.)
(Transmission Fluid Pres- detected.
P0841 • Harness or connectors
sure Sensor/Switch “A” Cir- • Primary pulley speed: 300 rpm or more
(Primary pressure sensor circuit is open
cuit Range/Performance) • Secondary pulley speed: 250 rpm or more
or shorted.)
• Target speed for shifting: Less than 0.1
• Secondary pressure sensor
seconds
• Primary pulley pressure is outside the
specified value.
• Pulley ratio: From 0.5 to 1.0

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.

Vehicle speed : Constant speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH)
CAUTION:
Also keep the accelerator pedal position constant.

YES >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-653, "Removal and Installation".
TM-556
A

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B • CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
P0847 (Transmission Fluid Pressure 4°F) open or shorted to ground) TM
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low) • TCM power supply voltage: 11 V or more • Secondary pressure sensor
• Secondary pressure sensor voltage: 0.09 V • Control valve assembly
or less
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT
FLUID TEMP : −20°C (−4°F) J

With GST
CAUTION:
N
+ P
Connector Terminal
F1 16 Ground 1.65 – 1.75 V
• At idle
TM-557
NO >> GO TO 2.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
11 18
26 22
YES >> GO TO 3.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
16
26
TM-558
A

• CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− • Harness or connector
FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B 4°F) (Secondary pressure sensor circuit is TM
P0848 (Transmission Fluid Pressure • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V shorted to power supply)
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low) • Instruction secondary pressure: 5.7 MPa or • Secondary pressure sensor
less • Control valve assembly
E
• Secondary pressure sensor voltage: 4.7 V
or more

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, the ignition switch OFF and wait for at
G
>> GO TO 2. H
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. I
4. Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. J
FLUID TEMP : More than −20°C (−4°F)

5. Check the first trip DTC. K
With GST
CAUTION:
L
engine for approximately 5 minutes.
Is “P0848”detected? M
N
1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS O

P
+
Connector Terminal
F1 16 Ground 1.65 – 1.75 V
• At idle
TM-559
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 22 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 14 Ground 0V
TM-560
A

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H • CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Primary pressure sensor circuit is
P084C (Transmission Fluid Pressure 4°F) open or shorted to ground) TM
Sensor/Switch H Circuit Low) • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Primary pressure sensor
less
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT

With GST
CAUTION:
Is “P084C”detected?
N
+ P
Connector Terminal
F1 17 Ground 1.25 – 1.35 V
• At idle
TM-561
NO >> GO TO 2.
TCM CVT unit

Continuity
11 18
26 22
YES >> GO TO 3.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
17
26
TM-562
A

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW H
• CVT fluid temperature: More than −20°C (− (Primary pressure sensor circuit is
(Transmission Fluid Pressure TM
P084D 4°F) open or shorted to ground)
Sensor/Switch “H” Circuit
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • Primary pressure sensor
High)
more
E
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
With CONSULT

With GST
CAUTION:
Is “P084D”detected?
N
+ P
Connector Terminal
F1 17 Ground 1.25 – 1.35 V
• At idle
TM-563
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 22 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
+
Voltage
CVT unit −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F58 13 Ground 0V
TM-564
A

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) An error is detected at the initial CAN diagnosis of
P0863 TCM
(TCM Communication Circuit) TCM.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE TM

If another "DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at E
>> GO TO 2. F
1. Start the engine. G
2. Check the DTC.
YES >> Go to TM-565, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
J
K
TM-565
P0890 TCM
P0890 TCM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TCM • Harness or connector
(Transmission Control Module (TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
P0890 onds:
Power Relay Sense Circuit open or shorted.)
Low) • TCM
• Battery voltage: Less than 8.4 V

>> GO TO 2.
2. Check the DTC.
1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY (BACK-UP) CIRCUIT

+
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
45
46
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connector terminals 45,
and 46.
TM-566
P0890 TCM
Is the inspection result normal? A
B
TM
TM-567
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID A
onds: (Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V shorted to ground)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Line pressure solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-568
TM
TM-569
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID A onds:
(Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
P0963 (Pressure Control Solenoid A • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
open or shorted to power supply)
open.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F1 30 F58 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-570
TM
TM-571
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1 or 2 is satisfied and this state is
maintained for 10 seconds:
satisfied:
detected.
(-4°F)
MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of primary pressure:
0.86 MPa or more
- Instruction pressure of primary pressure
- primary pressure: More than 1.2 MPa
1 second:
detected.
(-4°F)
PC SOLENOID B • Harness or connector
(Pressure Control Solenoid B (Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0965 • Engine speed: More than 625 rpm
Control Circuit Range Perfor- cuit is open or shorted.)
• Instruction pressure of primary pressure:
mance) • Primary pressure solenoid valve
More than 2 MPa
• Primary pressure: 0.4 MPa or less
satisfied:
detected.
(-4°F)
5.5 seconds:
detected.
(-4°F)
• Primary pressure - instruction pressure
of primary pressure: 1.2 MPa or more
MPa or more
- Primary pressure - instruction pressure
of primary pressure: More than 1.2 MPa
TM-572
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK A

B
>> GO TO 2.
C
TM
5. Check the first trip DTC. E
NO >> INSPECTION END F
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

Is the inspection result normal? H
I
TM-573
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID B
onds: (Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0966 (Pressure Control Solenoid B
• TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V cuit shorted to ground)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Primary pressure solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-574
TM
TM-575
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

PC SOLENOID B onds:
(Primary pressure solenoid valve cir-
P0967 (Pressure Control Solenoid B • TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
cuit open or shorted to power supply)
open.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F1 40 F58 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
CVT unit
Connector Terminal
TM-576
TM
TM-577
P1586 G SENSOR
P1586 G SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When 1 or 2 is satisfied and maintained for 5 seconds or
more, and this state is satisfied two times within the same
DC:
1. When all of the following conditions are satisfied: • Harness or connector
P1586 G Sensor Circuit Electrical - G sensor detection voltage: 0.675 V or less (G sensor circuit)
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V • G sensor
2. When all of the following conditions are satisfied:
- G sensor detection voltage: 3.13 V or more
NOTE:
DC stands for “DRIVING CYCLE” and indicates a series of driving cycle of “Ignition switch OFF →ON → driv-
ing → OFF”.
CAUTION:
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
2. Drive the vehicle for 5 seconds or more.
CAUTION:
Never stop the engine.
4. Repeat step 2 through 3.
5. Check the DTC.
“P1586”detected?
1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL

With CONSULT
3. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”
4. Select “G SEN SLOPE”.
5. Swing the vehicle and check if value varies between −40.45% and 40.45%.
Monitor item Condition Standard

Flat road 0%
G SEN SLOPE Uphill Positive value (Maximum 40.45%)
Downhill Negative value (Minimum −40.45%)
TM-578
P1586 G SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2. A
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.G SENSOR CALIBRATION (PART 1)
B
With CONSULT
C
>> Perform “G SENSOR CALIBRATION”. Refer to TM-506, "Work Procedure".

3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY TM
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. E
4. Check voltage between G sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+ F
G sensor − Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
G
M78 3 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4. H
NO >> GO TO 8.
4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND G SENSOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and G sensor harness connector terminals.
J
TCM G sensor
Continuity
K
11 2
F1 M78 Existed
14 1
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND G SENSOR (PART 2) M

N
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
11 O
14
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK G SENSOR
1. Remove G sensor. Refer to TM-628, "Removal and Installation".
2. Connect the all connectors.
TM-579
P1586 G SENSOR
4. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
: Direction of gravitational force
+
Voltage (Ap-
TCM − Test condition
prox.)
Connector Terminal
Vertical (−1G) 1.17 V SCIA8343J
F1 14 Ground Horizontal 2.5 V
Vertical (1G) 3.83 V

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace G sensor. Refer to TM-628, "Removal and Installation".
With CONSULT
1. Install G sensor. Refer to TM-628, "Removal and Installation".

8.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 1)
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and G sensor harness connector terminal.
TCM G sensor
Continuity
F1 26 M78 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
TM-580
P1588 G SENSOR
P1588 G SENSOR
A
Trouble diagnosis
name C
When 1 is satisfied and 2 is satisfied two times within the
same DC:
1. When all of the following conditions are satisfied and
this state is maintained for 1 second: TM
- The difference between the current G sensor detection
voltage and the previous G sensor detection voltage of
E
G Sensor Circuit 10 msec. before: ±0.015 V or less
P1588 2. When all of the following conditions are satisfied and G Sensor
Range/Performance
this state is maintained for 5 seconds:
- The difference between the current acceleration and F
the previous acceleration of 1 second before:
0.2677m/s2 (0.0273 G)
- The difference between the current G sensor detection
voltage and the previous G sensor detection voltage of G
10 msec. before: ±0.015 V or more
NOTE:
DC stands for “DRIVING CYCLE” and indicates a series of driving cycle of “Ignition switch OFF →ON → driv- H
ing → OFF”.
CAUTION: I
1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK J
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
K
>> GO TO 2.
L
With CONSULT
3. Select “G SPEED”. M
N
Selector lever : “L” position
G SPEED : 0.05 G or more
6. Stop the vehicle. O
CAUTION:
Never stop the engine.
7. Repeat step 4 through 6.
8. Check the DTC. P
“P1588” detected?
TM-581
P1588 G SENSOR
1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL

With CONSULT
3. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”
4. Select “G SEN SLOPE”.
5. Swing the vehicle and check if value varies between −40.45% and 40.45%.
Monitor item Condition Standard

Flat road 0%
G SEN SLOPE Uphill Positive value (Maximum 40.45%)
Downhill Negative value (Minimum −40.45%)
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT

3.CHECK G SENSOR
1. Remove G sensor. TM-628, "Removal and Installation".
2. Connect the all connectors.
4. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
: Direction of gravitational force
+
Voltage (Ap-
TCM − Test condition
prox.)
Connector Terminal
Vertical (−1G) 1.17 V SCIA8343J
F1 14 Ground Horizontal 2.5 V
Vertical (1G) 3.83 V

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace G sensor. TM-628, "Removal and Installation".
With CONSULT
1. Install G sensor. TM-628, "Removal and Installation".
TM-582
P188E ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
A
Trouble diagnosis
name C
When 1 is not satisfied and 2 is satisfied, and this state is
maintained for 1 second or more:
1. When any of the following conditions are satisfied (diag-
nosis prohibition condition): TM
- Battery voltage: 10 V or less
- Electric oil pump relay ON is being instructed and within
0.52 seconds after battery voltage recovers from the
E
state that is 10 V or less
- Electric oil pump relay OFF is being instructed
- Within 0.35 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON
- Within 1 second after electric oil pump traction is in- F
structed
- Electric oil pump traction is instructed
- Electric oil pump relay ON is being instructed • Electric oil pump G
- Electric oil pump duty: Less than 46% or more than 54% • Electric oil pump relay
• TCM
P188E Electric Oil Pump When 1 is not satisfied and 2 is satisfied, and this state is • Harness or connector
maintained for 1 second or more: (Open circuit or short circuit H
1. When any of the following conditions are satisfied (diag- in harness between the TCM
nosis prohibition condition): and the electric oil pump.)
- Electric oil pump relay ON is being instructed and within I
0.52 seconds after battery voltage recovers from the
- Within 0.35 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON J
- Within 0.52 seconds after electric oil pump relay ON is
being instructed
- Within 0.25 seconds after electric oil pump stop is in-
structed K
- Electric oil pump stop is instructed
- Electric oil pump relay ON is being instructed
L
- Electric oil pump duty: Less than 26% or more than 34%

CAUTION: M
N
O
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT P
2. Maintain stop/start system operation state for 5 seconds or more. Refer to EC9-39, "STOP/START SYS-
TEM : System Description (M/T models)".
NOTE:
If the engine restarts automatically, the system may be in fail safe.
3. Check the DTC.
“P188E”detected?
TM-583
1.ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY

1. Check the electric oil pump relay. Refer to TM-586, "Component Inspection (Electric Oil Pump Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the electric oil pump relay.
2.CHECK ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY POWER CIRCUIT
Check voltage between the electric oil pump relay harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Electric oil pump relay − Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1
F119 Ground Always 10 – 16 V
5
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 8.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY (PART 1)
1. Disconnect the TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and electric oil pump relay harness connector
terminal.
NOTE:
• A diode is located between TCM and the electric oil pump relay.
• To check diode, refer to TM-586, "Component Inspection (Diode)".
+ −
TCM Electric oil pump relay Continuity
F1 1 F119 2 Existed
+ −
Electric oil pump relay TCM Continuity
F119 2 F1 1 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check continuity between the electric oil pump relay harness connector terminal and ground.
Electric oil pump relay

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-584
5.CHECK ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY SIGNAL A
1. Install the electric oil pump relay.

2. Connect the TCM connector.
B
3. Check the voltage between the TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
C
Connector Terminal
• Selector lever: “D”position TM
10 – 16 V
F1 1 Ground
• Selector lever: “D”position
Approx. 0 V
• Vehicle speed: 6 km/h (3 MPH) or less E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation". F
6.CHECK TCM COMMAND SIGNAL
With CONSULT G
3. Select “ELECTRIC OP DUTY”.
H
Monitor item Condition Reference value/Status
ELECTRIC OP DUTY Ignition switch: ON 5 – 15%
I
5. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following condition.
J
ELECTRIC OP DUTY 5 – 15%
• Vehicle speed: 11 km/h (7 MPH) or more K
6. Activate stop/start system. Refer to.EC9-39, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description (M/T mod-
els)".
L
ELECTRIC OP DUTY Stop/start system operating 55 – 85%
M
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation".
N
7.CHECK ELECTRIC OIL PUMP STATUS SIGNAL
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
3. Select “E-OP DUTY MON”.
P
E-OP DUTY MON Ignition switch: ON 25 – 35%
5. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following condition.
TM-585

E-OP DUTY MON 0%
6. Activate stop/start system. Refer to EC9-39, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description (M/T mod-
els)".

E-OP DUTY MON Stop/start system operating 45 – 55%
NO >> There is a malfunction of the electric oil pump. Replace the electric oil pump & motor assembly.
8.DETECTION OF MALFUNCTION ITEMS
• Fuse block (J/B)
• 10A fuse [No. 79, located in fuse block (J/B)] Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and electric oil pump relay harness
connector. Refer to PG-11, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
Component Inspection (Electric Oil Pump Relay) INFOID:0000000010249644

1. Remove the electric oil pump relay. Refer to TM-430, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location".
2. Apply voltage of 12 V between the electric oil pump relay connector terminals 1 and 2.
CAUTION:
• When applying voltage, put a fuse between terminals.
3. Check continuity between the electric oil pump relay connector terminals 3 and 5.

Terminal
Apply voltage between terminals 1 and 2. Existed
3 5
Do not apply voltage between terminals 1 and 2. Not existed
NO >> Replace the electric oil pump relay. Refer to TM-430, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component
Parts Location".
Component Inspection (Diode) INFOID:0000000010249645
• Check continuity with a tester.
TM-586
• The diode is normal if the result is as shown in the figure when the
polarity is reversed. A
NOTE:
Tester specifications may vary depending on the tester type. Refer to
the handling manual of the tester before checking continuity.
B
JSDIA2056GB
TM
TM-587
P188F ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
When 1 is not satisfied and 2 and 3 are satisfied:
1. When any of the following conditions are satisfied (di-
agnosis prohibition condition):
- Electric oil pump relay ON is being instructed and with-
in 0.52 seconds after battery voltage recovers from the
- Within 0.35 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON
- Electric oil pump system malfunction is being deter-
mined
- Secondary pressure sensor malfunction is being deter-
mined
2. When all of the following conditions are satisfied and
- During idling stop
- Secondary pressure: Less than 0.03 MPa • Electric oil pump
P188F Electric Oil Pump 3. When all of the following conditions are satisfied and • Secondary pressure sensor
- Judgment for 2 is complete (Idling stop oil pressure
lowering judgment for the first time is complete.)
- Electric oil pump air bleeding is complete after ignition
switch is turned OFF
- Secondary pressure: Less than 0.03 MPa
- None of the following items are satisfied:
• A sudden deceleration of −5.88 m/s2 (−0.6 G) or less is
experienced
• Ignition switch is turned OFF after judgment of 2 is
complete
• When all of the following conditions are satisfied and
1 (diagnosis prohibition condition) is not satisfied
During idling stop
Secondary pressure: 0.03 MPa or more

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
3. Restart the engine and drive.
4. Maintain stop/start system operation state for 10 seconds or more again.
NOTE:
If the engine restarts automatically 10 seconds later, the system may be in fail safe.
TM-588
5. Check the DTC.
“P188F” detected? A
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC DETECTION (PART 2) B
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
4. Restart the engine and drive. TM
5. Maintain stop/start system operation state for 10 seconds or more again.
NOTE:
If the engine restarts automatically 10 seconds later, the system may be in fail safe. E
6. Check the DTC.
“P188F” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-589, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
G
1.AIR BLEEDING OF ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
Perform air bleeding of the electric oil pump. Refer to TM-507, "Work Procedure".
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to TM-588, "DTC Logic".
“P188F” detected?
J
YES >> Replace the electric oil pump & motor assembly. Refer to TM-648, "Removal and Installation".
TM-589
P1890 ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When 1 is not satisfied and 2 is satisfied, and this state
is maintained for 5 seconds or more:
1. When any of the following conditions are satis-
fied (diagnosis prohibition condition): • Electric oil pump relay
- Battery voltage: 10 V or less • TCM
- Within 0.35 seconds after ignition switch is • Harness or connector
P1890 Electric Oil Pump Relay
turned ON (Open circuit or short circuit
- Electric oil pump air bleed judgment: Air bleeding in harness between the TCM
in progress or air bleeding is in judgment and the electric oil pump.)
and electric oil pump duty 0 %

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the DTC.
“P1890” detected?

1. Check the electric oil pump relay. Refer to TM-592, "Component Inspection (Electric Oil Pump Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the electric oil pump relay.
2.CHECK ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY POWER CIRCUIT
Check voltage between the electric oil pump relay harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Electric oil pump relay − Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1
F119 Ground Always 10 – 16 V
5
YES >> GO TO 3.
TM-590
NO >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY (PART 1) A
1. Disconnect the TCM connector.

2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and electric oil pump relay harness connector
B
terminal.
NOTE:
• A diode is located between TCM and the electric oil pump relay.
• To check diode, refer to TM-592, "Component Inspection (Diode)". C
+ −
Continuity
TM
TCM Electric oil pump relay
F1 1 F119 2 Existed E
+ −
Electric oil pump relay TCM Continuity F
F119 2 F1 1 Not existed
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. H
Check continuity between the electric oil pump relay harness connector terminal and ground.
I

— Continuity
Connector Terminal J
YES >> GO TO 5. K
5.CHECK ELECTRIC OIL PUMP RELAY SIGNAL L
1. Install the electric oil pump relay.
2. Connect the TCM connector.
3. Check the voltage between the TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
M
+
TCM − Condition Voltage N
Connector Terminal
10 – 16 V
• Vehicle speed: 11 km/h (7 MPH) or more O
F1 1 Ground
Approx. 0 V
Is the inspection result normal? P
NO >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation".
6.DETECTION OF MALFUNCTION ITEMS
• Fuse block (J/B)
TM-591
• 10A fuse [No. 79, located in fuse block (J/B)] Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and electric oil pump relay harness
connector. Refer to PG-11, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
Component Inspection (Electric Oil Pump Relay) INFOID:0000000010249650

1. Remove the electric oil pump relay. Refer to TM-430, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location".
2. Apply voltage of 12 V between the electric oil pump relay connector terminals 1 and 2.
CAUTION:
• When applying voltage, put a fuse between terminals.
3. Check continuity between the electric oil pump relay connector terminals 3 and 5.

Terminal
Apply voltage between terminals 1 and 2. Existed
3 5
Do not apply voltage between terminals 1 and 2. Not existed
NO >> Replace the electric oil pump relay. Refer to TM-430, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component
Parts Location".
Component Inspection (Diode) INFOID:0000000010249651
• Check continuity with a tester.

• The diode is normal if the result is as shown in the figure when the
polarity is reversed.
NOTE:
Tester specifications may vary depending on the tester type. Refer to
the handling manual of the tester before checking continuity.
JSDIA2056GB
TM-592
A

When 1 is satisfied and any of 2, 3 or 4 is sat-
onds:
1. When all of the following conditions are TM
satisfied:
- TCM power supply voltage: More than 11
V
E
- After range change completion, it spends
2 seconds or more.
satisfied and this state is maintained for F
5 seconds:
- Secondary pulley speed: Less than 150
rpm
- Primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or more G
0.5 seconds:
- 10-msec-ago secondary pulley speed: H
1000 rpm or more
- Now secondary pulley speed: 0 rpm
• Harness or connector I
INPUT SPEED SENSOR B (Output speed sensor circuit is open or
5 seconds:
P2765 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor shorted)
- Range: D or Ds
B Circuit) • Output speed sensor
- Engine speed: 450 rpm or more J
- Secondary pulley speed: 300 rpm or
more
- Input speed: 300 rpm or more K
and primary pulley speed is 1,000 rpm or
less
- The difference between engine speed L
and input speed is 1,000 rpm or less
- The difference between primary pulley
speed and input speed is 1,000 rpm or
less M
- Lock-up command is being given (except
for slip lock-up)
detected.
N
- When any of following items are satis-
fied:
• Primary pulley speed/secondary pulley O
speed: More than 2.9
speed: Less than 0.3
P
CAUTION:
TM-593
>> GO TO 2.

1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT

4. Check voltage between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
Output speed sensor − Voltage
Connector Terminal
F41 3 Ground 10 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Output speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
Output speed sensor TCM

Continuity
F41 2 F1 34 Existed
TM-594
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. A
B
Output speed sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal C
YES >> GO TO 5. TM
5.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS E
F
4. Check frequency of output speed sensor.
+
Frequency G
TCM − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
200 Hz H

F1 34 Ground I
JSDIA1904GB J
NO >> Replace output speed sensor. Refer to TM-636, "Removal and Installation". K

Check the following items: L
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and output speed sensor. Refer to PG-56,
"Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• IPDM E/R M
N
TM-595
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When any of 1, or 2 is satisfied:
1. When all the following conditions are es-
tablished three times in 1DC
- Precondition
detected.
• Throttle position: More than 6.27 deg.
MPH)
• CVT fluid temperature: More than 20°C
(68°F)
• Turbine speed when performed N → D,
N (P) → R: More than 500 rpm
V
- Detection time
• N → D: 0.4 seconds
• N → R: 0.3 seconds
• P → R: 0.3 seconds
SELECT SOLENOID 30 seconds:
P2813 Select solenoid valve
(Select solenoid) - The counting of time continues while all
of the following conditions are satisfied
and stops when the conditions become
unsatisfied (the count is maintained).
When accumulated time reaches 30 sec-
onds (Clutch is judged as engaged and
the count is reset.)
MPH)
• Differences between primary pulley
speed and secondary speed: Less than
120 rpm
• Clutch instructions pressure: 0.95 MPa
or more
• Differences between turbine speed and
input speed: Less than 200 rpm
• Turbine speed – speed: More than 450
rpm
not detected.
V
NOTE:
DC stands for “DRIVING CYCLE” and indicates a series of driving cycle of “Ignition switch OFF → ON → driv-
ing → OFF”.
CAUTION:
TM-596
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test. A
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION 1 B

2. Maintain the following conditions. (Keep 30seconds or more after the selector lever shifted.)
C
Selector lever : N→ D, N → R, P→ R
TM
NO >> INSPECTION END E
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F

G
H
TM-597
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SELECT SOLENOID onds: (Select solenoid valve circuit shorted to
P2814
(Select solenoid) • TCM power supply voltage: 11 V or more ground)
• TCM judges that solenoid valve circuit is • Select solenoid valve
shorted to ground.

CAUTION:
>> GO TO 2.

TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-598
CVT unit A
Connector Terminal
B
TM-599
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

onds:
SELECT SOLENOID (Select solenoid valve circuit open or
(Select solenoid) shorted to power supply)
open.

>> GO TO 2.

TCM CVT unit

Continuity
F1 37 F58 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-600
CVT unit A
Connector Terminal
B
TM-601

+
TCM − Voltage
Connector Terminal
45
46
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
Connector Terminal
47
F1 Ground
48
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
TCM
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
41
F1 Ground Existed
42
4.DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS (PART 1)
and 46.
TM-602
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS (PART 2) A

and 48.
B
• IPDM E/R
C
TM
TM-603
Component Parts Function Inspection INFOID:0000000010245664
1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

3. Check that the selector lever position and the shift position indicator on the combination meter are identi-
cal.
NO >> Go to TM-604, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK TCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
3. Select “RANGE”.
5. Check that selector lever position, “RANGE” on CONSULT screen, and shift position indicator display on
combination meter are identical.
NO-1 (“RANGE” is changed but is not displayed on shift position indicator.>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result”
in “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-2 (“RANGE” and shift position indicator are different.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in “TRANSMIS-
SION”.
NO-3 (Specific “RANGE” is not displayed on shift position indicator.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in
“METER/M&A”.
TM-604
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010245666
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1) B

1. Turn ignition ON.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal released. C
NO >> GO TO 2. TM
2.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other than position with the brake pedal depressed. E
NO >> Go to TM-605, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) G

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector
3. Turn ignition switch ON. H
4. Check the voltage between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.
+ I
Stop lamp switch − Voltage
Connector Terminal
J
E50 3 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2. K
NO >> GO TO 8.
L
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 9.
3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
1. Disconnect CVT shift selector connector N
2. Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and the CVT shift selector
harness connector terminal.
O
Stop lamp switch CVT shift selector
Continuity
E50 4 M9 3 Existed P
3. Also check short circuit in harness.

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHCK GROUND CIRCUIT
TM-605
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Check the continuity between the CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M9 4 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PART POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect park position switch connector.
2. Check park position switch. Refer to TM-607, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
1. Disconnect shift lock solenoid connector.
2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-607, "Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)".
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR HARNESS
Check CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-607, "Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness)".
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and stop lamp switch connector. Refer to PG-
56, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• Ignition switch
• 10A fuse [No.4, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
9.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH
Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD), BR-52, "Inspection and
Adjustment" (RHD).
>> GO TO 10.
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000010245669
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between the stop lamp switch connector terminals.
TM-606
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Stop lamp switch A

Terminal
Depressed brake pedal Yes
3–4 B
Released brake pedal No
YES >> INSPECTION END C
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-17, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-61, "Exploded View"
(RHD).
Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) INFOID:0000000010475026
TM
1.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH

E
Check continuity between park position switch connector terminals.
CAUTION:
• Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
• Never cause shorting between terminals. F
Park position switch

Condition Continuity G
Terminal
Shift selector lever to “P” position. Existed
1–2
Other than above Not existed H
NO >> Replace park position switch. Refer to TM-619, "Disassembly and Assembly". I
Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000010475027
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID J
Apply voltage to terminals of shift lock solenoid connector and check that shift lock solenoid is activated.
CAUTION:
• Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. K
L
Shift lock solenoid
+ (fuse) − Condition Status
Terminal M
Apply battery voltage be-
1 2 Shift lock solenoid operates
tween terminals 1 and 2.
Is the inspection result normal? N
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-619, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Component Inspection (CVT Shift Selector Harness) INFOID:0000000010475028
O

P
Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and shift lock solenoid harness con-
nector terminal.
CVT shift selector Shift lock solenoid

Continuity
M9 3 M326 1 Existed
TM-607
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check continuity between shift lock solenoid harness connector terminal and park position switch harness
connector terminal.
Shift lock solenoid Park position switch

Continuity
M326 2 M325 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between park switch harness connector terminal and CVT shift selector harness connector
terminal.
Park switch CVT shift selector

Continuity
M325 2 M9 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace CVT shift selector harness. Refer to TM-617, "Removal and Installation".
Check harness cladding CVT shift selector harness for damage.
TM-608
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [CVT: RE0F10G]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010245670
B
• The diagnosis item number indicates the order of check. Start checking in the order from 1.
• Perform diagnoses of symptom table 1 before symptom table 2.
C
Symptom Table 1

TM

E


F

G



Symptom
H
Engine system
Power supply
Control valve
CVT position
I
Stall test
J
PG-56, STR-18
EC9-137
TM-508
TM-619
TM-602
TM-629
TM-615
TM-485
K
Large shock (N→D position) 1 4 7 3 6 2 8 5

Shift Shock Large shock (N→R position) 1 4 7 3 6 2 8 5
L
Shock is too large for lock-up. 2 3 6 1 5 4
Vehicle cannot be started from D posi-
8 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 4 2 12 13 1 M
tion.
Vehicle cannot be started from R posi-
8 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 4 2 12 13 1
tion.
N
Does not lock-up. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1
Slips/Will Not Does not hold lock-up condition. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1

Engage Lock-up is not released. 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 1 O
With selector lever in D position, ac-
3 4 5 7 8 9 12 10 11 2 6 13 14 1
celeration is extremely poor.
With selector lever in R position, ac- P
3 4 5 7 8 9 12 10 11 2 6 13 14 1
celeration is extremely poor.
Slips at lock-up. 2 6 8 3 4 10 9 11 12 5 7 13 1
TM-609
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM





Symptom
Engine system
Power supply
Control valve
CVT position
Stall test
PG-56, STR-18
EC9-137
TM-508
TM-619
TM-602
TM-629
TM-615
TM-485
No creep at all. 2 4 3 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 13 14 1
Vehicle cannot run in any position. 8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
With selector lever in D position, driv-
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
ing is not possible.
With selector lever in R position, driv-
8 2 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 4 12 13 1
ing is not possible.
Judder occurs during lock-up. 2 6 3 4 5 7 8 1
Strange noise in D position. 2 3 4 1
Strange noise in N position. 2 3 4 1
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine
7 3 4 5 6 2 8 1
brake.
Maximum speed low. 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 4 10 1
Other
With selector lever in P position, vehi-
cle does not enter parking condition or,
1 2
with selector lever in another position,
parking condition is not cancelled.
Vehicle runs with CVT in P position. 1 3 4 2
Vehicle runs with CVT in N position. 1 3 4 2
Engine stall. 2 6 3 4 8 9 5 7 10 1
Engine stalls when selector lever shift-
2 6 3 4 5 7 1
ed N → D or R.
Engine speed does not return to idle. 2 4 3 5 1
Engine does not start in N or P posi-
3 2 1
tion.
Engine starts in positions other than N
3 2 1
or P.
Symptom Table 2
TM-610
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM

A
Parking mechanism
Shift lock solenoid
CVT shift selector

Stop lamp switch
Torque converter
B
Forward clutch
Reverse brake
Planetary gear
Symptom
Oil pump
Bearings
C
TM-656
TM-606
TM-605
TM-617
TM-653 TM
Large shock (N→D position) 2 1

Shift Shock Large shock (N→R position) 2 1 E
Shock is too large for lock-up. 1
3 1 2 F
position.
4 1 2 3
position.
Does not lock-up. 1 3 2
G
Slips/Will Does not hold lock-up condition. 1 3 2

Not Engage Lock-up is not released. 1 2 H
1 3 2
With selector lever in R position, I
1 4 2 3
Slips at lock-up. 1 2
J
TM-611
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Parking mechanism
Shift lock solenoid
CVT shift selector

Stop lamp switch
Torque converter
Forward clutch
Reverse brake
Planetary gear
Symptom
Oil pump
Bearings
TM-656
TM-606
TM-605
TM-617
TM-653
No creep at all. 1 6 2 4 5 3
Vehicle cannot run in all posi-
1 2 4 5 3 6
tions.
1 2 4 3 5
1 2 4 3 5
Judder occurs during lock-up. 1
Strange noise in D position. 1 2 4 3 5
Strange noise in N position. 1 2 3
Maximum speed low. 1 5 2 4 3
vehicle does not enter parking
condition or, with selector lever in 1
Other another position, parking condi-
2 1
tion.
2 3 1
tion.
Engine stall. 1
Engine stalls when selector lever
1
When brake pedal is depressed
with ignition switch ON, selector
1 2 3
lever cannot be shifted from P po-
sition to other position.
When brake pedal is not de-
pressed with ignition switch ON,
1 2 3
selector lever can be shifted from
P position to other position.
TM-612
CVT FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [CVT: RE0F10G]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
CVT FLUID
B
FLUID LEAKAGE
• Check transaxle surrounding area (oil seal and plug etc.)for fluid C
leakage.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts and adjust
CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-615, "Adjustment".
TM
SMA146B
F
Replacement INFOID:0000000010245672
G
CAUTION:
• Always use shop paper. Never use shop cloth. H
• Replace a drain plug gasket with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
• After replacement, always perform CVT fluid leakage check. I
2. Select “FLUID TEMP” and confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
3. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake. J
5. Remove the drain plug and drain the CVT fluid from the oil pan. Refer to TM-629, "Exploded View".
6. Install the drain plug to oil pan. K
CAUTION:
Drain plug gasket use the old one.
7. Remove the overflow plug from converter housing. L
: Vehicle front
M
JSDIA3714ZZ
O
TM-613
CVT FLUID
plug hole.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
11. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
the overflow plug. JSDIA3713ZZ
NOTE:
14. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “D”, and shift it
NOTE:
18. Remove the drain plug, and then drain CVT fluid from oil pan.
19. Repeat steps 6 to 18 (one time).
20. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-629, "Exploded View".
21. Remove the overflow plug.
22. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) into the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
23. Install the ATF changer hose to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging pipe until it stops.
25. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install the overflow plug.
NOTE:
NOTE:
31. Remove the overflow plug and confirm that the CVT fluid is drained from the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If the CVT fluid is not drained, refer to “Adjustment” and refill with the CVT fluid.
32. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, tighten the overflow plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
TM-614
CVT FLUID
35. Select “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN”. A
36. Select “Erase”.
37. Perform air bleeding of electric oil pump. Refer to TM-507, "Work Procedure".
B
CAUTION: TM
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check CONSULT so that the oil temperature may be main-
tained from 35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F).
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check that the engine speed is maintaining 500 rpm.
E
F
3. Adjust the CVT fluid temperature to be approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The CVT fluid is largely affected by temperature. Therefore be sure to use CONSULT and check the
“FLUID TEMP” under “TRANSMISSION” in “Data Monitor” while adjusting. G
NOTE: H
6. Check that there is no CVT fluid leakage. I
: Vehicle front J
L
JSDIA3714ZZ
8. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the overflow M
plug hole.
CAUTION:
N
CAUTION:
pipe until it stops. O
10. Fill approximately 0.5 liter (1/2 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
11. Remove the ATF changer hose from the charging pipe, and
check that the CVT fluid drains out from the charging pipe. If it JSDIA3713ZZ P
does not drain out, perform charging again.
CAUTION:
12. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, remove the charging pipe from the converter housing.
13. Tighten the overflow plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-629, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
TM-615
CVT FLUID
TM-616
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10G]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
B
TM
JSDIA5217GB J
Selector lever knob Lock pin Selector lever knob cover

Position indication panel CVT shift selector assembly Park position switch K
Shift lock unit Detent switch* Position indicator bulb
L
*: With push engine starter

M
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before removal and installation.
REMOVAL N
CAUTION:
Make sure the vehicle cannot move with the parking brake applied. O
P
5. Remove the shift selector knob with the following procedure.
TM-617
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
a. Slide the selector lever knob cover down.
CAUTION:
Never damage the knob cover.
b. Pull out the lock pin from the selector lever knob .
c. Pull the selector lever knob and the selector lever knob cover
upwards to remove them.
6. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and
Installation".
JSDIA2778ZZ

JSDIA4220ZZ
9. Disconnect the CVT shift selector connector .

10. Remove the CVT shift selector assembly from the vehicle.
JSDIA5384ZZ
INSTALLATION
• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector assembly.
NOTE:
tion.
JSDIA1624ZZ
TM-618
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
CAUTION: A
B
it.
JSDIA1810ZZ
TM
• Follow the procedure below and place the selector lever knob onto the CVT shift selector.
1. Install the lock pin onto the selector lever knob .
2. Install the knob cover onto the selector lever knob. E
4. Press the selector lever knob onto the selector lever until it
clicks. F
CAUTION:
• When install, never press selector button.
• Never strike the selector lever knob to press it into place.
5. After installing selector lever knob, pull the knob to check that it G
does not become disconnected.
JSDIA2778ZZ
H
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010476164
DISASSEMBLY I
2. Disengage the hooks (4 locations), and lift up the position indication panel to separate it from the CVT shift
selector assembly. J
CAUTION:
3. Remove shift lock unit mounting screws.
K
4. Remove the shift lock unit from the CVT shift selector assembly.
5. Disconnect the park position switch connector, detent switch connector and shift lock solenoid connector
from the shift lock unit. L
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
M

N
• Check the CVT shift selector position. Refer to TM-509, "Inspection".
• Check that shift lock can be forcible release. Refer to TM-445, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion".
• The key can be removed only when the selector lever is in the “P” position. (Without push engine starter) O
(Without push engine starter)
P
TM-619
CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
JSDIA5218GB
Control cable Lock plate Transaxle assembly

Bracket Bracket CVT shift selector assembly
Manual lever Grommet
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
2. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation".
TM-620
CONTROL CABLE
4. Disengage the hooks (4 locations), and lift up the position
indication panel to separate it from the CVT shift selector. A
CAUTION:
B
JSDIA4229ZZ
TM
6. Remove the air duct (inlet) and air cleaner case. Refer to EM- E
7. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-155, "Removal and Installa-
tion". F
8. Remove the TCM bracket and TCM. Refer to TM-625, "Removal
and Installation".
9. Remove the battery mounting bracket assembly. Refer to PG- G
154, "Exploded View". JSDIA4220ZZ
10. Remove the control cable nut ( ) and remove the control cable H
from the manual lever .
: Vehicle front
I
JSDIA4147ZZ
K
11. Remove the lock plate and remove the control cable from
bracket .
L
: Vehicle front
12. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-22, "Exploded

M
View"
13. Remove heat plate.
N
JSDIA4148ZZ
14. Remove the control cable from bracket . O
: Vehicle front
P
15. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.
JPDIA0107ZZ
TM-621
CONTROL CABLE
INSTALLATION
Note the following and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the CVT shift selector assembly.
NOTE:
tion.
JSDIA1624ZZ

CAUTION:
it.
JSDIA1810ZZ

Adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-509, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER ADJUSTMENT
Check the CVT shift selector position after the adjustment. Refer to TM-509, "Inspection".
TM-622
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
A
TM
G
JSDIA5227ZZ
Shift selector assembly Clip Key interlock cable

H
Clip Key cylinder

I
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation. J
1. Remove the lower instrument panel (driver side) and steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation". K
3. Press the pawls of the key interlock cable slider while slid-
ing it in the direction of the casing cap , and separate the
adjusting holder and slider. L
:Key interlock rod

M
4. Remove the key interlock cable from the shift selector.
N
JSDIA1797ZZ
5. Lift the clip in the direction of the arrow ( ) and remove in O

the direction of the arrow ( ).
: Key interlock cable P

: Key cylinder
6. Remove the key interlock cable from the key cylinder.

7. Disengage the clip and disconnect the key interlock cable from
the vehicle.
JSDIA1798ZZ
TM-623
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
INSTALLATION
1. Move the shift selector to "P" position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON position.
3. Install the holder of key interlock cable to key cylinder.
4. Install the clip in the direction of the arrow ( ) and push it
in the direction of the arrow ( ).
: Key interlock cable

: Key cylinder
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
JSDIA3589ZZ
6. Install the adjusting holder onto the key interlock rod , then
install the casing cap onto the shift selector cable bracket .
CAUTION:
• When installing the key interlock cable, do not bend or
twist the cable forcefully.
• After connecting the key interlock cable to the shift selec-
tor cable bracket, be sure to check that the casing cap is
completely fastened to the cable bracket. If the casing cap
is easily displaced, replace the key interlock cable.
JSDIA1799ZZ
7. Slide the key interlock cable slider toward the key interlock
rod side and install the adjusting holder and key interlock
rod.
CAUTION:
• Never squeeze the pawls on the key interlock cable slider
when holding the slider.
• Never apply force in a perpendicular direction to the key
interlock rod when sliding the slider.
8. Install the center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
9. Install the lower instrument panel (driver side) and steering col- JSDIA2644ZZ
umn cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".


• Check the CVT position. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-509, "Inspection".
• The key can be removed only when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
TM-624
TCM
TCM
A
TM
G
JSDIA5219GB
Bracket TCM
H

I
CAUTION:
• Never impact the TCM when removing or installing TCM.
• Before replacing TCM and transaxle assembly simultaneously, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE J
WHEN REPLACING TCM AND TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY”. Refer to TM-504, "Work Procedure".
• Before replacing TCM, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM”. Refer to TM-500,
"Work Procedure". K
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-155, "Removal and Installation"
2. Remove the air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-380, "Exploded View". L
3. Disconnect the TCM harness connector and ECM harness

connector .
M
JSDIA5385ZZ
TM-625
TCM
4. Remove the ECM bracket mounting bolts ( ) and remove ECM
bracket from the vehicle.
5. Remove the TCM mounting nuts and remove TCM from bracket.
JSDIA5386ZZ
INSTALLATION

When replacing TCM, perform "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM". Refer to TM-500, "Work
Procedure".
TM-626
AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JSDIA5220ZZ
Air breather hose cap Air breather hose Breather tube

H
Transaxle assembly

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air duct (inlet), air cleaner cases assembly with mass air flow sensor, and air duct assembly.
J
Refer to EM-380, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove air breather hose.
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
• Never bend the air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
L
• Insert air breather hose to the end of air breather.
• Insert air breather hose to air breather tube all the way to
the curve of the tube.
• Insert air breather hose to air breather tube so that the paint M
mark is facing upward.
O
JSDIA5387ZZ
TM-627
G SENSOR
G SENSOR
JSDIA5228GB
G sensor
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact.
• Never use a power tool to avoid impact.
REMOVAL
2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect G sensor harness connector.
4. Remove G sensor mounting nuts and remove G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Perform “CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR”. Refer to TM-506, "Work Procedure".
TM-628
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
A
COMPONENT PARTS LOCATION B
TM
JSDIA4194GB
J
Transaxle assembly Oil pan gasket Oil pan
Drain plug Drain plug gasket Magnet
K
Overflow plug O-ring
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L
: Apply CVT fluid M
N
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain plug from oil pan and then drain the CVT fluid.
O
JSDIA5205ZZ
TM-629
OIL PAN
2. Remove drain plug gasket .
JSDIA5206ZZ
3. Remove oil pan bolts ( ).
: Vehicle front
4. Remove oil pan from transaxle case.
JSDIA5207ZZ
5. Remove oil pan gasket from oil pan.
JSDIA5208ZZ
6. Remove magnets from oil pan.
JSDIA5209ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket.
• Never reuse drain plug gasket.
• Completely clean the iron powder from the magnet area of oil pan and the magnets.
• Install the oil pan to the transaxle case with the following procedure.
1. Install the oil pan gasket to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
TM-630
OIL PAN
Completely wipe out any moisture, oil, and old gasket from the oil pan gasket surface and bolt
hole of oil pan and transaxle case. A
2. Install the oil pan assembly to the transaxle case, and then temporarily tighten the oil pan bolt.
3. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the order shown to the specified
torque.
B
: Vehicle front
4. Tighten the oil pan bolts again clockwise from (1) shown to the C
specified torque.
• Fill with CVT fluid after installation. Refer to TM-613, "Replace-
ment".
TM
JSDIA5211ZZ
E

Check oil pan for foreign material. F
• If a large amount of worn material is found, clutch plate may be worn.
• If iron powder is found, bearings, gears, or clutch plates may be worn.
• If aluminum powder is found, bushing may be worn, or chips or burrs of aluminum casting parts may enter. G
Check points where wear is found in all cases.
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid. H
TM-631
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
JSDIA5131GB
Transaxle assembly O-ring Input speed sensor

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
3. Remove the ECM (TCM) bracket and ECM (TCM). Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation".
"Exploded View".
6. Remove the CVT fluid cooler hose A and CVT fluid cooler hose
B. Refer to TM-642, "Exploded View"
7. Remove the engine undercover.
8. Remove the CVT water hose A and CVT water hose B. Refer to
TM-640, "Removal and Installation"
9. Disconnect the input speed sensor harness connector.
10. Remove the input speed sensor mounting bolt and remove the
input speed sensor. JSDIA5410ZZ
TM-632
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
11. Remove the O-ring from the input speed sensor.
A
JSDIA5196ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring. E
F
G
H
TM-633
JSDIA5132GB
Transaxle assembly Primary speed sensor O-ring

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
2. Remove the Hoodledge splashguard (LH). Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect the primary speed harness connector.
4. Remove the primary speed sensor mounting bolt and remove the primary speed sensor.
5. Remove the O-ring from the primary speed sensor.
JSDIA5199ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
TM-634
A
TM
TM-635
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
JSDIA5133GB
Transaxle assembly Output speed sensor O-ring

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
2. Remove the Hoodledge splashguard (LH). Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect the output speed sensor harness connector.
4. Remove the output speed sensor mounting bolt and remove the output speed sensor.
5. Remove the O-ring from the output speed sensor.
JSDIA5199ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
TM-636
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
TM
TM-637
JSDIA3729GB
Transaxle assembly Differential side oil seal (left side) Differential side oil seal (right side)
: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
NOTE:
ing.
1. Remove front drive shaft. Refer to FAX-22, "Removal and Installation (LH)", FAX-26, "Removal and Instal-
lation (RH)".
(commercial service tool) (A).
CAUTION:
housing.
JPDIA0118ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to differential side oil seals.
• When inserting the drive shaft, be sure to use Tool.
Tool number : KV38107900
TM-638
Install each differential side oil seal evenly using Tool so that differ-
ential side oil seal protrudes by the dimension (C) and (D) respect- A
fully.
: Differential side oil seal (left side)

B
: Differential side oil seal (right side)
ALDIA0400ZZ
TM
Dimension (C) :Height difference from case end surface is within 1.8 ± 0.5 mm (0.071 ±
0.020 in). E
Dimension (D) :Height difference from case end surface is within 2.2 ± 0.5 mm (0.087 ±
0.020 in).
NOTE: F
The reference is the installation direction of the differential side oil seal.
Drift to be used:
Location Commercial Service Tools G
Transaxle case side Commercial service tool with outer dia. 56 mm (2.20 in) and in-
Converter housing side ner dia. 50 mm (1.97 in)
H
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION I

Drive the vehicle and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid.
J
TM-639
WATER HOSE
WATER HOSE
JSDIA5221ZZ
Hose clamp Water hose A Radiator hose assembly

Water hose B CVT oil warmer Transaxle assembly
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
CAUTION:
NOTE:
ing.
"Exploded View".
6. Release hose clamps and remove CVT water hose.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse hose clamps.
JSDIA5410ZZ
INSTALLATION
TM-640
WATER HOSE
CAUTION:
Do not reuse hose clamps. A
Hose Installation side tube Direction of paint mark Hose insertion depth “L”
: End reaches the 2-stage B

bulge.
Water hose A
Radiator hose assembly Frontward : Hose end reaches the end
of radiator hose assembly tube. C
CVT oil warmer Upward : End reaches the 2-stage

bulge.
Water hose B TM
Radiator hose assembly Frontward : Hose end reaches the end
of radiator hose assembly tube.
•
ALDIA0475ZZ
H
CAUTION:
• Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of tube. I
Installation side tube Hose clamp

Hose
Direction of tab Clamping position J
Water hose A Radiator hose as-
Rearward K
sembly 5 – 7 mm (0.20 – 0.28
CVT oil warmer Leftward in) (A) from hose end
Water hose B Radiator hose as-
Rearward L
sembly
JSDIA2424ZZ
M
Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant and CVT fluid.
N
TM-641
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
INFORMATION
Service information Destination

Type A Except for Russia production models
Type B Russia production models
Refer to GI-24, "Information About Identification or Model Code" to identify a production plant.
Transaxle side
JSDIA5222GB
CVT fluid cooler tube A Copper washer CVT fluid cooler hose A
Hose clamp CVT fluid cooler tube B CVT oil warmer
Transaxle assembly
TM-642
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Vehicle side (Type A)
A
TM
I
JSDIA5223GB
Bumper reinforcement Bracket Bracket

J
CVT fluid cooler Hose clamp CVT fluid cooler hose D
CVT fluid cooler tube assembly B Bumper reinforcement lower CVT fluid cooler hose C
CVT fluid cooler hose E Bracket CVT fluid cooler tube assembly A K
CVT fluid cooler hose F CVT fluid cooler hose B Front side member LH
Transaxle assembly CVT oil warmer CVT fluid cooler tube A
L
M
TM-643
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Vehicle side (Type B)
JSDIA5224GB
Bumper reinforcement Bracket Bracket

CVT fluid cooler Hose clamp CVT fluid cooler hose D
CVT fluid cooler tube assembly B CVT fluid cooler hose C CVT fluid cooler hose E
Bracket Radiator core support CVT fluid cooler hose F
CVT fluid cooler tube assembly A CVT fluid cooler hose B Transaxle assembly
CVT oil warmer CVT fluid cooler tube A
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
Perform these steps after the engine coolant temperature has cooled sufficiently.
NOTE:
ing.
1. Remove the front bumper. Refer to EXT-19, "Removal and Installation".
TM-644
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
4. Remove the ECM (TCM) bracket and ECM (TCM). Refer to TM-625, "Removal and Installation". A
"Exploded View".
6. Remove the harness bracket mounting nuts ( ) and remove B
7. Remove hose clamps of CVT cooler hose F and B to remove the
hose on the CVT oil warmer side. C
TM
JSDIA5410ZZ
E
8. Remove hose clamp ( ) of CVT fluid cooler to remove the

hose on the CVT fluid cooler side. F
JSDIA5412ZZ
I
9. Remove bracket mounting nut ( ) to remove CVT cooler hose
B, C, E, and F together with CVT fluid cooler tube assembly A.
J
L
JSDIA5413ZZ
10. Remove the bracket mounting bolts ( ) and remove the CVT M
fluid cooler from the vehicle.
11. Remove CVT fluid cooler hose D.
12. Remove the fluid cooler tube assembly B from CVT fluid cooler. N
13. Remove hose clamp of CVT cooler hose A to remove the hose
on the CVT oil warmer side.
14. Remove CVT fluid cooler tube A and CVT fluid cooler tube B. O
JSDIA5414ZZ
P
INSTALLATION
Transaxle side
TM-645
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Refer to the followings when installing CVT fluid cooler hose.
• When installing fluid cooler tube A and fluid cooler tube B to
transaxle assembly.
- Contact fluid cooler tube A stopper to transaxle case boss .
- Contact fluid cooler tube B stopper to transaxle case boss .
• Refer to the followings when installing CVT fluid cooler hose.
CAUTION:
Never reuse hose clamps.
JSDIA5425ZZ
Installation side Hose insertion depth

Hose Direction of paint mark
tube "A"
CVT fluid CVT oil warmer Upward

Hose end reaches the
cooler hose CVT fluid cooler
Frontward end of tube.
A tube B
SCIA7203E

CAUTION:
Installation side Hose clamp

Hose
tube Direction of tab Clamping position
Upward and 45°
CVT fluid CVT oil warmer
rightward 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)
cooler hose
CVT fluid cooler (A) from hose end
A Frontward
tube B
JSDIA2424ZZ
Vehicle side
• Refer to the followings when installing CVT fluid cooler hose.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage CVT fluid cooler.
• Do not reuse hose clamps.
TM-646
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Direction of Hose insertion depth A

Hose Installation side tube paint mark “L”
: Hose end reaches

CVT oil warmer Upward the end of CVT oil B
CVT fluid cool- warmer tube.
er hose B
CVT fluid cooler tube as-
sembly A
Leftward C
CVT fluid cool- sembly A
er hose C CVT fluid cooler tube as-
TM
sembly B
CVT fluid cool- sembly B Frontward : Hose end reaches
er hose D E
CVT fluid cooler the 2-stage bulge .
CVT fluid cooler

CVT fluid cool-
er hose E CVT fluid cooler tube as- F
sembly A
Leftward
CVT fluid cool- sembly A
er hose F G
JSDIA1640ZZ
CVT fluid cooler tube Frontward
• Refer to the followings when installing hose clamp. H

CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
I
Installation side tube Hose clamp
Hose
Direction of tab Clamping position
CVT oil warmer Upward J
CVT fluid cool-
er hose B CVT fluid cooler tube
assembly A
Leftward
CVT fluid cooler tube K
CVT fluid cool- assembly A
er hose C CVT fluid cooler tube
assembly B JSDIA2424ZZ
L
CVT fluid cooler tube 5 – 9 mm (0.20 –
CVT fluid cool- assembly B Upward 0.35 in) (A) from
er hose D hose end
CVT fluid cooler M
CVT fluid cooler
CVT fluid cool-
er hose E CVT fluid cooler tube
assembly A N
Leftward
CVT fluid cooler tube
CVT fluid cool- assembly A
er hose F O
CVT fluid cooler tube Frontward
P
TM-647
ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
JSDIA5137GB
Transaxle assembly O-ring Electric oil pump & motor assembly

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-155, "Removal and Installation"
"Exploded View".
5. Disconnect the electric oil pump connector.
JSDIA5410ZZ
TM-648
ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
6. Remove the electric oil pump mounting bolts ( ) and remove
the electric oil pump & motor assembly . A
JSDIA5215ZZ
TM
7. Remove the O-rings .
G
JSDIA5216ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
• Apply CVT fluid to the O-ring. I
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION J

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION K
• Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to Refer to TM-615, "Adjustment".
• Perform “BLEEDING ELECTRIC OIL PUMP”. Refer to TM-507, "Work Procedure".
L
TM-649
CVT OIL WARMER
CVT OIL WARMER
JSDIA5225GB
Transaxle assembly CVT oil warmer

: N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
CAUTION:
NOTE:
ing.
"Exploded View".
5. Remove the CVT fluid cooler hose A and CVT fluid cooler hose
B. Refer to TM-642, "Exploded View"
6. Remove the engine under cover.
7. Remove the CVT water hose A and CVT water hose B. Refer to
TM-640, "Removal and Installation"
8. Remove CVT fluid cooler tube A and CVT fluid cooler tube B.
9. Remove CVT oil warmer bolts and remove CVT oil warmer from JSDIA5410ZZ
the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
TM-650
CVT OIL WARMER
A
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT fluid and engine coolant.
B
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to Refer to TM-615, "Adjustment".
C
TM
TM-651
PLUG
PLUG
Replace the O-ring if oil leakage or exudes from the plug.

JSDIA5136GB
Transaxle assembly O-ring Plug

: Apply CVT fluid
REMOVAL
1. Remove front fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the plug and O-ring.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

TM-652
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CVT: RE0F10G]

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
B
TM
JSDIA5226GB J
Transaxle assembly O-ring CVT fluid charging pipe

Bracket CVT fluid charging pipe cap Stud bolt B K
Stud bolt A
: For the tightening torque, refer to TM-653, "Removal and Installation".
L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) M
: Apply petroleum jelly
N
REMOVAL
O
WARNING:
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn a quarter turn to
allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way. P
CAUTION:
• Perform when the engine is cold.
• When replacing the TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, replace the transaxle assembly first and
then replace the TCM. Refer to TM-500, "Description".
NOTE:
ing.
TM-653
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
1. Remove engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-431, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the CVT water hoses from transmission side. Refer to TM-640, "Exploded View".
3. Turn crankshaft, and remove the tightening nuts for drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the crankshaft pulley side).
4. Remove the bolts that fasten the transaxle assembly and engine assembly.
5. Separate the engine from the transaxle assembly.
NOTE:
Using paint, put matching marks on the drive plate and torque converter when removing the torque con-
verter to drive plate nuts.
6. Remove following parts from transaxle assembly.
• Air breather hose (Refer to TM-627, "Exploded View".)
• Charging pipe and O-ring
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Write down the serial number of the new transaxle assembly.
JSDIA4208GB
CAUTION:
• When replacing an engine or transaxle you must make sure any dowels are installed correctly during
re-assembly
• Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive
train components.
• Never reuse O-rings or copper sealing washers.
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
• When tightening the nuts for the torque converter while securing the crankshaft pulley bolt, be sure
to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley bolt. Refer to EM-413, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
• After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that CVT rotates
freely without binding.
• When installing the CVT to the engine, align the matching mark on the drive plate with the matching
mark on the torque converter.
• When installing the drive plate to torque converter nuts, tighten them temporarily. then tighten the nuts to the
specified torque.
• Install the transaxle assembly and engine assembly mounting bolts according to the following standards.
TM-654
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Bolt No. * *
A
Engine to Transaxle Engine to
Insertion direction Transaxle to engine
transaxle to engine transaxle
B
Number of bolts 1 1 3 2 4
Bolt length
— — 60 (2.36) 30(1.18) 55 (2.17)
mm (in)
C
Stud length
56(2.20) 96(3.78) — — —
mm (in)
JSDIA5239ZZ
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
48.0 (4.9, 35) TM
*: Stud bolt
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010245717 E
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION

After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A) F
B : Scale
G
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-659, "Torque Converter". H
JPDIA0115ZZ I

J
• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of CVT flluid and engine coolant.
• For CVT position, refer to TM-619, "Inspection".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION K
• Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-615, "Adjustment".
• Perform "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY". Refer to TM-502, "Descrip-
tion".
L
TM-655
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [CVT: RE0F10G]

JSDIA4173ZZ
Torque converter O-ring Converter housing oil seal

Transaxle assembly
: Apply CVT fluid
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-653, "Removal and Installation".

2. Remove torque converter from transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage the bushing on the inside of torque converter sleeve when removing torque con-
verter.
3. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
4. Remove converter housing oil seal using an oil seal remover (commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
Note the followings and assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:
• Never reuse converter housing oil seal.
• Apply CVT fluid to converter housing oil seal.
TM-656
• Drive converter housing oil seal evenly using a drift (A) (com-
mercial service tool) so that converter housing oil seal protrudes by A
the dimension (B) respectively.
Unit: mm (in)
Outer diameter: 65 (2.56) B
Commercial service tool: (A)
Inner diameter: 60 (2.36)
: Transaxle assembly C
SCIA7908J
TM
Dimension (B) : 1.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.039 ± 0.020 in)

NOTE: E
Converter housing oil seal pulling direction is used as the refer-
ence.
F
G
SCIA7909J
• Attach the pawl of the torque converter to the drive sprocket H

hole on the transaxle assembly side.
CAUTION:
• Rotate the torque converter for installing torque converter. I
• Never damage the bushing inside the torque converter
sleeve when installing the converter housing oil seal.
J
SCIA7907J
O
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION P
TM-657
• After inserting a torque converter to the CVT, check dimension (A)
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-659, "Torque Converter".
JPDIA0115ZZ
TM-658
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [CVT: RE0F10G]

B
Engine R9M
Applied model C
Axle 2WD
Transaxle model RE0F10G
D position 2.413 – 0.383 TM
Transaxle gear ratio R position 1.798
Final drive 5.577
E
Recommended fluid MA-59, "Fluids and Lubricants"
Fluid capacity litter (Imp qt) Approx. 8.2 (7-1/4)
Shift Characteristics INFOID:0000000010245723 F
Unit: rpm
CVT input speed G

Throttle position Shift pattern
At 40 km/h (25 MPH) At 60 km/h (37 MPH)
“D” position 1,470 – 2,510 1,570 – 3,200
2/8 H
ECO mode 1,470 – 2,510 1,570 – 3,200
“D” position 3,430 – 4,030 4,100 – 4,700
8/8
ECO mode 3,430 – 4,030 4,100 – 4,700 I
NOTE:
Lock-up is engaged at the vehicle speed of approximately 14 km/h (9 MPH) to 40 km/h (24 MPH).
J
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000010245724
Unit: rpm
K
Stall speed 2,670 – 3,010
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000010245725
L
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “A” between the converter housing and torque converter 18.1 (0.713)
M
TM-659

Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Transaxle & Transmission: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 13 GEAR OIL ......................................................... 24

FINAL DRIVE ..................................................... 67 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 81

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH .......... 75

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 217 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 236

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ....................... 539 P0890 TCM ....................................................... 566

P0779 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 551 P1586 G SENSOR ............................................ 578

1 : 1st main gear

REVERSE GEAR NOISE PREVENTION FUNCTION (SYNCHRONIZING METHOD)

1 : Reverse fork rod

1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH G

Check continuity between position switch terminals with control lever

Terminals Gear position Continuity

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010288438

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010288439

Terminals Gear position Continuity

SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)

BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

BEARING (Worn or damaged)

INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

GEAR (Worn or damaged)

SHIFT FORK (Worn)

OIL (Wrong oil.)

Service Notice or Precautions for Manual Transaxle INFOID:0000000010288441

Tool number Description

KV38100200 • Installing mainshaft front bearing outer race

ST33220000 Installing input shaft oil seal

ST33400001 Installing differential side bearing outer race

KV38100300 Installing differential side oil seal

ST36720030 • Installing input shaft rear bearing

ST30901000 Installing mainshaft rear bearing inner race

KV32300QAM Removing and installing input shaft rear bear-

Tool name Description

Spacer Removing mainshaft front bearing outer race

Drift • Installing bushing

Drift Installing input shaft front bearing

Drift Removing input shaft rear bearing

Drift • Removing differential side bearing inner

Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race

Refer to TM-38, "Exploded View".

1. Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle.

Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-59, "Fluids and

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010735672

5. Remove M/T shift selector assembly from M/T shift selector O

2. Protrude the ornament of shift lever knob .

3. Turn shift lever knob clockwise (30 degrees) until coming to a

Select cable Grommet Tapping bolt

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010735674

11. Remove heat shield plate .

13. Remove cable mounting bracket (floor).

14. Disengage the pawls of grommet , and pull downwards to

When M/T shift selector assembly is replaced with new one:

When M/T shift selector assembly is reused or without lock pin: